Home

Application – Appendix K – Water Treatment OM Plan – Part 7

1. 475 117 La P La gt A M D a bt D O Alarm i o amp wv e f N E K TI SS TIRE 475 C 495 xd a SS e R d pc 121 Fig 7 Drilling diagram for preassembled systems Example with Conex DIA wall mounted unit TMO3 5854 1106 TMOS3 5855 1106 11 11 Installation 11 1 Transport and storage Transport unit carefully do not throw store in dry conditions between 20 and 65 C Store elect
2. QT 1 0000 SCH CODE E EN T 24 sensor ert ll el PE ee le Motor rT Pushbutton CompactLogix System PanelView Ht B Starter Cluster with 1769 ADN Terminal Laptop 7 m Se Ultra 5000 D mE TUA servo Drive Bar Code Input Output indicator Scanner Devices PowerFlex Lights AC Drive You can use these software products with a 1769 CompactLogix controller on a DeviceNet network CompactLogix DeviceNet Software Combinations RSLogix 5000 programming e Configure the software CompactLogix project e Define EtherNet IP communications Yes RSNetWorx software for e Configure DeviceNet DeviceNet devices devices e Define the scan list for DeviceNet devices The DeviceNet communications module e supports messaging to devices not controller to controller e shares a common application layer with ControlNet and EtherNet IP e offers diagnostics for improved data collection and fault detection e requires less wiring than traditional hardwired systems Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 30 Communicate Over Networks You can use a linking device as a e gateway to connect information e control level network to device level network for programming configuration control or data collection e router bridge to connect the EtherNet
3. Fig 5 AQC D1 potentiostatic measuring cell pressure proof with cleaning motor Pos A A112 B1 Q1 Q2 R1 U1 U2 V1 V2 Component Holders for pH single rod electrode and redox electrode optional pH single rod electrode and redox electrode optional Holder for reference electrode Reference electrode Clo CIO O3 Plug for measuring electrode Flow armature Cleaning motor Slide Calibration cup with sample water outlet Evacuation spindle on the calibration cup Sample water extraction device with extraction spindle Bleeding spindle Measuring tube Float body Water sensor optional Screw Filter cartridge Sample water regulating device Adjusting spindle Valve insert Screw plug Deaeration spindle Connection for sample water inlet Connection for sample water outlet Shut off spindle for sample water inlet Shut off spindle for sample water outlet Cleaning wing These positions that are described later on in the document are not shown in the diagram Pos D H P1 P2 P3 Component Measuring electrode Clo CIO2 O3 with integrated Pt100 Screwed part with slide inlet chamber cleaning wing and measuring electrode Filter for screw cap Filter strainer Filter receptacle Pressure loading valve 0 3 bar with adaptor Inlet chamber O rings of the inlet chambe
4. Fig 31 Exploded view of AQC D1 15 Starting up the measuring cell See section 12 Start up TMO3 5882 1106 TMO3 5883 1106 23 16 Spare parts and accessories 16 1 Electrodes sensors and cables Product Component number 96609182 Cable for reference electrode pH or redox 321 252 single rod electrode 1 m 96609183 Cable for reference electrode pH or redox 321 250 single rod electrode 3 m 96609184 321 140 Cable for measuring electrode 1 m 96609185 l 321 141 Cable for measuring electrode 3 m 96609172 l 45 10212 1 Water sensor with cable 1 m 96609173 45 10212 Water sensor with cable 3 m 96609174 314 605 Reference electrode 96609175 553 1561 Measuring electrode gold 96609176 553 1562 Measuring electrode platinum 96609158 l 312 100 Single rod measuring cell pH standard 96609162 l l 313 100 Single rod measuring cell redox standard 96622944 l m 313 105 Redox electrode in combination with DIP only SE Cleaning win 553 1564 g wing 16 2 Other parts Product GE Component Spare parts set Pos Designation Quantity 1 O ring 20 x 2 1 96609171 2 O ring 10 x 2 4 553 1529 3 O ring 50 x 2 1 4 O ring 45 x 3 1 5 O ring 26 x 2 1 6 O ring 8 3 x 2 4 1 96624812 Screw plug with O ring for holder A 553 1593 pH or redox single rod measuring electrode 91834713 12 4568 96609179 12 6459 400
5. DeviceNet Network Distributed remote I O Platform CompactLogix Controller a Other Logix5000 Controller CompactLogix Controller gt E H EIL Seel ER i B e n Control Network Other Remote Devices Topic Page FtherNet IP Network Communication 22 ControlNet Network Communication 25 DeviceNet Communications 28 Serial Communications 31 DH 485 Network Communications ag Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 22 Communicate Over Networks EtherNet IP Network Communication Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 The EtherNet IP network offers a full suite of control configuration and data collection services by layering the Common Industrial Protocol CIP over the standard Internet protocols such as TCP IP and UDP This combination of well accepted standards provides the capability required to both support information data exchange and cont
6. eS Ss Ss Tse IEE Us H CC E arse A EN Deep 1756 CNB Module JE _ l E as an adapter with E t 1756 I O Modules n Ld N 1 one a ControlNet Network i Get NE a VE LE f I d E B38 A EE d FlexLogix Controller with TI usua g 1794 ACN15 Adapter 1788 CNC Card at SB PanelView Terminal 7 with 1794 0 Modules HEE EEE pee 1734 ACNR Adapter with s 1734 1 0 Modules PLC 5 40C Controller Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 Connection Method scheduled Unscheduled Communicate Over Networks 21 Connections Over ControlNet You indirectly determine the number of connections the controller uses by configuring the controller to communicate with other devices in the system Connections are allocations of resources that provide more reliable communications between devices compared to unconnected messages ControlNet Connection Methods Description A
7. Suction or discharge piping not anchored or properly supported Pump is cavitating Increase NPSH available Head lower than rating pumps too much liquid Install throttle valve Liquid heavier than expected Check specific gravity and viscosity Motor requires excessive power Head higher than rating capacity at rating Wrong rotation Hotating parts binding or severely worn Check impeller diameter Correct wiring Check internal wearing parts for proper clearances Installing The Seal Seat General Instructions Before installing seal carefully study the en gineering layout The JOHN CRANE Shaft Seal is a precision pro duct Treat it with care In handling do not let the carbon sealing washer drop or fall and take particular care not to scratch the lapped faces ou the washer aud floating scat There are two locations where seal seats are generally installed a in the end plate or b in cavity in the body casting of the equipment See illustrations at right One of three different types of seats may be furnished for your particular installa tion the L shaped type the O ring type or the cup mounted type see illustra tion at right The L shaped seat hasc a rectangular rubber ring the OT ring style utilizes an O ring in a confined groove and the cup mounted type employs an L
8. 3 X jQ100016002520 5 ERENNERT j 71 2 420 680 10701690 26040 10s 310 500 790 1250 1960 3050 15 540 8504340209032200 20 410 650 1030 1610 2470 3730 25 530 830 1300 1990 3010 3700 J 1 30 430 680 1070 1640 2490 3060 3700 420 790 1210 1830 2250 2710 3290 50 640 980 14801810 2190 2650 3010 6 f 880 1250115401850 224012540 2890 75 S 1030H260 1520 1850 2100 2400 100 940 113011380 11560 1790 115 So eee 0E oodd peted dobedor V 9905 i E Wees 1080 1300 Se a 2 Ma eee 3 p1580250 J J J T 5 X 9e20 480233 j 7 12 660 1060168022650 10 490 780 12401950 III 15 530 8504340200 J 20 6500301610 2520 25 520 830 1300203031100 20 Lean 070 1670 2560380 420 790 124011900 286053510 50 1000 1540 2310 2840 3420 6 850 1300 1960 2400 2890 3500 L5 Ju x nc L L 10601800 1970 2380 2890 e 10 190 1460 1770 2150 2440 2790 CAUTION Use of wire size smaller than listed will void warranty FOOTNOTES 1 If alu
9. HARMSCO Hurricane Filters provide exceptionally long filter runs reduced maintenance and lower filtration costs when used as combination centrifugal separator and cartridge filler or in conventional filtration applications HOW THEY WORK Centrifugal Separation to Remove Dense Particles from Liquids Liquid enters the Hurricane filter s outer cham ber tangentially producing a rotational flow This flow pattern creates a centrifugal force which is used to separate dense particles such as sand rust grit and metal fines from liquids Heavy particles drop to the bottom of the filter s outer chamber where they are discharged manually automatically or continuously With the dense particles removed liquid and light solids rise up over and into an inner chamber where the rotational flow is continued MA Up flow Cartridge Filtration and Angled Pleats for Lightweight Particle Removal Trapped air is automatically purged due to principal of up flow filtration Filtered liquid exits the filter at the highest point as it is filtered A secure top plate prevents cross contamination of filtered and unfiltered liquid This patented up flow design allows Harmsco to utilize 100 of cartridge surface area providing efficient filtration Filter efficiencies are dramatically improved to provide longer filter runs and reduced filtration costs Harmsco Hurricane filter cartridges for the Waterbetter filters are available in a
10. 4 Pump is not properly primed c Pump loses prime 2 Impeller does not rotate freely within the casing 1 Air leaks in suction line or foot valve 3 Suction lift is too great 2 Well drawdown too great 4 Footvalve is either not submerged buried in mud or is 3 Faulty foot valve blocked 5 Suction line is completely choked d Motor will not start 1 No power due to blown fuses open switches or loose b Pump delivers water but not at rated capacity connections 1 Leaks in suction or discharge line 2 Foot valve suction line or impeller are partially plugged 3 Suction lift is greater than recommended 4 Improper impeller rotation MONARCH INDUSTRIES 51 Burmac Road P O Box 429 Winnipeg Manitoba Canada R3C 3E4 Ph 204 786 7921 Fax 204 889 9120 Email orders monarchindustries com English commandes monarchindustries com French www monarchindustries com LIMITED MONARCH INDUSTRIES WARRANTY For one year from date of purchase Monarch Industries will replace or repair for the original purchaser free of charge any part or parts found upon examination by any Monarch Industries Authorized Service Depot or by the Monarch factory to be defective in material or workmanship or both Equipment and accessories not manufactured by Monarch Industries are warranted only to the extent of the original manufacturer s warranty All tramspartation charges on parts submitted for replacement or repair under this w
11. If necessary set the DIP switch for the desired measured value to On move the switch to the right top switch 1 is not used TMO03 6699 4506 Fig 18 DIP switch 23 13 Operation 13 1 Control and display elements CONEX DIA 2 CONEX DIA 1 6 5 4 3 278 Fig 19 Wall mounted enclosure and control panel enclosure Pos Description Control elements Red alarm LED 1 Flashes in case of faults or incorrect entries 2 Display Operating buttons OK button 3 Enters the selected menu e Confirms the selected line or value Down button Moves one line downward the selected line is displayed inversely Decreases values Up button Moves one line upward the selected line is displayed inversely Increases values Esc button Returns to the previous menu The data which were entered last are not changed 6 Function buttons with yellow LED Cal button Switches between calibration and 7 measuring mode n calibration mode the corresponding LED illuminates Man button Switches between automatic and manual 8 modes n manual mode the corresponding LED illuminates 24 TMO03 9528 4107 13 2 Display elements during initial commissioning When connected to the power supply on the device s initial commissioning and following the start up indication the display shows the Sprache language menu Language angue eee Deutsch Engl
12. Date Time Advanced SFC Execution File Honvolatile Memory Memory General Serial Port system Protocol User Protocol Major Faults Minor Faults Eror Detection Frotocol Ge CRC Station Address 0 E Mas Station Address E Ex Token Hold Factor 1 EX 8 From the Protocol pull down menu choose DH485 9 Specify DH 485 settings 10 From the Protocol pull down menu choose DF1 Radio Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007
13. The pump returns to the state it was in before the error occurred 9 10 4 Pressure control function To protect the pump and system against excessive pressure build up Caution install an overflow valve in the discharge line The pressure sensor monitors the pressure in the dosing head If the set pressure is exceeded by 0 5 bar the pump switches off When switched on the electronics detects whether the chamber pressure control function is activated bar appears in the display Manual 1 210 TMO03 6577 4506 Fig 59 Display Pressure control 55 Pressure exceeded Pump restart attempts If after three successive strokes the cut off First the pump makes four attempts to restart pressure is exceeded this is recognised as an error each separated by a 2 second pause if the The pump is stopped chamber pressure has fallen below the cut off pressure Pact lt Pset f after three successive strokes the cut off pressure is exceeded the pump is stopped again e After four attempts the pump waits 10 minutes before attempting to automatically restart again The pump continuously attempts to restart if the chamber pressure decreases in this way The error signal relay switches on The LED alternately flashes red and green The last pressure value to be measured is displayed RUN ERROR and bar flash in the display TMO03 6578 4506 Fig 60 Display Pressure e
14. 3 L z INN l any T Se gl 9 o R 7 6 CR i J Fig 26 DIP T8 2 an V Pos Component 9 1 Brown Conex 2 White S 3 Black 10 io 4 X Blue co ES KA 5 Screen HEHEH 12 14 E 2 a E 6 Outer conductor screen Fig 23 Conex DIA 2Q for mounting in a control panel H Inner conductor 8 Reference electrode Measuring electrode 9 Counter electrode Pt100 temperature sensor not with Conex DIS C 10 Water sensor 12 6 Checks prior to start up Check the tightness of the whole system Check the electrical connections 16 TMO03 5876 1106 TMO03 5877 1106 TMO03 5878 1106 12 7 Switching on Observe the installation and operating instructions of the measuring amplifier and device controlled Warning At a pressure of more than 4 bar and if the measuring cell is not deaerated the cell may burst Ensure draining and deaeration Do not exceed the max system pressure of 4 bar Do not put a damaged measuring cell under pressure At first start up or after a long term stop Let the system run for at least two hours to avoid faulty measurements and calibration Close the bleeding spindle L and the deaeration spindle R1 Close the evacuation spindle J Co N Open the shut off spindle for sample water outlet V2 2 3 turns 4 Gradually open the shut off spindle for sample water inlet V2 2 3 turns Avoid turbulent flow 5 Check that the cleaning wing X rotates T
15. Measurement chlorine Cl2 chlorine dioxide CIO2 ozone O3 pH redox potential temperature Control chlorine Cl2 chlorine dioxide CIO2 ozone Os pH 9 Safety information 9 1 Obligations of the owner The owner of the plant is responsible for compliance with country specific safety regulations e training of operating personnel provision of prescribed protective gear implementation of regular maintenance 9 2 Avoidance of danger Warning Do not dismantle the device components Cleaning maintenance and repairs must only be carried out by authorised personnel Warning Other applications than those described in section 8 Applications are considered as non approved and are not permissible Grundfos Alldos cannot be held liable for any damage resulting from incorrect use Derivates of chlorine isocyanic acid cannot be measured or controlled Grundfos Alldos cannot be held liable for damage or consequential damage regarding this 10 Technical data 10 1 General data e AQC D1 motor driven pressure proof flow armature for recirculation of sample water Measuring parameters free chlorine chlorine dioxide ozone optional pH value redox potential temperature for compensation of pH Clo CIO5 O3 e Sample water min conductivity 50 uS cm temperature 0 to 50 C pH value only measuring parameter Clo pH 4 5 8 5 inlet pressure max 4 bar min 0 3
16. SG t b E A i an extension cord Do not cut plug from the cord If the plug is cut or the cord is shortened then this action will void the e Warranty 3 If the cord is equipped with stripped lead wires such as on 230v models be sure that the lead wires are connected to a power source correctly The green yellow wire is the ground The blue or white and brown or black are live 4 Check local electrical and building codes before installation The installation must be in accordance with their regulations as well as the most recent National Electrical Code NEC 5 To conform to the National Electrical Code all pumps must be wired with 14 AWG or larger wire For runs to 250 feet 14 AWG wire is sufficient For longer runs consult a qualified electrician or the factory 6 Pump should be connected or wired to its own circuit with no other outlets or equipment in the circuit line Fuses and circuit breaker should be of ample capacity in the electrical circuit 7 The flexible PVC jacketed cord assembly mounted to the pump must not be modified in any way with the exception of shortening the cord to fit into a control panel Any splice between the pump and the control panel must be made within a junction box and mounted outside of the basin and comply with the National Electrical Code CONSULT INSTRUCTION SHEET ILLUSTRATIONS FOR PROPER ASSEMBLY AND DISSASSEMBLY OF YOUR LITTLE GIANT PUMP OPERAT
17. TII T A WIL o TI n e LLL d a e x d LO S Fig 24 Conex DIA 2Q for wall mounting ke 20 21 22 37 38 39 40 41 42 14 5 1 A 4 2 5 6 III 7 dd 6 10 Y I l z 8 T 10 9 e L 8 m i Fig 25 Conex DIS D e S ch R 53 55 57 63 65 wm Lol e 54 56 58 1 64 66 e 2 z E e e Fig 22 Conex DIA 2 for wall mounting 4 5 6 3 LLL IDN M B RG C L Pt100 10 7 8 L
18. TMO03 6704 4506 On upward or downward violation of the selected measuring range the display will show the upper or lower limit and flash See sections 10 4 Measuring ranges and 13 5 4 Setting the measuring ranges for chlorine chlorine dioxide ozone peroxide and pH 13 2 1 Display modes Switching between display modes 1 and 2 1 Use the Up and Down buttons to switch between the two display modes Display mode 1 with two parameters 0 30 nw 4 00 The large display shows the measured values for the two parameters for example ClO2 and pH The inverted font in the header displays the two parameters left justified and right justified The measured value for the left justified parameter 1 is displayed in the first line and the measured value for the right justified parameter 2 is displayed in the second line underneath the header The measured value for a possibly active temperature measurement is not output in this display mode TMO03 6971 4506 25 Display mode 2 with two parameters TMO03 6972 4506 The large display shows the measured values for parameter 1 and the small display shows the measured values for parameter 2 and the possibly active temperature measurement c is displayed if the compensation functions are active Display with one parameter 0 30 nu 100 0 C c TMO03 6973 4506 The large display shows the measured values and the selected parameter is displayed in the
19. 1 Open the service level 2 Repeatedly press the Menu Info button to navigate in the service level until you reach menu item P calibration of pressure sensor P OFF appears in the display 3 Press the Up button to prepare the calibration P ON appears in the display When the pump is prepared for the calibration calibrate the pressure sensor 1 Press the Start Stop button P is displayed for approximately 2 seconds P CAL appears in the display The pressure sensor has been calibrated 2 Press the Start Stop button to confirm the new settings to exit the service level to open the first function level 3 Fit the pump back on 4 Screw in the suction valve Warning Risk of chemical burns Wear protective clothing gloves and goggles when working on the dosing head connections or lines Do not allow any chemicals to leak from the pump Collect and dispose of all chemicals correctly The O rings must be correctly placed in the specified groove Observe the flow direction indicated by an arrow Only tighten the valve by hand 58 TMO03 6581 4506 9 11 Batch menu batch mode In batch mode a defined batch quantity is dosed with a defined dosing flow The batch can be dosed manually or by an external contact signal Risk of dosing errors Batch dosing using contact inputs may be insufficiently or excessively triggered in the event of a
20. 4 3 6 Flow Monitor for dosing control The pressure sensor Flow Monitor pump option is used as a dosing controller and to monitor the pressure for the whole power ranges The Flow Monitor for dosing control consists of a pressure sensor integrated in the dosing head The pressure sensor is available as Flow Monitor pump option The pressure sensor is fitted to the pump on delivery Upgrades are not possible Pressure control is primarily used to protect the pump This function is not a substitute for the overflow valve 4 3 7 HV variant for liquids which are more viscous than water All HV variant pumps are equipped with spring loaded valves some have a larger nominal diameter and adapters Note that the HV variant pump has other dimensions and that other connection line dimensions might be required 16 4 4 Dimensional sketches e Fig 7 DDI 209 Dimensions for DDI 209 DDI 0 4 10 DDI 2 2 16 DDI 2 5 10 DDI 5 5 10 DDI 13 8 4 DDI 20 3 mm 239 239 239 239 240 240 b mm 23 23 23 23 29 29 C mm 175 5 175 5 175 5 175 5 185 185 mm 112 112 112 112 133 133 i i 120 c HV d HV mm mm G 3 8 175 5 112 G 3 8 207 5 176 G 3 8 207 5 176 G 3 8 207 5 176 G 5 8 185 133 G 5 8 185 133 e HV G 3 8 G 5 8 G 5 8 G 5 8 G 5 8 G 5 8
21. The calibration result is then displayed sensor gradient CALDATA chlorine slope 34 67 uA ppm Reading calibration data in the diagnostics menu Service e Select Service in the MAIN MENU with UP DOWN and press OK on both displays with DIP The data of the last 10 calibrations can be read 18 12 8 3 Calibrating the parameters chlorine chlorine dioxide or ozone with Conex DIS D 1 Press the CAL selector and select the calibration menu The CAL LED next to the CAL selector illuminates To prevent overdosing the controllers must be switched off and the actuators closed When the calibration function has been selected with the CAL button the measured value display shows the current measured value 2 Use UP DOWN to select the photometrically or analytically determined reference value for instance the value measured photometrically using DIT 3 Start the calibration with OK The sensor data are then read in by an automatic read function and the calibration carried out The gradient sensitivity of the sensor is calculated The calibration result is displayed immediately after the calibration The sensor gradient is displayed in pA ppm Calibration result The result of the current last calibration can be displayed in the code menu at any time Code 51 display of calibrated gradient in uA ppm Error message when reading in the current signal of the
22. eJnsoj oue pejunou EM Jo sjeuiuJe 9 BI 15 white 16 brown T I I I I I lei HE I I I I I I 4 PE Cell L N PE 24 VIDC 230 240 V Sensors 21 22 Pt 100 19 H O 20 H O water 17 18 Controller stop TMO03 6977 4506 1 2 N C 17 22 115 120 V 15 17 19 21 23 28 27 29 31 53 35 er fs oo eae A ne na 20 22 ba 2s las ao oz loa 36 Cells electrodes 37 L 39 B R 38 M 40 G C 41 42 pH ie o NN Outputs D EB CI CIO O HO P1 Z VIC gXeuo2 einso oue Daiunou IEMWLULZL S PUIWAL LZ 6l oJnsoj oue eued ogjuoo jo sjeuiuJe 6 Du Outputs 0 9 CL CIO ouo 0 x 1 11 brown 1 2 white 1 1 br 1 2 wh qm Cells H202 m 2 3 2 1 2 2 Controller stop 2 4 H O water S 2 3 6 2 e 5528 Relays 6 4 2 5 1 5 5 eg N C PE lt Nox 4 8 3 L lt 115 120 VS Conex DIA 2 230 240V Connectionto Sensor interface 1 11 1 14 4 1 4 4 3 1 3 4 Conex DIA 2 Pt 100 Cells Electrodes Cl CIO pH d oPo AU brown DIP O H203 B gt 1 1 white Cells electrodes off on Cells H202 A gt 2 3 L M B R G C Pt 100 B 2 4 pH TMO3 6978 4506 8 1 8
23. interface for PROFIBUS The functions are described but only apply to the relevant pump version TMO03 6589 4506 13 4 3 2 DDI 209 Plus system with priming and calibration system for moderately degassing liquids chlorine bleaching agents only for DDI 209 0 4 10 to DDI 209 5 5 10 Pos 14 L cu PRU EJ paga EE ue F TMO3 6590 4506 Fig 3 DDI 209 Plus system 3a 3b 2c V D z z ir X jci ir o mimi o Components Suction valve Discharge valve Dosing head Plus system Connection for deaeration line Deaeration screw Suction line from tank Line from calibration tube E to dosing head 2c Isolating valve at calibration tube E Calibration tube Priming chamber Connection for overflow line H Overflow line to tank PVC tube 8 11 Deaeration line to tank Discharge line Cover Adhesive label Deaeration hole 4 3 3 Functional principle of the Plus system Plus system in operation The priming chamber F is filled with the dosing medium via the suction valve 3a The calibration tube E is filled from the priming chamber Unused dosing medium flo
24. the valve tube to the suction hose Relieve the syringe Remove the syringe and hose and empty Close the cover For HV variant pumps see section 7 1 3 Assisting suction for HV variant Pump without HV variant can now be started see section 7 1 5 Starting the pump N WW S f a A wal N ZE Ze FA aW Aw WW P pz Z d Ei W 7 1 3 Assisting suction for HV variant HV variant pumps have an assisting suction e Fit the syringe and the piece of hose 1 cs rcm c Ge CM mM of f SES li f l HUE Lll ill Uu ili EA Fig 27 Assisting suction for HV variant Warning Ensure that the pump is stopped TMO3 6243 4506 TMO03 6244 4506 29 Sucking in dosing medium using the assisting suction go 30 Fig 28 Sucking in the dosing medium Attach the hose to the connection for the deaeration line Open the deaeration screw 1 or 2 turns Draw up the syringe in order to create a perceptible low pressure and hold the syringe in this position Dosing medium rises in the suction line up to the suction hose Relieve the syringe Carefully remove the syringe with the suction hose Empty the syringe into the dosing tank Tighten the deaeration screw Attach the deaeration line to the connection for the deaeration line Observe the instructions in section 5 6 4 Connecting the overflow and deaeration
25. C Attach the shield to both connectors 2 Connect the cable to your controller and workstation 8g CP3 Cable Publication 1769 UMO11F EN P January 2007 Configure the Serial Driver Connect to the Controller Via the Serial Port 17 Use RSLinx software to configure the RS 232 DF1 Device driver for serial communications To configure the driver perform this procedure 1 From the Communications pull down menu choose Configure Drivers z RSLinx Professional File Edit view Red Station DDE OPC Security RSWho Configure Drivers Configure Shortcuts Configure Client Applications Configure CIP Options Driver Diagnostics CIP Diagnostics Gateway Diagnostics The Configure Drivers dialog appears Configure Drivers Available Driver Types R5 232 DF1 devices Add Mew H5 232 DEI devi Ethernet devices Ethernet l P Driver 1P84 KT AETRTB PETAE D I PCME For DH 0H 485 devices 1784 K TC x for CantrolNet devices DF1 Folling Master Driver 1784 PLLE for Control et devices 1784 PCIC 5 for CantrolM et devices 1747 PIC AIC Driver DF1 Slave Driver 5 5 50 502 for DHA devices Virtual Backplane 5aftLagis 8x DeviceNet Drivers 1 764 PCD PCIDS 17 70 KFD SBMPT drivers PLC 5 DH Emulator driver SLC 500 DH485 Emulator driver SoftLoge5 driver Remote Devices via Link Gatewa 2 From the Available Driver Types pull down menu choose the RS 232 DF
26. Deviation from the rated value 15 95 e Quality of the DC voltage smoothed ripple below 3 6 V e Maximum input power 20 W including all sensors reduced input power according to pump type and connected sensors The power supply must be electrically isolated from the signal inputs and outputs 1 3 9 Ambient and operating conditions e Permissible ambient temperature 0 C to 40 C e Permissible storage temperature 10 C to 50 C e Permissible air humidity max relative humidity 92 non condensing Warning The DDI 209 is NOT approved for operation in potentially explosive areas The installation site must be under cover Ensure that the enclosure class of motor and pump is not affected by the atmospheric conditions Pumps with electronics are only suitable for indoor use Do not install outdoors 1 3 10 Dosing medium For degassing dosing media note the following p The DDI 209 without Plus system can be used in In the event of questions regarding the flooded suction for moderately degassing media materiai resistance and suitability of such as chlorine bleaching agents See section the pump for specific dosing media 5 Instaltstinn l ntact Grundfos Alldos ERRES j The DDI 209 with Plus system can be used for The dosing medium must have the following basic moderately degassing media such as chlorine characteristics bleaching agents Using the DDI 5 5 10 with liquid Plu
27. Press the Menu Info button for 5 seconds Activate function display Press the Down button Press the Up button Press the Down button Press the Up button Activate function display Press the Menu Info button Press the Down button Deactivate function display Release the Start Stop button Deactivate function display Release the Down button Release the Up button Release the Down button Release the Up button Deactivate function display Display automatically jumps back after 5 seconds 63 10 Maintenance 10 1 General notes Warning When dosing dangerous media observe the corresponding safety precautions Risk of chemical burns Wear protective clothing gloves and goggles when working on the dosing head connections or lines Do not allow any chemicals to leak from the pump Collect and dispose of all chemicals correctly Warning The pump housing must only be opened by personnel authorised by Grundfos Alldos Repairs must only be carried out by authorised and qualified personnel Switch off the pump and disconnect it from the power supply before carrying out maintenance work and repairs 10 2 Maintenance intervals In the event of a diaphragm leakage the dosing liquid may leak out of the hole in the intermediate flange between the pump and the dosing head The parts inside the housing are protected from the dosing liqui
28. applications an isolation valve should be installed to permit closing of the line for pump repairs Piping should be level or sloping downward from source of supply and no portion of the piping should extend below the pump suction flange Discharge piping should be installed with an isolation valve and check valve Locate the check valve between the pump and the isolation valve If reducers are used they should be installed between the pump and check valve Cushioning devices should be used to protect pump from surges and water hammer if quick closing valves are installed in the system COUPLING ALIGNMENT On frame mounted pumps coupling must be aligned as suggested by the coupling manufacturer As a minimum apply the following for elastomeric type couplings Check parallel alignment by placing a straight edge across the coupling flange diameters and measuring the offset at various points around the coupling Refer to recommended tolerances and shim motor as required Check angular alignment by measuring the back side of each coupling hub at 90 Deg Intervals The difference between the minimum and maximum readings must be less than the misalignment allowed by the coupling manufacturer Paralle 015 Angular 050 Fig 2 Operation PRE STARTUP CHECK Confirm that the pump can be turned by hand before checking rotation Verify that the rotation of the motor corresponds to the rotation arrow located on the pump On fr
29. 108 making sure seat is square and all the way to the bottom of the adapter bore Mechanical seal rotary should be installed on sleeve 126 by lightly lubricating the sleeve and pushing seal hcad over shaft slecve Sec general seal installation instructions provided by seal manufacturer Depending on the pump size and design the shaft sleeve 126 is lightly pressed on the shaft or is a slip fit as detailed in Fig 3 below For the slip fit sleeve the mechanical seal must be installed on the Sleeve first and then the whole assembly installed on the frame shaft The pressed on sleeve requires the seal to be installed after the sleeve has been installed on the shaft Replace O rings and gaskets item 351 412A and 412B and on oil lubricated pumps item 360A and 360B also Spring Shaft Sleeve 126 Shaft Sleeve O Ring 412A Fig 3 Spare Parts RECOMMENDED SPARES Item Description 112 Thrust Bearing 123 Slinger 126 Shaft sleeve 168 Radial Bearing 351 Casing Gasket 382 Bearing Lock Washer 383 Mechanical Seal f 412A O Ring 412B O Ring ORDERING SPARES Spare parts can be ordered from the enclosed parts list The pump ser al number and model number should be given from the pump name plate In the case of auxiliary equipment that may have been supplied with the pump quote the full name plate data and describe the part fully Troubleshooting INSUFFICIENT CAPACITY System head is greate
30. 13 23 5 8 Pressure Gauges Install optional pressure gauges in gauge ports as shown above Use pressure differential to indicate when to clean or replace cartridge Cartridge Cleaning in ec For best results clean cartridges with pressure nozzle using standard hose Direct spray at an angle to remove particulate see photo Follow these directions to remove oils organic matter algae and mineral deposits OILS Soak cartridge in a solution of tri sodium phosphate or similar strong detergent 2 Ibs to 10 gallons of water Soak up to 12 hours for best Caution Do not rinse cartridges with acid until oils and organic matter are removed Use detergent first and follow with acid bath for mineral removal Flush cartridges with water results Rinse after bath after muriatic or tri sodium phosphate baths ORGANIC MATTER ALGAE Use tri sodium phosphate solution as described above plus 1 pint of liquid chlorine to kill organic matter and algae Soak cartridge one hour or longer until surface is no longer slippery Rinse after bath CALCIUM MINERAL DEPOSITS Follow directions for oils described above Soak cartridge for approximately ten minutes in a solution of one part of muriatic acid to twenty parts of water Rinse cartridge thoroughly with water When Cartridge Cleaning is Not Possible Generally it is not possible to clean Hurricane filter cartridges when filtering petroleum base liquids
31. 150 240 a z 5 LM S el 20 40 PCF 2 5L 15H 50 mii 80 m 25 40 Se 4 6 8 10 12 Ta 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 usgpm j 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 usgpm EI EGLI E a d l ann ie ERES p J x 100 pL ue o or 1 x 10 25 50 75 Inn 125 150 175 200 M s 20 40 60 80 mm d CAPACITY CAPACITY TECHNOLOGIES INC P SP Bulletin PC LOOA INSTALLATION OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Series PC Frame Mounted Centrifugal Pumps Model PCT amp PCF Receipt of Shipment INSPECTION On receipt of the pump set in its shipping container carefully check for damage Check the contents against the shipping manifest and report any shortages or damage immediately to the carrier This will prevent any conflict with the carrier in the event a claim is required UNLOADING Handle the unit with care when removing it from its shipping crate Lift the equipment with suitable slings through the pump frame and motor lifting eye bolt Do not sling around motor or pump shaft On base mounted units it is recommended to lift assembly by slinging through eyebolts mounted to the baseplate foundation holes Do not sling around the pump or motor shafts or on the coupling assembly STORAGE Adequate methods of Storage are essential to ensure that the pump does not suffer damage from moisture dust or damage from careless handling Any deterioration or damage from inadequate storage will not be covered under warranty If th
32. 1a and 2a see fig 50 select the following reference points L MAmin 0 4 mA Qseiect mA min 0 I h H MAmax 20 mA Qselect mA max Haat Qca is not updated automatically when the pump is re calibrated This protects the user defined value pairs After calibration new weighting may be required 9 9 3 Setting the weighting The setting options for weighting depend on the selected current signal control The parameters for 0 20 mA and for 4 20 mA are independent of one another The weighting parameters are modified and saved according to the set operating mode Select the current control operating mode used later 0 20 mA 4 20 mA manually or via contact signal before weighting Weighting of the control output for manual control mode or contact signal control is the same as current weighting 4 20 mA Flashing Select value for current input MAmin 0 20 mA 0 20 mA Analog Select value for current input MAmax gt MAmin Flashing Fig 53 Setting the weighting In the second function level first enter the values for reference pair L The current value for mAmin appears in the display the default value is L 0 0 mA L 4 0 mA Analog and 0 20 mA 4 20 mA are flashing 1 Use the Up and Down buttons to enter the minimum current input MAmin between 0 mA 4 mA and 20 mA e g MAmin 6 mA 2 Press the Start Stop button The current value for the
33. 66600 Phone 52 81 8144 4000 Telefax 52 81 8144 4010 Netherlands Grundfos Alldos Dosing amp Disinfection ALLDOS BV Leerlooiersstraat 6 NL 8601 WK Sneek Tel 31 51 54 25 789 Telefax 31 51 54 30 550 E mail alldos ni alldos com Netherlands GRUNDFOS Netherlands Veluwezoom 35 1326 AE Almere Postbus 22015 1302 CA ALMERE Tel 31 88 478 6336 Telefax 31 88 478 6332 e mail info_gnl grundfos com New Zealand GRUNDFOS Pumps NZ Ltd 17 Beatrice Tinsley Crescent North Harbour Industrial Estate Albany Auckland Phone 64 9 415 3240 Telefax 64 9 415 3250 Norway GRUNDFOS Pumper A S Stromsveien 344 Postboks 235 Leirdal N 1011 Oslo TIf 47 22 90 47 00 Telefax 47 22 32 21 50 Poland GRUNDFOS Pompy Sp z o o ul Klonowa 23 Baranowo k Poznania PL 62 081 Przezmierowo Tel 448 61 650 13 00 Fax 48 61 650 13 50 Portugal Bombas GRUNDFOS Portugal S A Rua Calvet de Magalh es 241 Apartado 1079 P 2770 153 Pa o de Arcos Tel 351 21 440 76 00 Telefax 351 21 440 76 90 Rom nia GRUNDFOS Pompe Rom nia SRL Bd Biruintei nr 103 Pantelimon county Ilfov Phone 40 21 200 4100 Telefax 40 21 200 4101 E mail romania grundfos ro Russia OOO Tpvnpdhoc Poccna 109544 Mocksa yn WkonbHaa 39 Ten 7 495 737 30 00 564 88 00 akc 7 495 737 75 36 564 88 11 E mail grundfos moscow grundfos com Serbia GRUNDFOS Predstavnistvo Beograd Dr Milutina Ivkovi a 2a 29 YU
34. Adjustable to NC or NO The measuring ranges are also freely adjustable within the above mentioned range limits In the case of chlorine and chlorine dioxide the free adjustment of the measuring range can be extended up to a maximum of 50 0 mg I 13 10 5 Dimensions 180 145 212 Fig 2 Wall mounted enclosure Conex DIA 2 166 Fig 3 Control panel enclosure Conex DIA 2 14 L L 198 H i iJ TMO03 6687 4506 TMO03 6688 4506 11 Installation 11 1 Transport and storage Transport the device carefully do not drop Store at dry and cool location 11 2 Unpacking 1 Check the device for damage Install as soon as possible after unpacking 2 Do not install or connect damaged devices Retainthe packing material or dispose of it according to local regulations 11 3 Installation requirements e Dry room e Room temperature 0 C to 50 C e Vibration free location If you do not observe the installation requirements the device may be damaged The measurements may not be correct 11 4 Installation in control panel 1 2 gt 20 Co Q Ke O lt o e e ke Fig 4 Control panel enclosure Conex DIA 2 132 i 03 2 A Ee rae oilo OJIN o e Lo e e e S 121 e Fig 5 Sensor interface Make an opening of 92 0 8 mm x 92 0 8 mm in the control panel Slip on the supplied gasket 3 Inse
35. Ce document S applique galement d autres mod les de cette s rie qui ne sont pas indiqu s par leur num ro de catalogue dans la section des pi ces de remplacement du pr sent document Si tel tait le cas avec votre pompe il faudra tre particuli rement attentif au moment de commander des pi ces Toujours donner le num ro de catalogue de votre pompe lors de la commande de pi ces Votre nouvelle pompe Little Giant a t fabriqu e avec les meilleurs mat riaux et avec le plus grand soin Elle a t concue pour foncionner bien et longtemps VET Na hm er eA a PATH e DM E SSRI NT SE EPA NOEL ERAN TA TIERONE HIE eH SVO e SLAIN EELER PASTA OORT NES D E SE SSES D TRAE THESIS EL NOE SFG BT EER AE NNN FN TE EN BSED EA ERNIE RU BENT NEE NE EES Err CASAS as S NE SN NE SN SS THEE FEEN NOS REA a SS eS NS SESS SAA EATERS SS SRA DEE zs SS ES T REARS Ee COnrIX Water Systems SECTION 9 3 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION amp CONTROLS Section 9 3 Process Instrumentation amp Controls 9 3 18 Grundfos Raw Water Pump Model 230875 2 Tag P 001 amp P 002 6 8 amp 10 STAINLESS STEEL SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS Installation and Operating Instructions t Qi A CH Di M GAR a D er Jal TABLE OF CONTENTS Page s Page s Shipment Inspection T SBIBGICIGAT cao ouest ap ME Ee U Eee 9 7 Pre Installation Checklist T SSIarb HD uio h
36. CompactFlash ControlLogix PowerFlex Rockwell Automation PLC 2 PLC 3 PLC 5 RSLinx RSLogix RSLogix 5000 and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies Introduction Updated Information a Summary of Changes This release of this document contains new and updated information To find new and updated information look for change bars as shown next to this paragraph The document contains these changes Topic Validate UU Layout Configure 1 0 Add On Instructions CompactLogix Controllers Specifications Dynamic Memory Allocation in CompactLogix Controllers Page 50 55 72 95 111 Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 summary of Changes 4 Notes Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 1769 CompactLogix Controllers Overview Connect to the Controller Via the Serial Port Communicate Over Networks Manage Controller Communications Table of Contents Preface Introduction 9 Additional Information 9 Chapter 1 lEBiRROIOINION LOIR ROI a TITIO a TOUT LILTRM 11 About the CompactLogix Controllers sss 11 Design a CompactLogix System l l 13 Additional Resources llle 13 Install Hardware un ug eel oe eer e hse ee CA ew eda 14 Additional Resources 0 0 000 cee eee eae 14 Chapter 2 rtt OC pre He EE 15 Connect to the Controller Via the Se
37. Current 0 20 mA Maximum load 350 Q Maximum ohmic load 50 VDC 75 VAC 0 5 A Contact time stroke 200 ms Error signal Stroke signal Maximum ohmic load Pre emply signal co VDC 75 VAC 0 5 A 4 7 1 Interface optional e PROFIBUS 19 5 Installation 5 1 General information on installation Warning Observe the specifications for the AN installation location and range of applications described in sections 1 General information and 5 2 Installation location Warning Faults incorrect operation or faults on the pump or system can for example lead to excessive or insufficient dosing or the permissible pressure may be exceeded Consequential faults or damage must be evaluated by the operator and appropriate precautions must be taken to avoid them The DDI 0 4 10 not with Plus system should be operated with flooded suction 5 2 Installation location 5 2 1 Space required for operation and maintenance The pump must be installed in a position where it is easily accessible during operation and maintenance work The control elements must be easily accessible during operation Maintenance work on the dosing head and the valves must be carried out regularly Provide sufficient space for removing the dosing head and the valves 5 2 2 Permissible ambient influences Permissible ambient temperature 0 C to 40 C Permissible air humidity max relative humidity 92 non conden
38. No Max frequency M ring ran easuring ranges pulse freq ctrl Hysteresis mg l ppm alian Current output 1 Alarm delay Setpoint m limit contact Constant load Dos time monit On Off _ Dos time monit Mak dosing low Max dosing time Limit limit contact Hysteresis limit contact 6 General information These installation and operating instructions contain all information important for users of the Conex DIA 2 e technical data instructions on commissioning use and maintenance safety information Should you require further information or should you encounter problems that are not handled in sufficient depth in this manual please contact Grundfos Alldos We shall be pleased to support you with our comprehensive know how in the fields of measuring and control technology as well as water treatment We always welcome suggestions on how to optimise our installation and operating instructions to satisfy our customers 6 1 Warranty A warranty claim in accordance with our general terms of sale and delivery is only valid if these requirements are complied with e The device has been used in accordance with the information in this manual The device has not been dismantled or handled incorrectly T Applications The Conex DIA 2 instrument amplifier and controller is suitable for measuring chlorine Clo chlorine dioxide CIO2 ozone O3 hydrogen peroxide
39. TMO03 6592 4506 17 a2 LU LT C2 D 04 113 ka 145 Fig 8 DDI 209 with Plus system 156 We Dimensions for DDI 209 with Plus system only DDI 0 4 10 DDI 5 5 10 DDI 0 4 10 DDI 2 2 16 DDI 2 5 10 DDI 5 5 10 a2 mm 276 276 276 276 145 a1 b2 mm 25 25 25 25 Fig 9 DDI 209 with diaphragm leakage detection Dimensions for DDI 209 with diaphragm leakage detection DDI 0 4 10 DDI 2 2 16 DDI 2 5 10 DDI 5 5 10 DDI 13 8 4 DDI 20 3 18 a mm 250 250 250 250 251 251 b1 mm 34 34 34 34 40 40 c1 mm 175 5 175 5 175 5 175 5 185 185 d1 mm 112 112 112 112 133 133 c2 d2 mm mm 61 240 61 240 61 240 61 240 156 c1 HV mm G 3 8 175 5 G 3 8 207 5 G 3 8 207 5 G 3 8 207 5 G 5 8 185 G 5 8 185 d1 HV mm 112 176 176 176 133 133 e2 G 3 8 G 3 8
40. Up and Down buttons 0 dosing flow 6 For relay output 2 and the output continuous controller proceed similarly to relay output 1 7 Press OK to start the controller at the selected dosing flow The display shows the controller control display in its dependence on the selected dosing flows See section 13 6 3 Controller control fields on the display 47 13 10 2 Manual operation with configured limit contact and continuous controller controller manual stop operation continuous dosing flow controller 0 100 Fig 33 Manual operation with configured limit contact and continuous controller Manual operation with configured limit contacts is largely similar to manual operation with two position and continuous controllers The difference When the desired relay output is selected the relay can be switched on or off Press OK to start the controller The display shows the controller control display which depends on the switching state of the relay or the selected dosing flow with continuous control See section 13 6 3 Controller control fields on the display 48 TMO03 6721 4506 14 Fault finding Faults during the measurement see installation and operating instructions for the electrode or measuring cell Fault 1 No display following start up 2 With pH measurement Display permanently indicates pH approximately 7 With measurement of oxidisers Display per
41. Weighting while the pump is running can be carried out in the first function level The currently set value increases or decreases for the maximum flow rate Qmax Dest or with weighting set value Qselect mA max Setting the weighting The parameters for 0 20 mA and for 4 20 mA are independent of one another The weighting parameters are modified and saved according to the set operating mode Select the current control used 0 20 mA 4 20 mA before weighting Weighting can be set independently of the current input value that is currently set The dosing flow value l h that corresponds to the set current input value mA always appears in the display 1 When the pump is running or stopped press and hold down the Up button for approximately 5 seconds 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA Analog and I h flash in the display 2 Use the Up and Down buttons to increase or decrease the currently set value for the maximum flow rate Q l h lin lout 0 20 mA 10 I h 8 I h 6 I h Gi lin 4 20 mA lout 4 20 mA manual contact The curve for current input current output now passes as follows With 0 20 mA 4 20 mA current signal control the curve for current input and current output passes linearly through Q 0 at 0 mA 4 mA and the currently set value for the maximum flow rate Qselect max at 20 mA curves 1b and 2b The set weighting is saved in the pump The values are retained e
42. parameterisation of the selected controller type in main menu controller submenu controller parameter 1 setpoint contrl off limit contact interpulse ctrl pulse freq ctrl setpoint contrl cont controller controller parameter 2 parameter 2 as controller parameter 1 Fig 24 Selection and configuration of the controller In the setup menu select the line controller parameter 1 or controller parameter 2 using the Up and Down buttons and select the menu with the same name using OK Selection and configuration of the setpoint controller 1 Mark the setpoint contrl line using the Up and 34 Down buttons and select using OK Limit contact downward viol upward violation ctrl direction downward control upward control ctrl charact P PI PID Select the controller using the Up and Down buttons as one of the following off limit contact interpulse controller two position controller pulse frequency controller two position controller continuous controller and confirm using OK If limit contact is selected 3 Use the Up and Down buttons to select the switching direction as one of the following downward violation upward violation and confirm using OK If interpulse ctrl pulse freq ctrl or cont controller is selected TMO03 6734 4506 4 Use the Up and Down buttons to selec
43. s MA min H Qselect mA max mAmax Qcal Q l h 0 mA 4 mA 8 mA 12 mA 16 mA 20 mA lin out MA Fig 55 Diagram for current input current output TMO03 6614 4506 53 9 10 Flow Monitor 9 10 1 Application notes Dosing of degassing media H2O chlorine bleaching agents Fora robust operation set the number of permissible error strokes to a value higher than 10 Dosing of antiscalent viscosity higher than 20 mPa s in particular for DDI 0 4 10 with Plus Use spring loaded valves for high viscosity media Dosing of viscous media For media with a viscosity higher than 20 mPa s spring loaded suction and discharge valves are recommended Dosing media with a viscosity higher than 100 mPa s on request For batch or timer operation Setthe number of permissible error strokes to a value lower than the number of working strokes f while the pump is stopped the pressure in the discharge line falls below the minimum pressure of 2 bar e g in the event of a leak in the pressure loading valve increase the number of permissible error strokes so as to prevent unnecessary error messages Ensuring the counter pressure by a pressure loading valve e Check the counter pressure 2 to 3 weeks after start up If it is below 2 bar the pressure loading valve has to be re adjusted If the volume flo
44. to 140 F Up to 600 GPM Up to 750 GPM Recommended Model Sizing amp Use the chart shown below to size Hurricane Filters for your application Pleated Filter Area HUR 40 HP HUR 90 HP HUR 170 HP HUR 170 HP two filters HUR 170 HP three filters HUR 170 HP four filters HUR 170 HP five filters 40 sq ft 90 sq ft 170 sq ft 340 sq ft two filters 510 sq ft three filters 680 sq ft four filters 850 sq ft five filters Parallel installation with valves to isolate filters for service while other filters are operational 0 10 20 30 40 50 Flow Rate GPM Pressure drop HUR 40 HP Harmsco Hurricane Filter Model Replacement a HUR 40 HP Cartridges Hurricane replacement cartridges are available in a wide range of nominal ratings shown right Cartridges are rated for temperatures to 140 F and may be used to separate solids in liquids with a pH of 3 to 11 HUR 90 HP Packaged one cartridge per carton D d II I HUR 170 HP n i AMI D WNW bi 3 0 Total Head Loss P S I Pressure Drop The total head loss data shown below was developed by NSF International and indicates pressure drop with Hurricane Filter and one micron filter cartridge in clean water O 20 40 60 Flow Rate GPM Pressure drop HUR 90 HP Cartridge Product Code HC 40 0 35 HC 40 1 HC 40 5 HC 40 10 HC 40 20 HC 40 50 HC 40 100 HC 40
45. 100 metres distance from sensor interface to sensors up to three metres Approximately 15 VA 0 C to 50 C 20 C to 65 C 90 non condensing 1 5 kg Plastic control panel enclosure noryl wall mounted enclosure ABS e 230 240 V 50 60 Hz standard model e 115 120 V 50 60 Hz e 24V DC 10 3 Electronic data and functions 10 3 1 Electronics Electronics Display Potential free relay outputs Signal inputs Signal outputs Freely adjustable analog outputs for measured values 16 bit microprocessor High resolution graphics LCD with background light 1 alarm relay 2 controller relays 250 V 6 A maximum 550 VA Controller stop water sensor 4 analog outputs 0 4 to 20 mA freely adjustable maximum load 500 Q Parameter group 1 chlorine chlorine dioxide ozone or peroxide Parameter group 2 pH For temperature or continuous control 0 4 to 20 mA of the parameters from group 2 pH For continuous control 0 4 to 20 mA of the parameters from group 1 chlorine chlorine dioxide ozone or peroxide 10 3 2 Functions of the instrument amplifier Display mode Temperature compensation Calibration Measured value display measured value with its unit temperature display in C or F Manual or automatic with Pt100 5 C to 120 C Manual or with automatic recognition of buffer solution 10 3 3 Setpoint controller functions Controller out
46. 135 916 Seoul Korea Phone 82 2 5317 600 Telefax 82 2 5633 725 Latvia SIA GRUNDFOS Pumps Latvia Deglava biznesa centrs Augusta Deglava iela 60 LV 1035 Riga Talr 371 714 9640 7 149 641 Fakss 371 914 9646 Lithuania GRUNDFOS Pumps UAB Smolensko g 6 LT 03201 Vilnius Tel 370 52 395 430 Fax 370 52 395 431 Malaysia GRUNDFOS Pumps Sdn Bhd 7 Jalan Peguam U1 25 Glenmarie Industrial Park 40150 Shah Alam Selangor Phone 60 3 5569 2922 Telefax 60 3 5569 2866 M xico Bombas GRUNDFOS de M xico S A de C V Boulevard TLC No 15 Parque Industrial Stiva Aeropuerto Apodaca N L 66600 Phone 52 81 8144 4000 Telefax 52 81 8144 4010 Netherlands Grundfos Alldos Dosing amp Disinfection ALLDOS BV Leerlooiersstraat 6 NL 8601 WK Sneek Tel 31 51 54 25 789 Telefax 31 51 54 30 550 E mail alldos ni alldos com Netherlands GRUNDFOS Netherlands Veluwezoom 35 1326 AE Almere Postbus 22015 1302 CA ALMERE Tel 31 88 478 6336 Telefax 31 88 478 6332 e mail info_gnl grundfos com New Zealand GRUNDFOS Pumps NZ Ltd 17 Beatrice Tinsley Crescent North Harbour Industrial Estate Albany Auckland Phone 64 9 415 3240 Telefax 64 9 415 3250 Norway GRUNDFOS Pumper A S Stromsveien 344 Postboks 235 Leirdal N 1011 Oslo TIf 47 22 90 47 00 Telefax 47 22 32 21 50 Poland GRUNDFOS Pompy Sp z o o ul Klonowa 23 Baranowo k Poznania PL 62 081 Przezmierowo Tel 4
47. 60 mV The message error asym pot is indicated The calibration process will be aborted in all four cases Press OK to return to the calibration menu automatically If the process is aborted the old calibration date will not be overwritten Manual temperature compensation With deactivated temperature measurement the water temperature for compensation should be entered manually after calibration The default value is 25 C 1 Determine the water temperature with a thermometer 2 Press Cal to switch to the calibration function Select the line pH and press OK to switch to the pH calibration menu 3 Select manual temp and press OK to switch to the corresponding menu manual temp 25 C 4 Enter the water temperature The water temperature is shown in C Celsius or in F Fahrenheit as selected in the setup menu measuring ranges 5 Press OK to return to the calibration menu automatically 44 Cal cycle Following selection of cal cycle in the measured value menu a countdown function is started which triggers the alarm signal calibrate sensor following expiry of a defined time interval of 1 100 days Cal result The result of the current last calibration can be displayed at any time using the cal result menu item 13 9 3 Calibration of the parameters chlorine chlorine dioxide peroxide and ozone Gal chlorine chlorine dioxide per
48. 9 II 09 ono se om ve m e jme m je o vm mns FRANKLIN MOTORS refer to the Franklin Submersible Motors Application Maintenance Manual Page 19 Technical Data Table F Example Correcting for Three Phase Power Unbalance Example Check for current unbalance for a 230 volt 3 phase 60 Hz submersible pump motor 18 6 full load amps Solution Steps 1 to 3 measure and record amps on each motor drop lead for Hookups 1 2 and 3 Step 1 Hookup 1 Step 2 Hookup 2 Step 3 Hookup DI 25 5 amps DL 25 amps DL 25 0 amps DL 23 0 amps DL 24 amps DL 24 5 amps DL 26 5 amps DL 26 amps DL 25 5 amps 3 Total 75 amps Total 75 amps Total 75 amps Average Current total current 75 25 amps 3 readings Greatest amp difference from the average Unbalance As can be seen Hookup 3 should be used since it shows the least amount of current unbalance Therefore the motor will operate at maximum efficiency and reliability By comparing the current values recorded on each leg you will note the highest value was always on the same leg L This indicates the unbalance is in the power source If the high current values were ona different leg each time the leads were changed the unbalance would be caused by the motor or a poor connection If the current is greater than 5 contact your power company for help 3 Hookup 1 25 23 2 Hookup 2 26 25 1 Hookup 3
49. Ballymount Road Lower Dublin 12 Phone 353 1 4089 800 Telefax 353 1 4089 830 Italy GRUNDFOS Pompe Italia S r l Via Gran Sasso 4 L 20060 Truccazzano Milano Tel 39 02 95838112 Telefax 39 02 95309290 95838461 Japan GRUNDFOS Pumps K K Gotanda Metalion Bldg 5F 5 21 15 Higashi gotanda Shiagawa ku Tokyo 141 0022 Japan Phone 81 35 448 1391 Telefax 81 35 448 9619 Korea GRUNDFOS Pumps Korea Ltd 6th Floor Aju Building 679 5 Yeoksam dong Kangnam ku 135 916 Seoul Korea Phone 82 2 5317 600 Telefax 82 2 5633 725 Latvia SIA GRUNDFOS Pumps Latvia Deglava biznesa centrs Augusta Deglava iela 60 LV 1035 Riga Talr 371 714 9640 7 149 641 Fakss 371 914 9646 Lithuania GRUNDFOS Pumps UAB Smolensko g 6 LT 03201 Vilnius Tel 370 52 395 430 Fax 370 52 395 431 Malaysia GRUNDFOS Pumps Sdn Bhd 7 Jalan Peguam U1 25 Glenmarie Industrial Park 40150 Shah Alam Selangor Phone 60 3 5569 2922 Telefax 60 3 5569 2866 M xico Bombas GRUNDFOS de M xico S A de C V Boulevard TLC No 15 Parque Industrial Stiva Aeropuerto Apodaca N L 66600 Phone 52 81 8144 4000 Telefax 52 81 8144 4010 Netherlands Grundfos Alldos Dosing amp Disinfection ALLDOS BV Leerlooiersstraat 6 NL 8601 WK Sneek Tel 31 51 54 25 789 Telefax 431 51 54 30 550 E mail alldos nl galldos com Netherlands GRUNDFOS Netherlands Veluwezoom 35 1326 AE Almere Postbus 22015 1302
50. Brighton Road Oakville Ontario L6H 6C9 Phone 1 905 829 9533 Telefax 1 905 829 9512 China Grundfos Alldos Dosing amp Disinfection ALLDOS Shanghai Water Technology Co Ltd West Unit 1 Floor No 2 Building T 4 2 278 Jinhu Road Jin Qiao Export Process ing Zone Pudong New Area Shanghai 201206 Phone 86 21 5055 1012 Telefax 86 21 5032 0596 E mail alldos cn alldos com China GRUNDFOS Pumps Shanghai Co Ltd 22 Floor Xin Hua Lian Building 755 775 Huai Hai Rd M Shanghai 200020 PRC Phone 86 512 67 61 11 80 Telefax 86 512 67 61 81 67 Croatia GRUNDFOS predstavnistvo Zagreb Cebini 37 Buzin HR 10000 Zagreb Phone 385 1 6595 400 Telefax 385 1 6595 499 Czech Republic GRUNDFOS s r o Capkovsk ho 21 779 00 Olomouc Phone 420 585 716 111 Telefax 420 585 716 299 Denmark GRUNDFOS DK A S Martin Bachs Vej 3 DK 8850 Bjerringbro TIf 45 87 50 50 50 Telefax 45 87 50 51 51 E mail info GDK grundfos com www grundfos com DK Estonia GRUNDFOS Pumps Eesti OU Peterburi tee 92G 11415 Tallinn Tel 372 606 1690 Fax 372 606 1691 Finland OY GRUNDFOS Pumput AB Mestarintie 11 FIN 01730 Vantaa Phone 4358 3066 5650 Telefax 358 3066 56550 France Grundfos Alldos Dosing amp Disinfection ALLDOS S A R L 7 rue Gutenberg F 67610 La Wantzenau T l 33 3 88 59 26 26 T l copie 33 3 88 59 26 00 E mail alldos fr alldos com France Pompes GR
51. Filter strainer P2 Pressure loading valve V 17 Disposal This product or parts of it must be disposed of in an environmentally sound way 1 Use appropriate waste collection services 2 If this is not possible contact the nearest Grundfos or Grundfos Alldos company or service workshop 24 Subject to alterations Argentina Bombas GRUNDFOS de Argentina S A Ruta Panamericana km 37 500 Lote 34A 1619 Garin Pcia de Buenos Aires Phone 54 3327 414 444 Telefax 54 3327 411 111 Australia Grundfos Alldos Dosing amp Disinfection ALLDOS Oceania Pty Ltd Unit 3 74 Murdoch Circuit Acacia Ridge QLD 4100 Phone 61 0 7 3712 6888 Telefax 61 0 7 3272 5188 E mail alldos au alldos com Australia GRUNDFOS Pumps Pty Ltd P O Box 2040 Regency Park South Australia 5942 Phone 61 8 8461 4611 Telefax 61 8 8340 0155 Austria GRUNDFOS Pumpen Vertrieb Ges m b H Grundfosstrake 2 A 5082 Gr dig Salzburg Tel 43 6246 883 0 Telefax 43 6246 883 30 Belgium N V GRUNDFOS Bellux S A Boomsesteenweg 81 83 B 2630 Aartselaar T l 32 3 870 7300 T l copie 32 3 870 7301 Belorussia l IpencraBurenecrBo l PVHITDOC B Muncke 220090 Munck yn Onewesa 14 Tenriecpon 8632 62 40 49 akc 8632 62 40 49 Bosnia Herzegovina GRUNDFOS Sarajevo Paromlinska br 16 BiH 71000 Sarajevo Phone 387 33 713290 Telefax 387 33 231795 Brazil Mark GRUNDFOS Ltda Av Humberto de Alencar Castelo
52. G 3 8 G 3 8 e1 HV G 3 8 G 5 8 G 5 8 G 5 8 G 5 8 G 5 8 TMO3 6593 4506 TMO3 6594 4506 4 5 Weight Pump type Dosing head material Weight kg DDI 0 4 10 DDI 2 5 10 PVC PP PVDF 2 3 DDI 0 4 10 DDI 2 5 10 Stainless steel DIN 1 4571 3 5 DDI 5 5 10 PVC PP PVDF 2 4 DDI 5 5 10 Stainless steel DIN 1 4571 3 6 DDI 13 8 4 DDI 20 3 PVC PP PVDF 2 6 DDI 13 8 4 DDI 20 3 Stainless steel DIN 1 4571 3 6 4 6 Materials Pump housing material Pump and control unit housing s PS FR GF 22 glass fibre reinforced polystyrene Pressure sensor Flow Monitor Sensor Aluminium oxide Al2Os 96 96 O rings FKM EPDM or PTFE Warning Observe the manufacturer s safety instructions when handling chemicals The resistance of the parts that come into contact with the media depends on the media media temperature and operating pressure Ensure that parts in contact with the medium are chemically resistant to the dosing medium under operating conditions Further information on resistance with regard to the media media temperature and operating pressure is available on request 4 7 Control unit Functions of pumps with control unit e continuous operation button for function test and dosing head deaeration memory function stores a maximum of 65 000 pulses two stage tank empty signal e g via Grundfos Alldos tank empty sensor stroke signal pre empty signal adjustable dosing controller functio
53. Ground Point Three phase hookup The warranty on all three phase submersible motors is VOID if 1 The motor is operated with single phase power through a phase converter 2 Three leg ambient compensated extra quick trip overload protectors are not used 3 Three phase current unbalance is not checked and recorded See START UP Section 7 for instructions 4 High voltage surge arresters are not installed Control Box Panel Grounding The control box or panel shall be permanently grounded in accordance with the National Electrical Code and local codes or regulations The ground wire should be a bare copper conductor at least the same size as the drop cable wire size The ground wire should be run as short a distance as possible and be securely fastened to a true grounding point True grounding points are considered to be a grounding rod driven into the water strata steel well casing submerged into the water lower than the pump setting level and steel discharge pipes without insulating couplings If plastic discharge pipe and well casing are used or if a grounding wire is required by local codes a properly sized bare copper wire should be connected to a stud on the motor and run to the control panel Do not ground to a gas supply line Connect the grounding wire to the ground point first and then to the terminal in the control box or panel Page 7 Operating Procedures Wiring Checks and Installation Before making the f
54. LogBook will only be displayed if a calibration has already been made service chlorine test current test relay In the service menu the following items are listed parameter displaying data of the previous 10 calibrations e controller checking controller settings e test current testing the functioning of the current outputs e test relay testing the functioning of the relays e test display testing the functioning of the display parameter logbook registration of calibration data The calibration data of all activated measuring values are registered in chronological order by a logbook function Example With pH measurement the logbook lists the following data calibration number with date time Slope sensitivity of the electrode asymmetric potential of the electrode temperature of the buffer solution used Under measured value the following data are displayed current measured value current cell voltage or cell current Under water sensor the following data are displayed speed of water sensor during last calibration e actual speed of the water sensor controller checking controller settings 1 Select the Up or Down button depending on the controller and select the corresponding menu using OK In the first line the configured type of controller is displayed and in the subsequent lines the current controller settings are listed Selec
55. Modules Supported 1769 L35CR 1 5 MB 1 port ControlNet supports redundant media 30 1 port RS 232 serial system or user protocols 1769 L35E 1 port EtherNet IP 1 port RS 232 serial system or user protocols 1769 L32C 750 KB 1 port ControlNet 16 1 port RS 232 serial system or user protocols 1769 L32E 1 port EtherNet IP 1 port RS 232 serial system or user protocols 1769 L31 512 KB 1 port RS 232 serial system or user protocols 4 1 port RS 232 serial system protocol only Design a CompactLogix When designing a CompactLogix system determine the network System configuration and the placement of components in each location To design your CompactLogix system you must select e I O devices e a communication network e controllers e power supplies e software Additional Resources For more information consult these publications e CompactLogix Selection Guide publication 1769 SG001 e Logix5000 Controller Design Considerations Reference Manual publication 1756 RM094 Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 14 1769 CompactLogix Controllers Overview Install Hardwa re To install a CompactLogix controller perform these procedures 1 Set the node address but only for 1769 L32C and 1769 L35CR controllers 2 Connect the battery See the chapter Maintain the Battery 3 Install a 1784 CF64 CompactFlash card for nonvolatile memory see the chapter Maintain Nonvolatile Memory 4 Assemble the system
56. ON OFF Weighting of current input output see section 9 9 Current signal control 0 20 mA 4 20 mA 4 20mA Analog L 00 Weighting of current input output Batch Timer PROFIBUS See next page Slow mode Dosing quantity counter Operating hours counter Fig 42 Second function level part 1 40 TMO03 6609 4506 Setting code 111 Calibration Dosing controller Pressure control Memory function Weighting of current input output PROFIBUS only with PROFIBUS Slow mode anti cavitation Bus address indication See previous page Batch on off ON OFF Adjustment of batch quantity and dosing rate for batch operation see section 9 6 5 Batch menu batch mode E Timer on off ON OFF Adjustment of batch quantity dosing rate and times for Timer see section 9 6 6 Timer menu timer mode Slow mode on off ON OFF To set the slow mode factor see section 9 6 8 Slow mode Display of total dosing quantity I resettable Dosing quantity 0 000 9 999 counter 100 0 999 9 1000 9999 er CR SEH e Operating hours counter Fig 43 Second function level part 2 9 6 Calibration The dosing flow display is set by default for an operating counter pressure of 3 bar Calibration can be used to set the pump flow to the actual operating conditions Calibrate the pump under normal operating conditions with the discharge line connected and at op
57. Om P P W Warning These complete installation and operating instructions are also available on www Grundfosalldos com Prior to installation read these installation and operating instructions Installation and operation must comply with local regulations and accepted codes of good practice 1 Symbols used in this document Warning If these safety instructions are not observed it may result in personal injury If these safety instructions are not observed it may result in malfunction or damage to the equipment Notes or instructions that make the job easier and ensure safe operation 2 A few words in advance The Conex DIA 2 Dosing Instrumentation Advanced with 2 inputs multipurpose measuring amplifier and controller you have just purchased uses the company s leading edge measuring technology The Conex DIA 2 is a multipurpose device designed to carry out high precision measurements and controls of the following e a value from parameter group 1 chlorine chlorine dioxide ozone or hydrogen peroxide e a value from parameter group 2 pH value The integrated controller the high resolution graphics display and the multilingual plain text user interface make complicated measuring and control tasks in water chemistry much easier Just a few button inputs lead you to your goal The potentiostat helps save even more time being automatically matched to the various input variables The s
58. Open the service level e to modify the switch assignments of the control unit to set the pump type or e to select the unit of measurement for the dosing flow I h or gal h that will be displayed 9 7 1 Modifying the switch assignment You are modifying the default settings of your control unit They will therefore differ from the technical data The service level can only be accessed when the power supply is switched on 1 Simultaneously press the Menu Info and Down buttons and hold them down 2 Switch on the power supply The LED alternately flashes red and green 3 Release the Menu Info and Down buttons Press the Start Stop button 5 Press the Up button The LED lights up yellow Func appears in the display 6 Press the Menu Info button The service level is opened P L Pump not connected to power supply E e e Keep pressed when switching on Y L LED alternately flashes red and green o L Service level 1 Relay function stroke pre empty pulse selection 2 Relay output NO NC stroke pre empty pulse 3 Pre empty signal NO NC input 4 Empty signal NO NC input 5 Error signal NO NC output 6 Remote off NO NC input 7 Locking run on off P CAL on off St 60 unit l h gph Keep pressed for approx 10 seconds Pump type Fig 46 Opening exiting the service level Navigate in the service level
59. PVC tube DN 4 is not suitable for use as a discharge line Connect PE tube DN 4 on the discharge side Warning Observe the pressure stage of the used lines The maximum permissible inlet pressure and the pressure stage of the discharge lines must not be exceeded Minimum internal diameter Pump version Pump type Standard HV variant mm mm Suction side 5 POLUSE S Discharge side 4 DDI 2 2 16 DDI 2 5 10 4 6 DDI 5 5 10 DDI 13 8 4 e Suction side 9 DDI 20 3 Discharge side 6 5 6 3 Connecting the suction and discharge lines Connect the suction line to the suction valve 3a Install the suction line in the tank so that the foot valve remains approximately 5 to 10 mm above the bottom of the tank or the possible level of sedimentation Connect the discharge line to the discharge valve 3b TMO03 6235 4506 Fig 20 Connecting the suction and discharge lines Pos Components 3a Suction valve 3b Discharge valve C Pipe connection D Tube connection 23 5 6 4 Connecting the overflow and deaeration lines Warning Observe chemical resistance HV variant pumps have an assisting suction In this case prepare cut the deaeration line but do not connect it yet The pump has a deaeration line PVC 4 6 Connect the deaeration line J to the connection for the deaeration line I TMO03 6
60. SS OLE Iy panid eire ezuoog e pena zg UOT HN a 03H g JE WHS va dee ALD japow duund uo juapusdag Lit Elp At Jeeis Buu Burureyey Leef 16 jeduuj eung E ET uoe uoyeL eung civ Bnjd 6uisep uoi sey v o Yr Jlee1s Ae YeUS Jees jeoiueuoeyw ESE yaysem J20 Big i CHE lees oq de pueEcqing ELE BaS SNOUBA leais jeeis 1881S cu eJ31 49de 091 jedeg 16x58 Buise2 leeis LLE ol o jeeis cC u o dp E 3 o D sei 2 4 o Q bh ke oO q Ku UI gt Q Lo BEER yoq Jee L Aey 1Jejeduul L 87 1 L 89i SS BLE o i qm N UOJ 358659 uoi Bz E bd LI lees 1881S Buueaq jeipey inu 20 Big L jeeis jeeis t8915 gel 81S 1881S deo Biq pi eoaino 1291S deo Biq pieoqui 1081S vt SS BLE 9gct Jeqqny KCL c o uo ER 0 SE se E dE O Q m Wo 0 st m eaS Buisreaq IsnIyL uoJ SED Gui seam Buise2 jeeis 1881S 1 UOJ 15825 ezuoig EOL eZUudIg LOL m QN CN Ki N m m E e es UOJ Leg c c Q o 4 7 c O O pajunow awes JOd 1400 UOl29gS SSOID Od SJIHXJS Z Qrel ELE VEL SBE TLL 890 EBL EZ Z E 9cl ESE 17 801 OLE JO d ONT SAIOO IONHOL 80v LSE COl Elt HL civ LOL OO TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Pump Probable Cause Remedy Reprime pump
61. Support To use Logix5000 controllers on Modbus connect the controllers through the serial port and execute specific ladder logic routines A sample controller project is available with RSLogix 5000 Enterprise programming software To view sample projects see Sample Controller Projects on pg 70 Additional Resources For more information consult these publications e Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Manual publication 1756 PM001 e Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756 RM003 e SCADA System Application Guide publication AG UMOOS8 e Logix5000 Controllers as Masters or Slaves on Modbus Application Solution publication CIG AP129 DH 485 Network Communications 1761 NET AIC Converter Communicate Over Networks 39 For DH 485 communication use the controller s serial port However with a CompactLogix controller we recommend that you use NetLinx networks such as EtherNet IP ControlNet or DeviceNet because excessive traffic on a DH 485 network may make it impractical to connect to a controller with RSLogix 5000 programming software IMPORTANT If your application uses connections to DH 485 networks select built in serial ports The DH 485 protocol uses RS 485 half duplex as its physical interface RS 485 is a definition of electrical characteristics not a protocol You can configure the CompactLogix controller s RS 232 port to act as a DH 485 interface By usi
62. This unit i permanently lubricated Oiling is not required Do not in any case open the sealed portion of the unit or remove housing screws 3 Periodic cleaning of the pump parts will prolong the LIFE and EFFICIENCY of the pump Refer to the assembly and dis assembly of the pumping head 4 Remove screws that hold base to volute and clean impeller and volute passage Do not use strong solvents on impeller 5 Be sure impeller turns freely after cleaning 6 WARNING DO NOT REMOVE IMPELLER REMOVAL OF IMPELLER REQUIRES SPECIAL TOOLS AND IS TO BE DONE ONLY BY AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE CENTER DO NOT REMOVE MOTOR HOUSING COVER WARRANTY IS VOID IF MOTOR HOUSING COVER IMPELLER OR DEALS HAVE BEEN REMOVED ANY REPAIR ON MOTOR MUST BE DONE BY AN AUTHORIZED LITTLE GIANT SERVICE CENTER 7 Be certain power cord is in good condition and contains no nicks or cuts gt INTRODUCTION Cette liste de directives vous fournit les renseignements n ces saires pour utiliser une pompe de la s rie 6E Little Giant en toute s curit Vous avez achet une pompe pour effluent submersible pouvant tre utilis e dans des bassins ou dans des stations de pompage des eaux us es Elle permet de pomper les eaux d gout l effluent les eaux us es et d autres liquides non explosifs et non corrosifs pouvant contenir des solides d un diam tre de 1 2 po La pr sente feuille d instructions d crit les mod les standard de cette s rie de pompe
63. abrasive domestic cleaning agent for instance ATA VIM The flow armature F can be cleaned with conventional soap suds f high contamination or furring is evident clean the dismantled flow armature F briefly with diluted hydrochloric acid max 5 10 945 Warning Observe the safety regulations when using hydrochloric acid When cleaning with hydrochloric acid it is absolutely necessary to wear safety goggles Before using other detergents check the chemical resistance of the materials as they may destroy some components Do not clean electrodes filters float bodies or other metal parts using hydrochloric acid Clean the metal surfaces of the measuring electrode D and the float body N with an abrasive domestic cleaning agent if there are deposits NO Clean the filter strainer P2 under running water Use a soft brush if necessary Carefully clean all plastic parts with soap suds Use hydrochloric acid 5 10 for deposits Carefully rinse all parts with clean water Replace any damaged parts On P CO 14 4 Assembling the measuring cell Only tighten screw parts by hand do not use tools Risk of leaking Ensure that all O rings are fitted correctly 1 Re assemble the measuring cell in reverse order Screw in the shut off spindles of the sample water inlet V1 and outlet V2 and the bleeding spindle L Assemble and screw in the calibration cup
64. and cannot be stopped using the Start Stop button It is still possible to acknowledge error messages using the Start Stop button Stopping the pump when the locking run is activated If remote on off is connected use remote off Disconnect the pump from the power supply For Batch manual the Run button should not be locked as the pump then runs in continuous operation 9 2 3 Two stage tank empty signal This function is used to provide a warning when the tank is almost empty and to switch off the pump when the tank is empty To use the pre empty signal ensure that the suction line is equipped with two float switches 33 Pre empty signal The pre empty signal can be an error signal or a pre empty signal at socket 3 For a pre empty signal relay 1 must be set to Pre empty signal See sections 6 1 Connecting the signal lines for DDI 209 and 9 7 1 Modifying the switch assignment When the contact of the corresponding float switch closes e the error signal relay or pre empty signal relay switches on but the pump is not switched off The LED flashes red The empty signal symbol flashes in the display M Manual 1 20 D Stop PM 3 Rn J Fig 33 Display pre empty signal TMO3 6596 4506 Once the error has been corrected the error signal relay or pre empty relay switches off The pump returns to the state it was in before the error occurred Empty signal When the contact
65. buttons Press OK to confirm 7 Repeat to confirm Set a new four digit code number using the Up and Down buttons and press OK to confirm 8 Access rights can be cancelled by deleting the corresponding code number in the delete submenu Entering a valid four digit code number gives the operator access to the corresponding functions for a limited time of 60 minutes f no code was entered previously the desired menu can be accessed without restrictions The code number 0000 will not be displayed the operator will not be asked to enter it If a wrong code is entered access to the corresponding menus is denied An error message is triggered duration five seconds and the device will return to main menu 13 5 9 Reset function Entering the code number 1998 deletes all previously entered code numbers All prior access codes are deleted and reset to 0000 13 5 10 Adjusting display contrast In the display menu the contrast of the display can be adjusted 1 Switch from the setup menu to the display menu using the Up and Down buttons and press OK to confirm If the contrast setting is too high it may not be possible to read the display Hold down the Down button until the contrast setting is low enough to be read again 13 5 11 Saving accessing user settings In the factory setting submenu the current device setting can be saved so that it can be reactivated lat
66. by repeatedly pressing the Menu Info button Use the Up and Down buttons to modify the switch assignment in the relevant menu Press the Menu Info button for 10 seconds to open the pump type selection Press the Start Stop button to confirm the new settings to exit the service level to open the first function level TMO03 6620 4506 1 Relay function stroke pre empty pulse selection 1 OFF 1 ON or 1 1 1 appears in the display Use the Up and Down buttons to switch between 1 OFF Relay function stroke signal 1 min flashes in the display and 1 ON Relay function pre empty signal empty signal symbol flashes in the display and 1 1 1 Relay function pulse input n 1 flashes in the display Press the Menu Info button confirm the setting and move on to the next menu item or press the Start Stop button confirm the setting and close the service level 2 Relay output NO NC stroke pre empty pulse 2 NO or 2 NC appears in the display 1 min and empty signal symbol flash in the display Use the Up and Down buttons to switch between 2 NO Stroke pre empty signal pulse input relay normally open contact and 2 NC Stroke pre empty signal pulse input relay normally closed contact Press the Menu Info button confirm the setting and move on to the next menu item or press the Start Stop button c
67. cable break 56 Once the error has been corrected press the Start Stop button to restart the pump The pump returns to the state it was in before the error occurred If the cable is broken the dosing controller and pressure control pressure display functions are not active When the Menu Info button is pressed twice to display the chamber pressure only Is displayed If the sensor fault cannot be corrected immediately and if the pump is to continue to run without a sensor switch off the dosing controller flow OFF and pressure control function P OFF 9 10 6 Changing the number of permissible error strokes To change the number of permissible error strokes during the start up operation and during normal dosing operation Permissible error strokes during start up operation Number of error strokes until the error message is triggered Fig 63 Permissible error strokes 1 Open the service level 2 Repeatedly press the Menu Info button to navigate in the service level until you reach menu item St 60 error stroke during start up operation The display shows St and the number of currently defined error strokes that are permissible during the start up operation 3 Use the Up and Down buttons to set the number of permissible error strokes during the start up operation in the range between 1 and 99 4 Press the Start Stop button Confirm the setting and go
68. cell Open the deaeration spindle R1 Open the bleeding spindle L and deaeration spindle J and drain the water Close the deaeration spindle again R1 Unscrew the connections to the sample water inlet U1 and outlet U2 3 Remove the electrodes and sensors If a water sensor is fitted Unscrew the screw O1 on the water sensor O and remove the sensor Unscrew the plug for the measuring electrode E and remove the electrode Remove the reference electrode B1 Fit thread protective caps and clean the electrode Remove the pH A1 and redox electrodes A2 if necessary Fit thread protective caps and clean the electrodes Fit protective caps on the electrodes The protective caps must be filled with 3 molar potassium chloride solution Observe the installation and operating E instructions of the electrodes Store electrodes with protective caps in a dry place Carefully remove the screwed part H The cleaning wing X and inlet chamber W are loose on the measuring electrode D and may fall out Keep O rings 4 Unscrew the cleaning motor and measuring electrode Unscrew the cleaning motor G and the screwed part H from the flow armature F with the slide G1 and remove them carefully Keep O rings W1 Remove the cleaning wing X and inlet chamber W e Remove the flow armature Slacken the screws of the flow armature do
69. check that pump and suction Pump not primed line are full of liquid Suction lift too high Shorten suction pipe Check suction line pressure If low locate and remove obstruction Foot valve or suction pipe opening Consult factory for proper depth Use baffle not submerged enough to eliminate vortices t D Suction line clogged Impeller clogged with foreign Disassemble and remove blockage Air leak in suction line Check for leakage and correct I i i l 4 i 1 D H i H N i H t i i i i j l Pump not producing Ensure that suction line shutoff valve is fully rated flow or head Insufficient suction head open and line is unobstructed Check suction pressure Wrong rotation Correct wiring Improperly primed pump Reprime pump j Pump starts then p Rearrange piping as necessary to eliminate stops pumping Air or vapor pockets in suction line air pockets s LJIrleakinsuctionline Check for leakage and correct Partly clogged impeller causing imbalance Worn motor bearings Replace defective part as required Tighten hald down bolts of pump and motor or adjust stilts Check grout Anchor per Hydraulic Institute Standards recommendations Edition 14 Centrifugal pump section Lx cl Disassemble and remove blockage Pump is noisy or vibrates Base not rigid enough
70. configured two position controllers the relay outputs 1 and 2 as well as the output cont controller can be separately run manually By selecting the desired relay output the dosing flow of the pump pumps can be changed manual operation controller stop 1 Having switched to manual operation the message controller stop is displayed for five seconds All controllers are switched off The final control elements are closed set to 0 manual operation 0 01 mg l BE 5 20pH c 22 C C TMO03 6739 4506 2 After that the device automatically switches to the mode display measured value first line manual operation The controller control display is shown on the right side of the display window Either control field 1 is present for relay 1 or there is a field for the continuous controller See section 13 6 3 Controller control fields on the display Since switching to manual operation will cause all controllers to be switched off none of the control fields are filled there are no areas displayed inversely 3 Press OK to switch to the subsequent menu Three options are available relay output 1 relay output 2 e continuous controller manual operation relay output 1 relay output 2 cont controller 4 Select relay output 1 using the Up and Down buttons Press OK to switch to the corresponding menu 5 Set the desired dosing rate of the pump using the
71. controls 2 If the pump fails to operate or there is a loss of performance refer to Troubleshooting Section 8 Troubleshooting The majority of problems that develop with submersible pumps are electrical and most of these problems can be corrected without pulling the pump from the well The following chart covers most of the submersible service work As with any troubleshooting procedure start with the simplest solution first always make all the above ground checks before pulling the pump from the well Usually only two instruments are needed a combination voltmeter ammeter and an ohmmeter These are relatively inexpensive and can be obtained from most water systems suppliers WHEN WORKING WITH ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS USE CAUTION TO AVOID ELECTRICAL SHOCK It is recommended that rubber gloves and boots be worn and that care is taken to have metal control boxes and motors grounded to power supply ground or steel drop pipe or casing extending into the well WARNING Submersible motors are intended for operation in a well When not operated in a well failure to connect motor frame to power supply ground may result in serious electrical shock Page 10 Troubleshooting Preliminary Tests SUPPLY VOLTAGE How to Measure By means of a voltmeter which has been set to the proper scale measure the voltage at the control box or starter On single phase units measure between line and neutral On three phase units
72. have enough lubricant for startup and initial operation of approximately 1500 hours Oil lubricated pumps are shipped without oil and need to be filled through the filler connection located on top of the bearing housing Oil should be a good quality non detergent bearing oil with rust and oxidation inhibitors REPAIR Frame mounted pump REMOVAL Lock out the power supply to the motor and remove the pump assembly from the baseplate DISMANTLING Refer to Cross section drawing enclosed for reference of part items specified in the instructions below 1 Remove casing bolts 370 and pull casing 100 from adapter 108 Inspect wear ring 103 for wear if installed 2 Remove impeller bolt 304 and gasket ring 412A 3 Remove impeller 101 by lightly prying between the impeller and adapter 108 on larger models a standard wheel puller may be required to remove impeller Note when prying or pulling impeller apply loads to the back shroud of the impeller at the point that is supported by the impeller vane 4 Inspect and replace sleeve Oring 412B 5 Remove sleeve and mechanical seal assembly 126 and 383 from the shaft and inspect for signs of wear The seal should always be replaced or as a minimum be re lapped The shaft sleeve need only be replaced if there are signs of wear or grooving Note on some models the sleeve is a shrink fit on the shaft those models will not have impeller gasket and sleeve Oring 412A a
73. header The measured value for a possibly active temperature measurement is shown in the second line c is displayed if the compensation functions are active Alarm signals A parameter based alarm refers to the flashing parameter in the header Parameter independent alarms are displayed in the bottom line but the display does not flash for this alarm If several alarms are present they can be scrolled using the Up and Down buttons They are displayed in chronological order The selected alarm signal is displayed with inverted font Subsequently the display is switched to the last display mode set Display mode with active alarms and two parameters 0 30 S LO st larm line 1 N alarm line E Co alarm line 2 e gt ke The parameters are displayed left justified and right justified in the header and the measured values of the parameters are displayed directly underneath The measured value for a possibly active temperature measurement and the display c if the compensation functions are active are suppressed 26 Display mode with active alarms and one parameter 0 30 mg l alarm line 1 alarm line 2 TMO03 6975 4506 The large display shows the measured values and the selected parameter is displayed in the header The measured value for a possibly active temperature measurement and the display c if the compensation functions are active are suppressed 13 3 Software overview Provided
74. id Conex e Qe 1 ooo rab A ON CH a m CCEPIT i T mmm Ee orl L pee J WU Fig 1 AQC D1 potentiostatic measuring cell with Conex DIA DIS measuring amplifier E HEN EN E LEA LI VS yyy LA o fmm L m um H 8 J d Q Fig 2 AQC D1 potentiostatic measuring cell with sensor interface gu ma H ub Les i e eg er AN amp me c LM om Sg a Te pm m m Il n mron 1 GO CCP j E g O 8 LX i a v E T wm Mb CH m UI WU TMO03 5852 1106 Fig 3 AQC D1 potentiostatic measuring cell with DIP measuring amplifier Conex DIA 1 Conex DIA 2 Conex DIA 2Q Conex DIS D measuring amplifier Sensor interface for Conex DIA 1 Conex DIA 2 Conex DIA 2Q cabinet mounted device 3 DIP measuring amplifier 5 Identification 5 1 Nameplate AquaCell 1 Pos Description 2 GRUNDFOS 24 1 Type designation 3 ALLDOS 2 Model AQC D2 P AU PCB X QS T X 3 Serial number 4 314 930 10018 S N 07 44800 4 Maximum pressure bar 4 00 bar 96622918P 1107270744800 5 9 Produet number 6 Ge 6 Year and week code III 7 Country of origin 7 Made in Germany S He Fig A Nameplate AquaCell 5 2 Type key AquaCell Type key example AQC D1 P AU PCB RCB QS T G Model AQC AquaCell Application D1 Pressure proof with cleaning motor Clo CIO O3 D2 Pressure proof with hydromechanical cleaning Clo ClOz O3 D3 Pressureless w
75. is changed tighten the dosing head screws After approximately 6 10 operating hours or two days cross tighten the dosing head screws using a torque wrench Maximum torque DDI 0 4 DDI 5 5 2 1 Nm DDI 13 8 DDI 20 2 5 Nm 7 1 Initial start up subsequent start up 7 1 1 Checks before start up Check that the rated voltage stated on the pump nameplate corresponds to the local conditions e Check that all connections are secure and tighten if necessary Check that the dosing head screws are tightened with the specified torque and tighten if necessary e Check that all electrical connections are correct With Plus system Open the isolating valve D at the calibration tube 7 1 2 Assisting suction for Plus system Pumps with Plus system have an assisting suction Fit the syringe and the piece of hose zx CS l E Malai vin mi Lpo ED ITU i h TMO03 6242 4506 Fig 25 Assisting suction for Plus system Warning Ensure that the pump is stopped Sucking in dosing medium using the assisting suction for Plus system O Fig 26 Sucking in the dosing medium Remove the cover from the priming chamber Push the hose as far as it will go into the valve tube Draw up the syringe in order to create a perceptible low pressure and hold the syringe in this position Dosing medium rises in the suction line through
76. is used Press the Start Stop button check after calibration to determine The current calibration value is displayed whether a new current weighting is required not with replacement circuit boards Fig 44 Calibration Green LED flashing Process 200 strokes Run e SE CALL Flashing Stop CALL Manual stop at user defined stroke number Red LED Red LED H o 110 0 Stop CALL Ae Stop CALL Input of actual ascertained calibration volume Value of manufacturing calibration calculated for stroke number of actual calibration TMO03 6618 4506 9 6 1 Calibrating pumps with Plus system 1 internal calibration Before opening the second menu level close the isolating valve D on the calibration tube E and allow the pump to dose a couple of strokes so that the liquid level is within the scale Stop the pump Slowly open the isolating valve D and allow the dosing medium to rise to the top of the scale in the calibration tube Close the isolating valve D Open the calibration menu OFF CAL appears in the display Press the Up button ON CAL appears in the display Press the Start Stop button Calibration is started The LED flashes green and Run flashes in the display Press the Start Stop button to stop the calibration when the liquid level reaches the bottom of th
77. it is to be used to pump water above 102 F The Grundfos stainless steel submersible is highly resistant to the normal corrosive environment found in some water wells If water well tests determine the water has an excessive or unusual corrosive quality or exceeds 102 F contact your Grundfos representative for information concerning specially designed pumps for these applications C Installation Depth A check should be made to ensure that the installation depth of the pump will always be at least 5 five to 10 ten feet below the maximum draw down level of the well For flow rates exceeding 100 gpm refer to performance curves for recommended minimum submergence The bottom of the motor should never be installed lower than the top of the well screen or within five feet of the well bottom If the pump is to be installed in a lake pond tank or large diameter well the water velocity passing over the motor must be sufficient to ensure proper motor cooling The minimum recommended water flow rates which ensure proper cooling are listed in Table A D Electrical Supply The motor voltage phase and frequency indicated on the motor nameplate should be checked against the actual electrical supply Wire Cable Type The wire cable used between the pump and control box or panel should be approved for submersible pump applications The conductor may be solid or stranded The cable may consist of individually insulated conductors twisted
78. mAmin assigned flow rate QmA min appears in the display the default value is 0 000 3 Use the Up and Down buttons to enter the desired value for flow rate QmA min at MAmin Now enter the values for reference pair H 1 Press the Start Stop button The current value for MAmax appears in the display the default value is H 20 0 mA 2 Use the Up and Down buttons to enter the maximum current input MAmax gt MAmin e g MAmax 16 mA 3 Press the Start Stop button The current value for the mAmax assigned flow rate Qma max appears in the display the default value is Qmax 0 20 mA Analog 0 20 mA Analog SS Bez E 0 20 mA 0 000 Set the flow rate Qma min 0 0 999 Uh 1 9 9 I h 10 Qmax l h Analog 11 00 00 7 Set the flow rate Qma max 0 0 999 Uh 1 9 9 I h 10 Qmax l h TMO03 6612 4506 Use the Up and Down buttons to enter the desired value for flow rate Qma max at MAmax e g Qma max 8 I h Press the Menu Info button confirm the setting and move on to the next menu item or press the Start Stop button confirm the setting and close the second function level 51 Result of weighting In the example the following values were entered as reference points Lg and Hg Lg MAmin 6 MA Qselect mA min 2 l h Hg mAmax 16 MA Qselect mA max 8 l h The curve for current input current output now passes through Q
79. not pinch the cable Always observe the E mounting sequence below E Jeu am kal A E EN ED AO 20 mm TMO03 5857 1106 Fig 9 Mounting sequence for preassembled systems 12 Start up 12 1 Installation of electrodes and sensors 12 1 1 Reference electrode pH and redox single rod electrodes 1 Unscrew the screw plugs of the holders A B used for the flow armature F 2 Remove the moisture retention caps of the electrodes or single rod electrodes A1 A2 B1 used and keep them for possible electrode removal 3 Screw in the electrodes or single rod electrodes A1 A2 B1 used by hand into the holders A or B Observe the installation and operating diis instructions of the electrodes Fig 10 Holders for electrodes 12 1 2 Water sensor The water sensor O is optional The holder for the water sensor is on the float body 1 Screw the water sensor O into the appropriate holder of the measuring cell and secure it using the screw 2 Slacken the screw O1 insert the water sensor as far as it will go O and gently tighten the screw Fig 11 Holder for water sensor 12 1 3 Temperature sensor The Pt100 temperature sensor is integrated into the measuring electrode D 12 2 Water connections Only tighten the union nut by hand Do not use any tools For the pressure proof measuring cell a pressure
80. of time or has been emptied for instance for inspection is it necessary to start up the measuring cell as if it was the first start up See section 12 6 Checks prior to start up and 12 7 Switching on 13 5 Fault finding chart Observe the installation and operating instructions of the measuring amplifier and controller Fault 1 No display No electricity supply to the measuring cell 2 he measured value is lower than the reference measurement 3 The measured value is higher than the reference measurement 4 The measured value is unstable Cause a Adisinfection or oxidation agent is missing in sample water b The electrode cable connection is interrupted C Noor too low sample water flow rate d The measuring electrodes are faulty e The measuring electrodes are contaminated or made passive by deposits a The measuring electrodes are faulty b The measuring electrodes are contaminated or made passive by deposits c The temperature has fallen since the calibration d The system has run too short time prior to calibration e Unsuitable chlorination agent f Incorrect photometric reference measurement during calibration g The pH value for the chlorine measurement has risen since the calibration h The cleaning motor does not run i The quantity of sample water is set too low j The cleaning wing is blocked a The temperature has risen since the calibration b T
81. of acid to anions is primarily according to an equilibrium dependent on the pH value according to the equation HOCI H20 ZS H30 OCI HOCI OCT 100 80 60 40 20 0 TMO03 5879 1106 Fig 27 HOCI OCI diagram The potentiostatic measuring cell for chlorine primarily only determines the portion of hypochlorous acid that is relevant for disinfection Since the dependence on the pH value is particularly large in the actually relevant range between pH 7 and pH 8 5 this dependence must be compensated for in the measuring amplifier if the pH value varies considerably The pH value must therefore also be measured and the pH compensation function must be activated on the measuring amplifier 13 2 Operation 13 2 1 Switching on See section 12 7 Switching on 13 2 2 Operating state Observe the installation and operating instructions of the measuring amplifier and the device controlled for instance a gas dosing unit or dosing pump The operation of the measuring cell in the operating state can be taken from the installation and operating instructions of the relevant measuring amplifier The measuring cell may be damaged if the reference electrode B1 is not connected and the electricity supply is switched on 19 13 2 3 Adjusting setting the quantity of sample water Set an average quantity of sample water with the adjustment spindle O1 so that the float body
82. of the corresponding float switch closes e the pump is switched off The error signal relay switches on The LED flashes red The empty signal symbol lights up in the display d Manual co Vh Ge st o C Stop ava I Fig 34 Display empty signal symbol Once the error has been corrected e the pump starts running again if it was running before The error signal relay switches off The pump returns to the state it was in before the error occurred 9 2 4 Diaphragm leakage sensor MLS As an option the pump can be equipped with a sensor for diaphragm leakage detection The electronics automatically detects whether a sensor is connected The following appears in the display 34 Manual 1 20 TMO03 6598 4506 Fig 35 Display MLS sensor is connected When a diaphragm leakage is detected by the sensor e the pump is switched off The error signal relay switches on The LED flashes red MBS MLS and ERROR flash in the display TMO03 6599 4506 Fig 36 Display diaphragm leakage detected Once the error has been corrected the contact is no longer closed press the Start Stop button to acknowledge the error The pump starts running again if it was running before The error signal relay switches off The pump returns to the state it was in before the error occurred 9 2 5 Hall sensor motor monitoring If the pump has existing strokes
83. plastic or flexible riser section directly to the pump Always attached a metallic nipple or adapter into the discharge chamber of the pump When tightened the threaded end of the nipple or adapter must not come in contact with the check valve retainer in the discharge chamber of the pump The drop cable should be secured to the riser pipe at frequent intervals to prevent sagging looping and possible cable damage Nylon cable clips or waterproof tape may be used The cable splice should be protected by securing it with clips or tape just above each joint IMPORTANT Plastic and flexible pipe tend to stretch under load This stretching must be taken into account when securing the cable to the riser pipe Leave 3 to 4 inches of slack between clips or taped points to allow for this stretching This tendency for plastic and flexible pipe to stretch will also affect the calculation of the pump setting depth As a general rule you can estimate that plastic pipe will stretch to approximately 2 of its length For example if you installed 200 feet of plastic riser pipe the pump may actually be down 204 feet If the depth setting is critical check with the manufacturer of the pipe to determine who to compensate for pipe stretch When plastic riser pipe is used it is recommended that a safety cable be attached to the pump to lower and raise it Check valves A check valve should always be installed at the surface of the well In addition for instal
84. port e 1769 L32C L32E L35CR and L35E CompactLogix controllers have one built in RS 232 port By default that port is channel 0 on these controllers e The 1769 L31 CompactLogix controller has two RS 232 ports One port only allows DF1 protocol only The second port accepts DF1 and ASCII protocol Limit the length of serial RS 232 cables to 15 2 m 50 ft You can configure the serial port of the controller for several modes CompactLogix Serial Port Configuration Mode Function s DF1 Point to Point Communicate between the controller and one other DF1 protocol compatible device This is the default system mode Default parameters are e Baud Rate 19 200 e Data Bits 8 e Parity None e Stop Bits 1 e Control Line No Handshake e RIS send Delay 0 e RIS Off Delay 0 This mode is typically used to program the controller through its serial port DF1 Master Control polling and message transmission between the master and slave nodes e he master slave network includes one controller configured as the master node and as many as 254 slave nodes Link slave nodes using modems or line drivers e A master slave network can have node numbers from 0 254 Each node must have a unique node address Also at least 2 nodes must exist to define your link as a network 1 master and 1 slave station are the two nodes DF1 Slave Use a controller as a slave station in a master slave serial communication network e When there are multipl
85. pumps with PROFIBUS interfaces The PROFIBUS interface is activated deactivated in this menu and the bus address is specified 9 6 8 Slow mode Activating the slow mode function lengthens slows down the suction stroke For example cavitation is thus reduced with viscous media Slow mode can be activated in any operating mode The maximum flow rate of the pump decreases The time for the suction stroke increases The maximum stroke rate in slow mode is 120 1 min 44 9 6 9 Display resetting of total dosing capacity The total capacity dosed since the value was last reset is displayed The maximum value that can be displayed is 9999 I If this value is exceeded the counting starts again at zero To reset the value 1 press the Up button dEL appears in the display 2 Press the Start Stop button The total dosing capacity is deleted Press the Menu Info button confirm the setting and move on to the next menu item or press the Start Stop button confirm the setting and close the second function level 9 6 10 Display of total number of operating hours The operating hours counter indicates the operating time of the drive e g to check maintenance intervals The maximum number of operating hours that can be displayed is 99 990 h display 9999 The operating hours counter cannot be reset Multiply the number displayed by 10 to determine the number of operating hours 9 7 Service level
86. result in motor and pump damage due to overheating A properly sized relief valve should be installed at the well head to prevent the pump from running against a closed valve Three Phase Motors 1 Check the direction of rotation Three phase motors can run in either direction depending on how they are connected to the power supply When the three cable leads are first connected to the power supply there is a 50 chance that the motor will run in the proper direction To make sure the motor is running in the proper direction carefully follow the procedures below Start the pump and check the water quantity and pressure developed Stop the pump and interchange any two leads Start the pump and again check the water quantity and pressure Compare the results observed The wire connection which gave the highest pressure and largest water quantity is the correct connection OO Wy Page 8 Start Up 2 Check for current unbalance Current unbalance causes the motor to have reduced starting torque overload tripping excessive vibration and poor performance which can result in early motor failure It is very important that current unbalance be checked in all three phase systems Current unbalance between the legs should not exceed 5 under normal operating conditions The supply power service should be verified to see if it is a two or three transformer system If two transformers are present the system is an open delta or wye
87. sections 5 Installation 7 Start up shutdown and 7 2 Operating the pump Only the additional functions are described in this section 9 1 Menu levels Menu levels used in the control unit First function level for selecting and setting the operating modes of the pump Manual Contact Analog performing the batch and timer functions and starting the pump Second function level for setting and viewing additional functions selecting and setting the batch and timer functions and setting the access code to protect the pump against unintentional or unauthorised access to pump settings Service level for setting the pump type and the unit of display for the dosing flow l h or gal h and setting the inputs and outputs Saving user settings The pump settings are automatically saved approximately every 10 minutes and remain as they are even after the power supply has been switched off 9 2 General functions of the control unit 9 2 1 Deaeration and suction If the Start Stop button is pressed for longer than 1 second the pump switches to continuous operation for as long as the button is held down e g for suction or deaeration This happens regardless of the selected operating mode In batch or timer mode the pump has to be stopped first 9 2 2 Locking run The pump can be locked to avoid manual stopping When activating this function service level the pump starts running with the present settings
88. shaped molded rubber ring over a square seat NOLE If L shaped seat is installed make sure that the rubber ring is tight against the shoulder of the seat with the rounded edge at the rear 3 See that there is a 1 32 minimum radius do not chamfer on the edge of the housing cavity which holds the seat and seat ring 4 Oil the outer surface of the seat ring use light oil not grease and push the assembly into the cavity seating it firmly and squarely 5 If it is not possible to insert seat with the fingers place card board protecting ring furnished with seal over face of seat and press into bore with picce of tubing having end cut square Tubing should be only slightly larger than diameter of shaft Remove cardboard ring after seat is firmly seated See Fig 2 at right Cleaning Seal Faces Before completing the Shaft Seal installation wipe the lapped sealing faces of the seat and sealing washer perfectly clean END PLATE INSTALLATION If the seal has been used before do not put it back in service until the sealing faces of the carbon washer and seat have either been re lapped or replaced Save cardboard shipping ring between lapped surfaces of seal See point No 5 below BODY CASTING INSTALLATION V Ma s trr rrer r OIN ae Pee oe TY n aw H xc pe 24 Ba L ee or DCE ND ee dai Fb LI SF PERS ei dd 3 f f 2 Ly Ge Ee a HL uUa Wut uu anto Et ur 7 a EE E vil LAPPED SLEEVE
89. spring 15 properly seated See Fig C 5 Before putting end plate on shaft thoroughly clean and oil lapped faces of both seal washer and seat Then slide end plate on shaft and press it in as far as it will go Do not allow it to spring out or move G Make sure all auxiliary piping connections are backward Tighten screws or bolts uniformly to Keep properly attached Check your specific layout faces of the seat at right angles to shaft Tightening drawing for proper seal chamber circulation in of end plate automatically sets seal in proper position structions FORM NO 5 261 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS TYPE 21 SHAFT SEAL SPRING HOLDER Y SPRING 4 DRIVE RING Sy By FLEXIBLE DIAPHRAGM WASHER Crane Packing Company Limited GENERAL OFFICE AND FACTORY 423 GREEN ROAD STONEY CREEK ONTARIO ProSpec zex 3235 WHARTON WAY MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO CANADA L4X 2B6 PHN 905 629 3100 FAX 905 629 3500 1 888 797 PUMP www prospectech com COnrIX Water Systems SECTION 9 3 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION amp CONTROLS Section 9 3 Process Instrumentation amp Controls 9 3 20 Allen Bradley Control Panel Model Panel View Plus 700 Tag NA Allen Bradley CompactLogix Controllers Catalog Numbers 1769 L31 1769 L32C 1769 L32E 1769 L35CR 1769 L35E Firmware Revision 16 A a GE 2 Oen EX NET MSS SS ANAND Las A ig ege SEAN Rockwell Autom
90. the display 3 Press the Up button OFF t appears in the display The timer function is deactivated 9 13 Creating a master slave application You can connect several secondary pumps and control the secondary pumps slaves via the first pump master 9 13 1 Master All operating modes are available for the master pump Manual Contact Batch dosing with manual contact start Timer mode with manual contact start Current control Select the output signal of the master pump in the service level relay 1 output socket 3 Stroke signal emits one output signal per stroke must be used for manual or current control of the master pump or pulse input emits one output signal per contact input signal must be used for contact control of the master pump 62 Alternatively select the current output output Socket 2 for current control of the slave pump Please note that the current output can differ from the current input e g when the pump is stopped and please observe the modified current output values with weighted current control 9 13 2 Slave The following operating modes are available for slave pumps in contact or current control input socket 4 Contact Batch dosing with contact start Timer mode with contact start Current control The settings for the operating modes of the slave pumps are implemented independently of settings for the master pump Unused pul
91. the pump After cleaning see above dispose of the pump in accordance with the relevant regulations 31 8 Operation In the event of a diaphragm leakage the dosing liquid may leak out of the hole in the intermediate flange between the pump and the dosing head The parts inside the housing are protected from the dosing liquid for a short time depending on the type of liquid by the housing sealing It is necessary to check regularly daily if liquid is leaking out of the intermediate flange For maximum safety we recommend the pump version with diaphragm leakage detection 8 1 Control and display elements 3 M l icle Fig 30 Display of DDI 209 Element id N TMO3 6257 4506 Description Light emitting diode LED Lights up red when the pump is stopped Lights up green when the pump is started and briefly goes out during a suction stroke Lights up yellow when the pump is switched off remotely Flashes red if an error signal is present Goes out when the pump is in menu mode Start Stop Use this button to start or stop the pump Error signals can be acknowledged by pressing the Start Stop button Use the Menu Info button to switch between the operating modes Use the Down and Up buttons to change values in the display 8 1 1 Display test A display test is automatically performed when the pump is switched on All the segments of the LCD are s
92. the pump is stopped LED lights up red pump Ate Use the Up and Down buttons to increase or The first function level is opened decrease the flow rate This can be done when 2 Navigate in the first function level by repeatedly the pump is stopped or when it is running pressing the Menu Info button 3 Use the Up and Down buttons to modify the Manual settings in the relevant menu as shown in fig 38 4 Press the Start Stop button to confirm the 1 2 0 settings and to exit the first function level e The pump is running LED lights up green TMO03 6601 4506 Fig 39 Display manual control 36 The maximum displayed adjustable flow rate is automatically set according to the selected pump type and the calibrated stroke volume Input range for the flow rate Qnin Pump type Resolution of flow rate l h DDI 0 4 10 0 004 1 ml h DDI 2 2 16 0 025 5 ml h for Q lt 1 I h DDI 2 5 10 0 025 40 ml h for Q gt 1 I h DDI 5 5 10 0 055 DDI 13 8 4 0 140 20 ml h for Q lt 10 I h DDI 20 3 0 200 100 ml h for Q gt 10 I h For counter pressures lower than 3 bar Qmin continuously increases from 0 004 I h to 0 006 I h 9 4 3 Contact signal control The pump must be started first in this operating mode LED lights up green and Run appears in the display Use the Start Stop button to start or stop the pump For continuous dosing in a process For each signal received at the contact input of
93. to select the calibration function CAL The LED illuminates 1 If necessary enter the code number for Cal or full authorisation 2 Change to the menu calibration with the OK button 3 Select the measured variable pH and confirm with OK Selection possibilities cal meas value measured value cal result and cal cycle count down function which triggers the alarm Calibrate sensor after a selectable time interval of 1 100 days 4 Select the line cal meas value with UP DOWN pH cal meas value cal result cal cycle 5 Select one of the defined buffer solutions GRUNDFOS DIN NIST the optional setting others and press OK The menu temperature is then selected automatically buffer GRUNDFOS DIN NIST others 6 Enter the temperature of the buffer solutions 7 Press OK to automatically jump to the menu buffer value 1 8 GRUNDFOS or DIN NIST buffer solutions Select one of the three available buffer values buffer value 1 4 01 pH 7 00 pH 9 18 pH 17 Buffer 1 1 Fill the calibration cup I up to the mark with buffer solution 2 Screw the calibration cup I into the flow armature F Once the buffer values have been read by the measuring amplifier the temperature of the sample water and the measured signal are automatically read 3 Then discard the buffer solution Unscrew the calibration cup l Do not return the buffer solution t
94. valves The dosing controller and dosing control functions can be switched on and off independently of each other It is always possibly to display the pressure that has been measured during operation whenever the pressure sensor is connected For information about operating the pump with the Flow Monitor see section 9 10 Flow Monitor 9 3 Signal outputs The control unit has the following signal outputs e g in order to return a signal to the control room 9 3 1 Current signal output To use the control signal output see section 9 9 Current signal control 0 20 mA 4 20 mA The current flow rate of the pump is output as a current signal e Current output 0 20 mA in the following mode Current control 0 20 mA e Current output 4 20 mA in the following modes Current control 4 20 mA Manual Contact Batch dosing with manual contact start Timer with manual contact start The current output is linear between 4 0 mA at flow rate 0 and 20 mA at maximum flow rate Qmax default setting or the corresponding weighting value pair 9 3 2 Error signal Used to return various error states to the control room 9 3 3 Stroke signal pre empty signal pulse input Depending on the relay setting the contact output receives a signal in these cases e for each complete stroke of the pump or e apre empty signal input or e each pulse input at the pump To set the relay see section 9 7 1 Mod
95. 0 00 1 00 0 00 1 00 0 00 1 00 2 00 12 00 0 1000 0 00 2 00 0 00 2 00 0 00 2 00 5 00 9 00 0 00 5 00 0 00 5 00 0 00 5 00 0 0 10 0 0 0 50 0 0 0 30 0 freely selectable between 1500 0 0 30 0 0 0 50 0 0 00 5 00 0 00 14 00 1500 10 3 2 Measuring range for temperature not with Conex DIS D C oF 0 to 50 32 to 122 0 to 100 32 to 212 5 to 120 23 to 248 10 4 Dimensional sketches drilling diagram 300 ra p gt 260 121 a B A TAI mm TI m mmm AMI 2 8 We Di eo ae e cd d P mI I I II J Fig 6 Drilling diagram for AQC D1 measuring cell
96. 0 at lt 6 mA from Q 2 I h at 6 mA to Q 8 I h at 16 mA and through Q 8 I h at gt 16 mA curve 1d In the same way it is possible to enter a current weighting with a negative gradient In order to do this the value pair for reference point L must first be entered with the smaller mA value followed by reference point H Qselect mA min e Q l h 10 I h 8 I h 6 I h Alb Qselect mA min d 2 Wb 0 0 mA Fig 54 Result of weighting The maximum flow rate of the pump must not be exceeded 52 4 mA 8 mA In the example the following values were entered as reference points L amp and He Le MAmin 2 MA Qselect mA min 12 I h He MAmax 16 mA Qselect mA max 2 l h The curve for current input current output now passes through Q 0 at lt 2 mA from Q 12 I h at 2 mA to Q 2 h at 16 mA and through Q 2 l h at gt 16 mA curve 1e Qselect mA max d Qselect mA max e 12 mA 16 mA lin mA 20 mA TMO03 6613 4506 Note down the set current weighting in the following diagram for current input current output 1 Label the Q l h axis for your working area 2 Mark your reference points with the value pairs L MAmin Qselect mA min and H mAmax Qselect mA max in the diagram 3 Draw the curve as a line from L to H vertically from Qselect mA min to the mA axis and horizontally from Qgelect mA max to the edge of the diagram L Qselect mA min __ ___
97. 03 328 8826 LETHBRIDGE T1JOE3 Farmland Supply Centre Ltd 1639 9th Ave S W 403 527 5657 MEDICINE HAT T1A 5C4 Pumps amp Pressure Inc 7018 Johnstone Drive 403 347 9770 RED DEER AB T4P 3Y6 British Columbia Murphy amp Wakefield 32394 S Fraser Way 604 853 3321 ABBOTSFORD V2T 1X2 Northern Saw amp Pump 9733 17th Street 250 782 7294 DAWSON CREEK V1G 4B1 SMAJOR PARTS DEPOT CANADA SKelowna Industrial Rewind Ltd 824 Crowley Ave 250 763 8434 KELOWNA V1Y G7 SGroundwater Hydrolics 1216 Franklin St 604 254 0616 VANCOUVER V6A 1K1 Van Isle Water Services Ltd 461Dupplin Road 250 383 7145 VICTORIA V8Z 1B8 Manitoba SUAP NAPA 1940 Queens Ave 204 728 9573 BRANDON R7B OT1 Laramee Enterprises Ltd 70 10th St NE 204 857 3483 PORTAGE LA PRAIRIE HIN 1B4 George s Auto Electric 631 Morris Ave 204 482 6423 SELKIRK R1A 1B7 KNC Electric Ltd 49 Severn Crescent 204 778 7333 THOMPSON R8N 1M7 SB A Robinson Co Ltd 1760 Ellice Ave 204 784 0100 WINNIPEG R3H OB6 Monarch Industries Ltd 51 Burmac Rd 204 786 7921 WINNIPEG R3C 3E4 Triple M Sales Ltd 1030 Pacific Ave 204 772 2245 WINNIPEG R3E 1G4 WSA 1986 Ltd P O Box 194 204 389 2183 WINNIPEG BEACH ROC 3G0 SDEPOT POUR PIECES DE RECHANGE PRINCIPALES CENTROS DE PARTES Y REPUESTOS New Brunswick Electric Motor Service Ltd 129 Westmorland St 506 458 8770 FREDERICT
98. 1 Device driver 3 Click Add New to add the driver The Add New RSLinx Driver dialog appears Add New RSLinx Driver Choose a name for the new driver 15 characters maximum Cancel AR DF1 1 4 Specify the driver name and click OK Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 18 Connect to the Controller Via the Serial Port The Configure RS 232 DF1 Devices dialog appears Configure R 232 DF1 Devices Device Name AB_DF1 1 Comm Port COM1 e Device f n Paan a Baud Aate 19200 station Number o 87 Decimal Parity None Error Checking BCC Stop Bits 1 Protocol FulDuplex e Auto Configure Use Modem Dialer Cancel Delete Help 5 Specify the serial port settings a From the Comm Port pull down menu choose the serial port on the workstation to which the cable is connected b From the Device pull down menu choose Logix 5550 Serial Port c Click Auto Configure 6 Verify that the Auto Configuration was successful If Then Yes Click OK No 30 to step 5 and verify that you selected the correct communications port 7 Click Close Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 Connect to the Controller Via the Serial Port 19 Select the Controller Path To select the controller path perform this procedure 1 In RSLogix 5000 programming software open a project for the controller Open Import Project Look in 9 Rockwell Auto
99. 106 TMO03 5869 1106 Fig 17 Cable for single rod electrode or electrodes A1 A2 B1 Cable from measuring electrode D 1 Cut the electrode cables to the desired length approximately 105 mm for the connections 2 Remove 105 mm of the outer insulation 3 Disentangle the braided screen until you reach the next part of the insulation 4 Cut the enclosed braided screen to 65 mm isolate it for instance using a shrink tube and fit a wire end ferrule Then remove the rest of the screen until you reach the insulation 5 Cut the brown and white insulated wire of the measuring electrode and counter electrode to 65 mm and fit wire end ferrules 6 Fit wire end ferrules to the blue and black insulated wires of the temperature sensor Insulated braided screen HK To Hi n o ll Hil LI IOU ER IU d i J 105 TMO3 5870 1106 SR il E 5 y Fig 18 Cable from measuring electrode D Pin Component Pin 1 brown Measuring electrode M Pin 2 white Counter electrode G C Pin 3 blue Pt100 temperature sensor Pin 4 black Pt100 temperature sensor 12 5 Electrical connections Warning The electrical connection should be carried out by qualified personnel Before connecting the supply cables check that the supply voltage specified on the type plate corresponds to the local conditions Before connecting the supply cables switch off the elec
100. 11000 Beograd Phone 381 11 26 47 877 11 26 47 496 Telefax 381 11 26 48 340 Singapore GRUNDFOS Singapore Pte Ltd 24 Tuas West Road Jurong Town Singapore 638381 Phone 465 6865 1222 Telefax 65 6861 8402 Slovenia GRUNDFOS PUMPEN VERTRIEB Ges m b H Podru nica Ljubljana Blatnica 1 SI 1236 Trzin Phone 386 01 568 0610 Telefax 386 01 568 0619 E mail slovenia grundfos si South Africa Grundfos Alldos Dosing amp Disinfection ALLDOS Pty LTD 98 Matroosberg Road Waterkloof Park P O Box 36505 Menlo Park 0102 0181 ZA Pretoria E mail alldos za alldos com Spain Bombas GRUNDFOS Espa a S A Camino de la Fuentecilla s n E 28110 Algete Madrid Tel 34 91 848 8800 Telefax 34 91 628 0465 Sweden GRUNDFOS AB Box 333 Lunnagardsgatan 6 431 24 M lndal Tel 46 0 771 32 23 00 Telefax 46 0 31 331 94 60 Switzerland Grundfos Alldos Dosing amp Disinfection ALLDOS International AG Sch nmattstra 3e A CH 4153 Reinach Tel 41 61 717 5555 Telefax 41 61 717 5500 E mail alldos ch alldos com Switzerland GRUNDFOS Pumpen AG Bruggacherstrasse 10 CH 8117 Fallanden ZH Tel 41 1 806 8111 Telefax 41 1 806 8115 Taiwan GRUNDFOS Pumps Taiwan Ltd 7 Floor 219 Min Chuan Road Taichung Taiwan R O C Phone 886 4 2305 0868 Telefax 886 4 2305 0878 Thailand GRUNDFOS Thailand Ltd 92 Chaloem Phrakiat Rama 9 Road Dokmai Pravej Bangkok 10250 Phone 66 2 725 8999
101. 150 HC 40 EZ CLEAN HC 90 0 35 HC 90 1 HC 90 5 HC 90 10 HC 90 20 HC 90 50 HC 90 100 HC 90 150 HC 90 EZ CLEAN HC 170 0 35 HC 170 1 HC 170 5 HC 170 10 HC 170 20 HC 170 50 HC 170 100 HC 170 150 HC 170 EZ CLEAN 80 Nominal Micron 0 35 1 5 10 20 50 100 150 NR 0 35 10 20 50 100 150 NR 0 35 1 5 10 20 50 100 150 NR 100 10 0 gt 2 2 ooo Total Head Loss P S I N O 40 80 Flow Rate GPM Cartridge Dimensions S oei 9 5 8 seus 9 5 8 9 5 8 958 915 87 9 5 8 95 87 19 1 27 19 2 19 1 2 2191 2 19 1 2 19 1 2 19 1 2 19 1727 19 1 2 30 3 4 30 3 4 30 3 4 30 3 4 30 3 4 30 3 4 30 3 4 30 3 4 30 3 4 7 3 4 7 3 4 7 3 4 7 3 4 7 3 4 7 3 4 7 3 4 7 3 4 7 3 4 7 3 4 7 3 4 7 3 4 7 3 4 7 3 4 7 3 4 7 3 4 7 3 4 7 3 4 7 3 4 7 3 4 7 3 4 7 3 4 7 3 4 7 3 4 7 3 4 7 3 4 30 3 4 3 FPT 3 FPT 3 FPT 3 FPT 3 FPT 3 FPT 3 FPT 3 FPT 3 FPT 3 FPT 3 FPT 3 FPT 3 FPT 3 FPT 3 FPT 3 FPT 3 FPT 3 FPT 3 FPT 3 FPT 3 FPT 3 FPT 3 FPT 3 FPT 3 FPT 3 FPT 3 FPT Activated carbon and Poly Pleat Hurricane cartridges available Please see catalog Pressure drop HUR 170 HP Ship Wt Ctn One Cartridge 4 Ibs 4 Ibs 4 Ibs 4 Ibs 4 Ibs 4 Ibs 4 Ibs 4 Ibs 4 Ibs 7 lbs 7 lbs 7 lbs 7 lbs 7 lbs 7 lbs
102. 2 23 00 Telefax 46 0 31 331 94 60 Switzerland Grundfos Alldos Dosing amp Disinfection ALLDOS International AG Sch nmattstra 3e 4 CH 4153 Reinach Tel 41 61 717 5555 Telefax 41 61 717 5500 E mail alldos ch alldos com Switzerland GRUNDFOS Pumpen AG Bruggacherstrasse 10 CH 8117 F llanden ZH Tel 41 1 806 8111 Telefax 41 1 806 8115 Taiwan GRUNDFOS Pumps Taiwan Ltd 7 Floor 219 Min Chuan Road Taichung Taiwan R O C Phone 886 4 2305 0868 Telefax 886 4 2305 0878 Thailand GRUNDFOS Thailand Ltd 92 Chaloem Phrakiat Rama 9 Road Dokmai Pravej Bangkok 10250 Phone 66 2 725 8999 Telefax 66 2 725 8998 Turkey GRUNDFOS POMPA San ve Tic Ltd Sti Gebze Organize Sanayi B lgesi Ihsan dede Caddesi 2 yol 200 Sokak No 204 41490 Gebze Kocaeli Phone 90 262 679 7979 Telefax 90 262 679 7905 E mail satis grundfos com Ukraine TOB FPYHO OC YKPAIHA 01010 Kuis Byn MockoBcbka 86 Ten 38 044 390 40 50 dax 38 044 390 40 59 E mail ukraine grundfos com United Arab Emirates GRUNDFOS Gulf Distribution P O Box 16768 Jebel Ali Free Zone Dubai Phone 971 4 8815 166 Telefax 971 4 8815 136 United Kingdom Grundfos Alldos Dosing amp Disinfection ALLDOS Ltd 39 Gravelly Industrial Park Tyburn Road Birmingham B24 8TG Phone 44 121 3283336 Telefax 44 121 3284332 E mail alldos uk alldos com United Kingdom GRUNDFOS Pumps Ltd Grovebury Road Leig
103. 237 4506 Fig 21 Connection for the deaeration line For pumps with Plus system The pump has a deaeration line PVC 4 6 Connect the deaeration line J to the connection for the deaeration line I Connect the overflow line H PVC tube 8 11 to the connection C TMO03 6238 4506 PP P Fig 22 Plus system 24 5 6 5 Installing the overflow and deaeration lines e Shorten the overflow line H and deaeration line J to at least 10 mm above the maximum tank level Insert the overflow line H and deaeration line J downwards into the dosing tank or collection container Avoid loops Min 10 mm TMO03 6239 4506 Fig 23 Overflow and deaeration lines Dosing medium can leak from the overflow and deaeration lines Route both lines into a collection container or the tank Do not immerse the overflow line and deaeration line in the dosing medium Observe the pressure limits specified in Caution i section 1 General information 6 Electrical connections Make sure that the pump is suitable for the electricity supply on which it will be used Warning Electrical connections must only be carried out by qualified personnel Disconnect the power supply before connecting the power supply cable and the relay contacts Observe the local safety regulations Warning The pump housing must only be opened by personnel authorised by Gru
104. 25 5 25 5 HOOKUP 1 2 25 X 100 8 HOOKUP 2 1 25 X 100 4 HOOKUP 3 5 25 X 100 2 FUSED DISCONNECT 4 MAGNETIC STARTER MANUAL RESET THERMAL OVER LOAD WITH EXTRA QUICK TRIP HEATERS HOOKUP 1 HOOKUP 2 HOOKUP 3 For a detailed explanation of three phase balance procedures see Three Phase Motor section 2 page 6 Page 20 Technical Data Table G Total Resistance of Drop Cable OHMS The values shown in this table are for copper conductors Values are for the total resistance of drop cable from the control box to the motor and back To determine the resistance 1 Disconnect the drop cable leads from the control box or panel 2 Record the size and length of drop cable 3 Determine the cable resistance from the table 4 Add drop cable resistance to motor resistance Motor resistances can be found in the Electrical Data Chart Table E 5 Measure the resistance between each drop cable lead using an ohmmeter Meter should be set on Rx1 and zero balanced for this measurement o The measured values should be approximately equal to the calculated values DISTANCE FROM CONTROL BOX TO PUMP MOTOR ga ME No 2 N D 0 5 sp if 3n ia in A n i 5n DROP CABLE OHMS Page 21 Page 22 COnrIX Water Systems SECTION 9 3 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION amp CONTROLS Section 9 3 Process Instrumentation amp Controls 9 3 19 Truckfill Pump Megga Model M
105. 3 q q 24 VIDC Z VIC Xeuo eunsojoue jaued jou02 Z V ZI Legend of terminals Pos Relays Alarm Pt100 H20 Stop Outputs Electrodes M B R G C Earth mV screen Description Relay 1 2 Alarm relay N O normally open N C normally closed Temperature sensor Water sensor Controller stop NO or NC selectable Current outputs mA Clo chlorine CIO chlorine dioxide O3 ozone or H202 hydrogen peroxide pH T P2 temperature continuous controller parameter 2 P1 output of continuous controller parameter 1 Measuring cells electrodes and single rod measuring chains Measuring electrode Reference electrode Counter electrode pH electrode Control panel enclosure Conex DIA 2 e Conex DIA 2 for installation in the control panel e Sensor interface for installation near the sensors 20 12 2 Power supply connection 1 Control panel enclosure Plug the plug strip into the corresponding terminal strip at the rear side of the device Ensure correct orientation 2 Connect the protective earth conductor PE to terminal 5 wall mounted enclosure or terminal 8 1 control panel enclosure 3 Connect the neutral conductor N or the conductor with 24 V version to terminal 3 wall mounted enclosure or terminal 8 2 control panel enclosure 4 Connect phase L1 or the conductor with 24 V version to terminal 1 wall mounted enclosure o
106. 3 3 1 Short term stop up to one week Close and or switch off the device controlled for instance a gas dosing unit or dosing pump Wait until the display of the measuring amplifier is at zero oO N Switch off the measuring amplifier JI Close the connection to the sample water inlet U1 and outlet U2 To protect the electrodes do not drain the water Make sure that the water level in the flow fitting F is sufficiently high for the reference electrode B1 to be immersed at least 2 cm during device stop Caution 13 3 2 Long term stop Close and or switch off the device controlled for instance a gas dosing unit or dosing pump Wait until the display of the measuring amplifier is at zero Switch off the electricity supply to the measuring amplifier and the cleaning motor at all poles Close the connection to the sample water inlet U1 and outlet U2 Open the deaeration spindle R1 Open the bleeding spindle L and deaeration spindle J and drain water Close the deaeration spindle again R1 Remove the reference electrode B1 fit thread protective caps and clean the electrode 9 Remove the pH A1 and redox single rod measuring chains A2 if necessary Fit thread protective caps and clean the electrode 10 Fit protective caps on the electrodes The protective caps must be filled with 3 molar potassium chloride solution Observe the installation and operating S
107. 340 0155 Austria GRUNDFOS Pumpen Vertrieb Ges m b H Grundfosstrake 2 A 5082 Gr dig Salzburg Tel 43 6246 883 0 Telefax 43 6246 883 30 Belgium N V GRUNDFOS Bellux S A Boomsesteenweg 81 83 B 2630 Aartselaar T l 32 3 870 7300 T l copie 32 3 870 7301 Belorussia l ipencraBurenecrBo l PVHIIDOC B Muucke 220123 Munck yn B Xopyxen 22 od 1105 Teneqou 37517 233 97 65 akc 37517 233 97 69 Bosnia Herzegovina GRUNDFOS Sarajevo Paromlinska br 16 BiH 71000 Sarajevo Phone 387 33 713290 Telefax 387 33 231795 Brazil Mark GRUNDFOS Ltda Av Humberto de Alencar Castelo Branco 630 CEP 09850 300 S o Bernardo do Campo SP Phone 55 11 4393 5533 Telefax 55 11 4343 5015 Bulgaria GRUNDFOS Pumpen Vertrieb Representative Office Bulgaria Bulgaria 1421 Sofia Lozenetz District 105 107 Arsenalski blvd Phone 359 2963 3820 2963 5653 Telefax 359 2963 1305 Canada GRUNDFOS Canada Inc 2941 Brighton Road Oakville Ontario L6H 6C9 Phone 1 905 829 9533 Telefax 1 905 829 9512 China Grundfos Alldos Dosing amp Disinfection ALLDOS Shanghai Water Technology Co Ltd West Unit 1 Floor No 2 Building T 4 2 278 Jinhu Road Jin Qiao Export Process ing Zone Pudong New Area Shanghai 201206 Phone 86 21 5055 1012 Telefax 86 21 5032 0596 E mail alldos cn alldos com China GRUNDFOS Pumps Shanghai Co Ltd 22 Floor Xin Hua Lian Building 755 775 H
108. 38 Pump running LED lights up green D e Pump not running LED lights up red G Keep pressed for 3 seconds e Setting code 111 e Calibration e Flow on off Active only with Flow e Monitor option i Memory function on off e Weighting of current input output d Batch mode Second function level Timer mode PROFIBUS Slow mode Display or resetting of total dosing capacity Display of total number of operating hours Fig 41 Opening exiting the second function level 1 Navigate in the second function level by repeatedly pressing the Menu Info button 2 Use the Up and Down buttons to modify the settings in the relevant menu as shown in fig 42 3 Press the Start Stop button to exit the second function level You can only change the parameters in the shown order When the Menu Info button is pressed again after one run the first function level opens automatically TMO03 6371 4506 39 Keep pressed for 3 seconds Setting cod Calibration OFF Press Up to start calibration CALI see section 9 6 Calibration Dosing controller Flow Monitor Active only with Flow Monitor flow option ON OFF Press Up to switch on pressure control function For maximum counter pressure Le settings see section Pressure control P O 9 10 2 Setting the Flow Monitor gre Memory function Saving of approx 65 000 contact
109. 38 044 390 40 50 dax 38 044 390 40 59 E mail ukraine grundfos com United Arab Emirates GRUNDFOS Gulf Distribution P O Box 16768 Jebel Ali Free Zone Dubai Phone 971 4 8815 166 Telefax 971 4 8815 136 United Kingdom Grundfos Alldos Dosing amp Disinfection ALLDOS Ltd 39 Gravelly Industrial Park Tyburn Road Birmingham B24 8TG Phone 44 121 3283336 Telefax 44 121 3284332 E mail alldos uk alldos com United Kingdom GRUNDFOS Pumps Ltd Grovebury Road Leighton Buzzard Beds LU7 8TL Phone 44 1525 850000 Telefax 44 1525 850011 U S A GRUNDFOS Pumps Corporation 17100 West 118th Terrace Olathe Kansas 66061 Phone 1 913 227 3400 Telefax 1 913 227 3500 Usbekistan l ipencraBurenbecrBo TPYHOPOC B TalukeHTe 700000 Tauikeur yn YcmaHa Hocupa 1 n TynMK 5 Tenecdon 3712 55 68 15 akc 3712 53 36 35 Addresses revised 17 03 2008 Being responsible is our foundation BE gt THINK gt INNOVATE gt Thinking ahead makes it possible Innovation is the essence 15 720074 v11 0 Repl 15 720074 V10 0 91834768 0708 Repl 91834768 0108 WV www grundfosalldos com GRUNDFOS Za ALLDOS COnrIX Water Systems SECTION 9 3 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION amp CONTROLS Section 9 3 Process Instrumentation amp Controls 9 3 16 Harmsco 5 micron and 1 micron filter cartridges Model Harmsco HUR 170 HP Harmsco HUR 3X170FL Tag SMF amp IMF rin HURRICANE
110. 40 20 78 17 0 82 79 1000 78355512 96405795 460 1 15 60 30 115 24 5 82 5 82 440 78355514 96405796 20 3 230 1 15 150 80 343 66 0 84 81 4400 78305516 96405784 460 1 15 80 40 172 33 0 84 82 4400 78355516 96405797 25 3 460 1 15 100 50 217 41 0 845 80 4400 78355517 96405798 30 3 460 1 15 110 60 237 465 85 83 4400 78355518 96405799 40 3 460 1 15 150 80 320 640 85 82 4400 78355520 96405800 Page 18 Technical Data HITACHI MOTORS 6 Inch Three Wire Motors 60 HZ Circuit Rosane Oms a Breakeror Dual Resistance peice eva Cas Protection Maximum Element e Locked a e Power Bech GRUNDFOS Fuse Rotor Factor Blac Red Yel A ER PART NO 82 4119H 82 9915H3 82 9915H6 iE E iea K K 82 4123H 82 9117H3 82 9117H6 82 9118H3 82 9118H3 82 9118H6 82 9116H3 1 K58 1 K43 1 K64 1 K54 1500 82 9916H65 K68 1 K58 2 K74 K63 2 5 K77 82 9119H3 2 K67 82 9119H6 3 K83 2 K72 3 K86 2 5 K74 3 5 5 0 26 0 86 0 21 0 67 0 16 0 55 82 9120H3 82 9120H6 82 9121H3 82 9121H6 82 3228H 82 3229H 82 3230H 8 Inch Motors OOOHESESCEKIEI s pjepepeeje ee o p jepepm ow mom mem om or jepepe e mem ee e GEESS EES DDCDNECRICRCI EG EE jew m m wn on ces e ow ees cm mem eme 10 000 82 3270H 10 000 82 3271H 10 000 82 3272H 10 000 82 3274H 10 000 82 3275H 10 Inch Motors eps exem
111. 48 61 650 13 00 Fax 48 61 650 13 50 Portugal Bombas GRUNDFOS Portugal S A Rua Calvet de Magalh es 241 Apartado 1079 P 2770 153 Pago de Arcos Tel 351 21 440 76 00 Telefax 351 21 440 76 90 Rom nia GRUNDFOS Pompe Rom nia SRL Bd Biruintei nr 103 Pantelimon county Ilfov Phone 40 21 200 4100 Telefax 40 21 200 4101 E mail romania grundfos ro Russia OOO l pyHndoc Poccua 109544 Mocksa yn WkonbHaa 39 Ten 7 495 737 30 00 564 88 00 akc 7 495 737 75 36 564 88 11 E mail grundfos moscow grundfos com Serbia GRUNDFOS Predstavni tvo Beograd Dr Milutina Ivkovi a 2a 29 YU 11000 Beograd Phone 381 11 26 47 877 11 26 47 496 Telefax 381 11 26 48 340 Singapore GRUNDFOS Singapore Pte Ltd 24 Tuas West Road Jurong Town Singapore 638381 Phone 65 6865 1222 Telefax 65 6861 8402 Slovenia GRUNDFOS PUMPEN VERTRIEB Ges m b H Podruznica Ljubljana Blatnica 1 SI 1236 Trzin Phone 386 01 568 0610 Telefax 386 01 568 0619 E mail slovenia grundfos si South Africa Grundfos Alldos Dosing amp Disinfection ALLDOS Pty LTD 98 Matroosberg Road Waterkloof Park P O Box 36505 Menlo Park 0102 0181 ZA Pretoria E mail alldos za alldos com Spain Bombas GRUNDFOS Espana S A Camino de la Fuentecilla s n E 28110 Algete Madrid Tel 34 91 848 8800 Telefax 34 91 628 0465 Sweden GRUNDFOS AB Box 333 Lunnagardsgatan 6 431 24 M lndal Tel 46 0 771 3
112. 5 Mount the system 6 Establish a serial connection to the controller See the chapter Connect to the Controller Via the Serial Port 7 For 1769 L32E and 1769 L35E controllers only assign an IP address 8 Make additional network connections See the section Communicate Over Networks 9 Install the EDS files 10 Load the controller firmware Additional Resources For more information consult these publications e 1769 L31 CompactLogix Controller Installation Instructions publication 1769 IN069 e 1769 L32C L35CR CompactLogix Controllers Installation Instructions publication 1769 IN070 e 1769 L32E L35E CompactLogix Controllers Installation Instructions publication 1769 IN020 Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 Introduction Connect to the Controller Via the Serial Port Chapter 2 Connect to the Controller Via the Serial Port This chapter describes how to connect to the controller via the serial port so you can configure the controller and upload or download a project to the controller Topic Page Connect to the Controller Via the Serial Port 15 Configure the Serial Driver 17 select the Controller Path 19 Additional Resources 20 For the CompactLogix controller to operate on a serial network you need e a workstation with a serial port e RSLinx software to configure the serial communication driver e RSLogix5000 programming software to configure the serial port of the controller C
113. 5 5 10 2 0 es DDI 13 8 4 2 8 DDI 20 3 2 8 Deaeration valve open Pumps with Plus system are delivered with a special start up device Maximum suction lift continuous operation for non degassing media with a viscosity similar to water Operating conditions version Slow mode Pump type Normal operation ion Weide SCH we m m m m m DDI 0 4 10 Flooded suction Flooded suction 1 5 1 5 DDI 2 2 16 4 6 1 5 1 5 DDI 2 5 10 4 6 1 5 1 5 DDI 5 5 10 4 6 1 5 1 5 DDI 13 8 4 3 3 DDI 20 3 3 3 Dosing head and valves moistened 1 3 6 Sound pressure level 45 dB A testing according to DIN 45635 01 KL3 At dosing capacities up to 10 of the maximum dosing capacity of the pump resonance noise may temporarily occur at the stepper motor 1 3 7 Enclosure class The enclosure class is only met if the sockets are protected The data regarding the enclosure class applies to pumps with correctly inserted plugs or screwed on caps e Pump with mains plug IP65 e Pump without mains plug IP65 can only be ensured if the power supply cable is connected with IP65 protection 1 3 8 Required energy Power supply for AC voltage e Rated voltage range 110 240 V Deviation from the rated value 10 e Mains frequency 50 60 Hz e Maximum input power 20 W including all sensors reduced input power according to pump type and connected sensors 24 V DC power supply e Supply voltage 24 V
114. 6 1 563 5338 Telefax 386 1 563 2098 E mail slovenia grundfos si South Africa Grundfos Alldos Dosing amp Disinfection ALLDOS Pty LTD 98 Matroosberg Road Waterkloof Park P O Box 36505 Menlo Park 0102 0181 ZA Pretoria E mail alldos za alldos com Spain Bombas GRUNDFOS Espa a S A Camino de la Fuentecilla s n E 28110 Algete Madrid Tel 34 91 848 8800 Telefax 34 91 628 0465 Sweden GRUNDFOS AB Box 333 Lunnag rdsgatan 6 431 24 M lndal Tel 46 0 771 32 23 00 Telefax 46 0 31 331 94 60 Switzerland Grundfos Alldos Dosing amp Disinfection ALLDOS International AG Sch nmattstra e 4 CH 4153 Reinach Tel 41 61 717 5555 Telefax 41 61 717 5500 E mail alldos ch alldos com Switzerland GRUNDFOS Pumpen AG Bruggacherstrasse 10 CH 8117 F llanden ZH Tel 41 1 806 8111 Telefax 41 1 806 8115 Taiwan GRUNDFOS Pumps Taiwan Ltd 7 Floor 219 Min Chuan Road Taichung Taiwan R O C Phone 886 4 2305 0868 Telefax 886 4 2305 0878 Thailand GRUNDFOS Thailand Ltd 92 Chaloem Phrakiat Rama 9 Road Dokmai Pravej Bangkok 10250 Phone 66 2 725 8999 Telefax 66 2 725 8998 Turkey GRUNDFOS POMPA San ve Tic Ltd Sti Gebze Organize Sanayi B lgesi Ihsan dede Caddesi 2 yol 200 Sokak No 204 41490 Gebze Kocaeli Phone 90 262 679 7979 Telefax 90 262 679 7905 E mail satis grundfos com Ukraine TOB lPYHAOOC YKPAIHA 01010 Kuis Byn MockoBcbka 86 Ten
115. 69 L35CR Logix5000 Controllers Quick Start 1756 05001 EtherNet IP Communication Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual ENET UMO01 ControlNet Communication Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual CNET UM001 To view or download these publications go to http literature rockwellautomation com To obtain a hard copy contact your Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative Publication 1769 UM001F EN P January 2007 10 Notes Publication 1769 UM001F EN P January 2007 Chapter 1 1769 CompactLogix Controllers Overview Introduction This chapter introduces the 1769 CompactLogix controllers These controllers offer state of the art control communications and I O elements in a distributed control package About the CompactLogix The CompactLogix controller offers state of the art control communications and I O elements in a distributed control package Controllers Topic Page Design a CompactLogix System 13 Install Hardware 14 CompactLogix Controller and 1769 I O Modules CompactLogix Controller at e 1769 1 0 Modules Connected to the CompactLogix Controller For a more flexible system use e multiple controllers in a single chassis e multiple controllers joined across networks e I O in multiple platforms that is distributed in many locations and connected over multiple I O links Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 12 1769 CompactLogix Controll
116. 691 Finland OY GRUNDFOS Pumput AB Mestarintie 11 FIN 01730 Vantaa Phone 358 3066 5650 Telefax 358 3066 56550 France Grundfos Alldos Dosing amp Disinfection ALLDOS S A R L 7 rue Gutenberg F 67610 La Wantzenau T l 33 3 88 59 26 26 T l copie 33 3 88 59 26 00 E mail alldos fr alldos com France Pompes GRUNDFOS Distribution S A Parc d Activit s de Chesnes 57 rue de Malacombe F 38290 St Quentin Fallavier Lyon T l 33 4 74 82 15 15 T l copie 33 4 74 94 10 51 Germany Grundfos Alldos Dosing amp Disinfection ALLDOS Eichler GmbH Reetzstrake 85 D 76327 Pfinztal S llingen Tel 49 7240 61 0 Telefax 49 7240 61 177 E mail alldos de alldos com Germany GRUNDFOS GMBH Schl terstr 33 D 40699 Erkrath Tel 49 0 211 929 69 0 Telefax 49 0 211 929 69 3799 E mail infoservice grundfos de Service in Deutschland E mail kundendienst grundfos de Greece GRUNDFOS Hellas A E B E 20th km Athinon Markopoulou Av P O Box 71 GR 19002 Peania Phone 0030 210 66 83 400 Telefax 0030 210 66 46 273 Hong Kong GRUNDFOS Pumps Hong Kong Ltd Unit 1 Ground floor Siu Wai Industrial Centre 29 33 Wing Hong Street amp 68 King Lam Street Cheung Sha Wan Kowloon Phone 852 27861706 27861741 Telefax 852 27858664 Hungary GRUNDFOS Hungaria Kft Park u 8 H 2045 T r kb lint Phone 36 23 511 110 Telefax 436 23 511 111 India GRUNDFOS Pumps India Pri
117. 7 lbs 7 lbs 7 lbs 10 Ibs 10 Ibs 10 Ibs 10 Ibs 10 Ibs 10 Ibs 10 Ibs 10 Ibs 10 Ibs NR not rated Cartridge Care Cartridge Cleaning Instructions Hurricane cartridges are made of Polyester Plus a proprietary blend of polyester fibers which can be cleaned in most applications and micron ratings to make Hurricane filter elements reusable For best results follow the directions described below When Cartridge Cleaning is Possible Clean cartridge when pressure differential is 12 psi above startup differential Non cleanable Applications Replace cartridge when pressure differential is 30 psi above start up differential or when flow has diminished to an unacceptable level indicating cartridge is at capacity Cartridge Removal To remove filter cartridge drain filter housing Remove wing nuts and lid Hold cross bar in retainer nut and pull upward to remove filter cartridge and top plate from filter housing Follow cleaning instructions described herein Lid Replacement Replace wing nuts system atically rotating around filter Finger tight is normally suf ficient However in extreme duty applications it may be necessary to tighten to 75 inch lbs of torque Over tightening can cause dam age to the rim gasket Model A Height B Width C Diameter D Inlet HUR 40 HP 19 1 2 14 5 8 13 12 3 4 HUR 90 HP 29 7 8 14 5 8 13 17 3 4 HUR170HP 40 1 2 14 5 8
118. 8 1 2 Threaded Rp 1 4 female Threaded 1 4 NPT female Threaded 1 2 NPT male Tube 6 12 mm cementing d 12 mm Tube 13 20 mm cementing d 25 mm Valve type 1 Standard Spring loaded 0 05 bar suction opening pressure 0 05 bar discharge opening pressure Spring loaded 0 05 bar suction opening pressure 0 8 bar discharge opening pressure Spring loaded discharge side only 0 8 bar opening pressure 4 3 General description The DDI 209 is a dosing pump with a stepper motor and electronic power control The pump is operated via the diagonal or horizontal display in a user friendly menu structure The DDI 209 is available in various versions See also section 7 General information In the general description a distinction is made between pumps with dosing heads with the following manual deaeration standard features e Plus diaph system ragm leakage detection 4 3 1 DDI 209 with manual deaeration Fig 2 DDI 209 with manual deaeration Pos 3a 3b 2a V Components Suction valve Discharge valve Dosing head with manual deaeration Connection for deaeration line Deaeration screw for manual deaeration Option The pump can also be equipped with the following Flow Monitor
119. 9 E mail infoservice grundfos de Service in Deutschland E mail kundendienst grundfos de Greece GRUNDFOS Hellas A E B E 20th km Athinon Markopoulou Av P O Box 71 GR 19002 Peania Phone 0030 210 66 83 400 Telefax 0030 210 66 46 273 Hong Kong GRUNDFOS Pumps Hong Kong Ltd Unit 1 Ground floor Siu Wai Industrial Centre 29 33 Wing Hong Street amp 68 King Lam Street Cheung Sha Wan Kowloon Phone 852 27861 706 27861741 Telefax 852 27858664 Hungary GRUNDFOS Hungaria Kft Park u 8 H 2045 T r kb lint Phone 436 23 511 110 Telefax 36 23 511 111 India GRUNDFOS Pumps India Private Limited 118 Old Mahabalipuram Road Thoraipakkam Chennai 600 096 Phone 91 44 2496 6800 Indonesia PT GRUNDFOS Pompa Jl Rawa Sumur III Blok III CC 1 Kawasan Industri Pulogadung Jakarta 13930 Phone 62 21 460 6909 Telefax 62 21 460 6910 460 6901 Ireland GRUNDFOS Ireland Ltd Unit A Merrywell Business Park Ballymount Road Lower Dublin 12 Phone 353 1 4089 800 Telefax 353 1 4089 830 Italy GRUNDFOS Pompe Italia S r l Via Gran Sasso 4 L 20060 Truccazzano Milano Tel 39 02 95838112 Telefax 39 02 95309290 95838461 Japan GRUNDFOS Pumps K K Gotanda Metalion Bldg 5F 5 21 15 Higashi gotanda Shiagawa ku Tokyo 141 0022 Japan Phone 81 35 448 1391 Telefax 81 35 448 9619 Korea GRUNDFOS Pumps Korea Ltd 6th Floor Aju Building 679 5 Yeoksam dong Kangnam ku
120. 9 9 Current signal control 0 20 mA 4 20 mA 37 9 5 Second function level 9 5 1 Opening exiting the second function level Open the second function level e to set the access code to enable or disable functions such as Flow Monitor or memory toenter settings for operating modes such as batch mode todisplay the total number of operating hours and total dosing capacity e to carry out a calibration or e to modify the assignment between the current input output and dosing rate This function level can only be opened when the pump is stopped LED lights up red 9 5 2 Setting the access code The access code is used to protect the pump against unintentional unauthorised access to pump settings The default setting is 111 Code 111 gives access to all settings described in sections 9 4 First function level and 9 5 Second function level The Start Stop i button for stopping the pump is active with any code 1 Press the Start Stop button while the pump is running LED lights up green The pump is stopped LED lights up red 2 Press and hold down the Menu Info button for 3 seconds The second function level is opened The input arrow appears in the display C 111 default setting is 111 or a user defined code appears in the display 3 Use the Up and Down buttons to set the code in the range between 1 and 999 Code 111 is required to open the second function level
121. Branco 630 CEP 09850 300 Sao Bernardo do Campo SP Phone 55 11 4393 5533 Telefax 55 11 4343 5015 Bulgaria GRUNDFOS Pumpen Vertrieb Representative Office Bulgaria Bulgaria 1421 Sofia Lozenetz District 105 107 Arsenalski blvd Phone 359 2963 3820 2963 5653 Telefax 359 2963 1305 Canada GRUNDFOS Canada Inc 2941 Brighton Road Oakville Ontario L6H 6C9 Phone 1 905 829 9533 Telefax 1 905 829 9512 China Grundfos Alldos Dosing amp Disinfection ALLDOS Shanghai Water Technology Co Ltd West Unit 1 Floor No 2 Building T 4 2 278 Jinhu Road Jin Qiao Export Processing Zone Pudong New Area Shanghai 201206 Phone 86 21 5055 1012 Telefax 86 21 5032 0596 E mail alldos cn alldos com China GRUNDFOS Pumps Shanghai Co Ltd 22 Floor Xin Hua Lian Building 755 775 Huai Hai Rd M Shanghai 200020 PRC Phone 86 512 67 61 11 80 Telefax 86 512 67 61 81 67 Croatia GRUNDFOS predstavnistvo Zagreb Cebini 37 Buzin HR 10010 Zagreb Phone 385 1 6595 400 Telefax 385 1 6595 499 Czech Republic GRUNDFOS s r o Capkovsk ho 21 779 00 Olomouc Phone 420 585 716 111 Telefax 420 585 716 299 Denmark GRUNDFOS DK A S Martin Bachs Vej 3 DK 8850 Bjerringbro TIf 45 87 50 50 50 Telefax 45 87 50 51 51 E mail info_GDK grundfos com www grundfos com DK Estonia GRUNDFOS Pumps Eesti OU Peterburi tee 92G 11415 Tallinn Tel 372 606 1690 Fax 372 606 1
122. CA ALMERE Tel 31 88 478 6336 Telefax 31 88 478 6332 e mail info gnl ggrundfos com New Zealand GRUNDFOS Pumps NZ Ltd 17 Beatrice Tinsley Crescent North Harbour Industrial Estate Albany Auckland Phone 64 9 415 3240 Telefax 64 9 415 3250 Norway GRUNDFOS Pumper A S Stromsveien 344 Postboks 235 Leirdal N 1011 Oslo TIf 47 22 90 47 00 Telefax 47 22 32 21 50 Poland GRUNDFOS Pompy Sp z o o ul Klonowa 23 Baranowo k Poznania PL 62 081 Przezmierowo Tel 448 61 650 13 00 Fax 48 61 650 13 50 Portugal Bombas GRUNDFOS Portugal S A Rua Calvet de Magalh es 241 Apartado 1079 P 2770 153 Pago de Arcos Tel 351 21 440 76 00 Telefax 351 21 440 76 90 Rom nia GRUNDFOS Pompe Rom nia SRL Bd Biruintei nr 103 Pantelimon county Ilfov Phone 40 21 200 4100 Telefax 40 21 200 4101 E mail romania grundfos ro Russia OOO Tpvnpdhoc Poccna 109544 Mocksa yn WkonbHaa 39 Ten 7 495 737 30 00 564 88 00 akc 7 495 737 75 36 564 88 11 E mail grundfos moscow grundfos com Serbia GRUNDFOS Predstavni tvo Beograd Dr Milutina Ivkovi a 2a 29 YU 11000 Beograd Phone 381 11 26 47 877 11 26 47 496 Telefax 381 11 26 48 340 Singapore GRUNDFOS Singapore Pte Ltd 24 Tuas West Road Jurong Town Singapore 638381 Phone 65 6865 1222 Telefax 65 6861 8402 Slovenia GRUNDFOS PUMPEN VERTRIEB Ges m b H Podru nica Ljubljana Blatnica 1 SI 1236 Trzin Phone 38
123. Check with Grundfos Alldos specification Rinse or replace the suction line Suspend the suction line from a higher position Install the suction line correctly Check for damage Clean the valves Replace the diaphragm Fill the dosing tank Fill the dosing head and suction line Check the installation Clean the valves Assemble the inner valve parts in the right order and check or possibly correct the flow direction Check and possibly correct the flow direction or remove the obstruction Check the lines for free passage and correct installation Fill the dosing tank Replace sealing elements 67 Fault 4 Dosing flow of the pump is inaccurate Cause Dosing head not fully deaerated Remedy Repeat the deaeration b Degassing medium Check the installation c Parts of the valves covered in dirt or Clean the valves incrusted d Counter pressure fluctuations Install a pressure loading valve anda pulsation damper if necessary e Suction lift fluctuations Keep the suction level constant f Siphon effect inlet pressure higher Install a pressure loading valve than counter pressure g Leaking or porous suction line or Replace the suction line or discharge discharge line line h Parts in contact with the medium are Replace with resistant materials not resistant to it i Dosing diaphragm worn incipient Replace the diaphragm Also observe tears the maintenance instruct
124. Clear the buffer Clear out ASCII Serial Port instructions that are currently executing or are in the queue Obtain the status of the serial port control lines Turn on or off the DTR signal Turn on or off the RTS signal Read a fixed number of characters Read a varying number of characters up to and including the first set of termination characters send characters and automatically append one or two additional characters to mark the end of the data send characters Create and Modify Strings of ASCII Characters Instruction Code CONCAT DELETE FIND INSERT MID Description Add characters to the end of a string Delete characters from a string Determine the starting character of a substring Insert characters into a string Extract characters from a string Convert Data to or from ASCII Characters Instruction Code STOD STOR DTOS RTOS UPPER LOWER Description Convert the ASCII representation of an integer value to a SINT INT DINT or REAL value Convert the ASCII representation of a floating point value to a REAL value Convert a SINT INT DINT or REAL value to a string of ASCII characters Convert a REAL value to a string of ASCII characters Convert the letters in a string of ASCII characters to upper case Convert the letters in a string of ASCII characters to lower case Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 38 Communicate Over Networks Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 Modbus
125. D lights up green and Run appears in the display Use the Start Stop button to start or stop the pump 4 20 mA current signal control If the current input signal falls below 2 mA the error relay is switched as an error has probably occurred at the signal source or on the cable The error signal relay switches on The LED flashes red 4 20 mA and ERROR flash in the display TMO03 6605 4506 Fig 49 Display 4 20 mA current signal control 47 The assignment between the current signal and flow rate is linear With 0 20 mA current signal control the curve for current input and current output passes through Q 0 at 0 mA and the value pair Qmax Qca at 20 mA curve 1a With 4 20 mA current signal control the curve for current input and current output passes through Q 0 at 4 mA and the value pair Qmax Qeai at 20 mA curve 2a With manual or contact control the curve for current output passes through Q 0 at 4 mA and the value pair Qmax Qcai at 20 mA curve 2a The default setting for Qmax is the maximum dosing flow at default calibration at 3 bar 48 Q l h lin lout 0 20 MA 10 I h lin 4 20 mA lout 4 20 mA manual 8 l h contact 6 I h 4 Uh 2 Wh 0 0 mA 4 mA 8 mA Fig 50 Current input and current output with default setting 12 mA 16 mA Qmnax defau It Qcai 20 mA lin mA TMO03 6606 4506 9 9 1 Direct weighting of the current signal input and output
126. Dosing capacity curves Values are approximate values and do not take into consideration deviations due to construction tolerance according to VDMA 24284 43 9 6 2 Flow Monitor In order for the pressure sensor if installed to function as a dosing controller the dosing controller must be switched on see section 9 70 Flow Monitor 9 6 3 Memory function The memory function is used to store excess contact signals for processing later see section 9 2 7 Memory function e Switch the memory function on off with Up Down Press the Menu Info button confirm the setting and move on to the next menu item or press the Start Stop button confirm the setting and close the second function level 9 6 4 Weighting of current input output In current input output operation the dosing capacity is controlled via the current signal The pump emits a current signal as a feedback for control rooms or master slave applications For weighting of current input output see also 9 9 Current signal control 0 20 mA 4 20 mA 9 6 5 Batch menu batch mode In batch mode a defined batch quantity is dosed with a defined dosing flow See section 9 17 Batch menu batch mode 9 6 6 Timer menu timer mode In timer mode a defined batch quantity is dosed with a defined dosing flow and a defined start time See section 9 12 Timer menu timer mode 9 6 7 PROFIBUS menu The PROFIBUS menu item is only displayed for
127. Fig 15 Removing the floater stopper part 1 4 Remove the floater stopper C from the fittings for instance using a pair of tweezers TMO3 5866 1106 TMO3 5867 1106 Fig 16 Removing the floater stopper part 2 5 Screw the valve Q2 into the fittings 6 Screw the adjusting spindle Q1 into the valve Q2 7 Open the water supply to the measuring cell and set the desired water flow rate with the adjusting spindle Q2 14 12 4 Preparing the electrode cable for connection to the measuring amplifier The preassembled systems are prewired Warning The electrical connection should be carried out by qualified personnel Observe the local safety regulations Protect the cable connections and plugs against corrosion and humidity Cables for single rod electrodes or electrodes A1 A2 B1 1 Cut the electrode cables to the desired length approximately 80 mm for the connections N Remove 80 mm of the outer insulation Disentangle the braided screen until you reach the next part of the insulation and twist it to form a wire OO 4 Strip the braided screen for instance using a shrink tube and fit a wire end ferrule 5 Remove the black conductive sheath of the insulated electrode wire until you reach the insulation 6 Fit a wire end ferrule to the electrode wire Insulated braided screen 70 Tn ae TMO03 5868 1
128. GRUNDFOS Za ALLDOS COnrIX Water Systems SECTION 9 3 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION amp CONTROLS Section 9 3 Process Instrumentation amp Controls 9 3 14 Chlorine Analyzer Grundfos Model Grundfos Conex DIA 2 Tag AIT 316 ve Get bate ct LASS BATAAN GEA AT ANE E TST SL A HUNT OE NU RESELLERS OE EAN EA EES AUN ES AD a2 rA e ERAN GPE ASSEL ENEE REESEN ELAN SATEEN GERI SMALE ETT TEU A ANEW NY MAMANS KA KAVAND TANA TNA OP eener SCANNERS BRT EE gel a Us EERO SEA RTI RANE Be VAP ICH PA NN ITA RI ATE Eb eod e e BONS ER ANE AYRE EI HITE SS SG CEN EEN AE RE nter ALLDOS GRUNDFOS GRUNDFOS 7 Z ions DIA X truct CONE GRUNDFOS ALLDOS INSTRUCTIONS ing ins Installation and operat b lt e gt lt 0 c O O BE gt THINK gt INNOVATE gt Declaration of Conformity We Grundfos Alldos declare under our sole responsibility that the product Conex DIA 2 to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the Council Directives on the approximation of the laws of the EC Member States relating to Electromagnetic compatibility 89 336 EEC Standards used EN 61000 3 2 1995 A1 A2 1998 EN 61000 3 3 1995 EN 61326 1997 A1 1998 A2 2001 Class B EN 61326 1997 A1 1998 A2 2001 Electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits 73 23 EEC 95 Standard used EN 61010 1 2002 Pfinztal 15th April 2008 W Schwald Ul
129. H202 and pH and for controlling these variables using appropriate actuators within the applications described in this manual Warning Other applications are not approved and not permitted Grundfos Alldos cannot be held liable for any damage resulting from incorrect use 8 Safety 8 1 Obligations of the owner operations manager The owner operations manager must ensure that persons working with the Conex DIA 2 instrument amplifier and controller fulfil these requirements They are acquainted with the regulations concerning working safety and accident prevention They have been trained in use of the device They have read and understood the warning information and handling symbols The owner operations manager is also responsible for ensuring that this manual is kept in the immediate vicinity of the device and is always available for the operating personnel 8 2 Avoidance of danger Warning Installation and connection of the device and the associated supplementary components must only be carried out by authorised personnel The local safety regulations must be observed Warning Switch off the power supply before connecting the power supply cable and relay contacts Do not dismantle the device Maintenance and repair must only be carried out by authorised personnel The mounting location must be selected so that the housing is not subjected to mechanical loading Check that all settings are c
130. I and evacuation spindle J Assemble and screw in the filter cartridge P Insert the float body N with the sharp end facing downwards into the measuring tube M Tightly screw in the valve insert Q2 and screw in the adjusting spindle Q1 Screw in the screw plug R and the deaeration spindle R1 the plug under the screw plug must be inserted 2 Screw the flow armature onto the unit Hook the flow armature F onto the screws of the mounting plate and pull it downwards Screw in the screws of the flow armature F The measuring cell breaks when the screws are tightened Do not tighten the screws only screw them in without tightening them 3 Screw in the cleaning motor and measuring electrode Fit the cleaning wing X and inlet chamber W with both O rings W1 on the measuring electrode Place the cleaning wing X with the larger surface area downwards Rotate the inlet chamber W until it engages with the electrode in the defined position Screw the cleaning motor G and the screwed part H with the slide G1 onto the flow armature F DULL G1 TMO3 5881 1106 Fig 30 Exploded view of screwed part inlet chamber s PIE A12 B1
131. ION 1 Pump must be installed in a suitable gas tight basin which is at least 18 in diameter and 24 deep and vented in accor dance with local plumbing codes 2 Pump features a 11 female NPT discharge 3 Pump must be placed on a hard level surface Never place pump directly on clay earth or gravel surfaces 4 A check valve must be used in the discharge line to prevent back flow of liquid into the basin The check valve should bea free flow valve that will easily pass solids CAUTION For best performance of check valves when han dling solids install in a horizontal position or at an angle of no more than 45 degrees Do not install check valve in a vertical position as solids may settle in valve and prevent opening on start up 5 Do not attempt to restrict the intake side of these pumps Restricting the intake may cause damage to the seal and may starve the pump If you require reduced flow rates then place valve on the discharge side of the pump or if flexible vinyl tubing is used a clamp can be used on the tubing to restrict the flow 2 6 Do not let the unit run dry without liquid It is designed to be cooled by pumping fluid You may damage the seal and the motor may fail if the pump is allowed to run dry 7 If the unit is going to be idle for a period of time follow the cleaning instructions outlined in the next section Do not let the unit freeze in the wintertime This may cause cracking or dis
132. ION MANUAL an HARMSCO MAURA ICANE FILTERS HARMSCO Hurricane Filters provide exceptionally long filter runs reduced maintenance and lower filtration costs when used as combination centrifugal separator and cartridge filter or in conventional filtration applications HOW THEY WORK Up flow Cartridge Filtration and Angled Pleats for Lightweight Particle Removal Trapped air is automatically purged due to principal of up flow filtration Filtered liquid exits the filter at the highest point as it is filtered A secure top plate prevents cross contamination of filtered and unfiltered liquid This patented up flow design alows Harmsco to utilize 10096 of cartridge surface area providing efficient filtration Filter efficiencies are dramatically improved to provide longer filter runs and reduced filtration costs Harmsco Hurricane filter cartridges for the Waterbetter filters are available in a wide range of micron ratings and may be cleaned and re used in most applications and most micron ratings Centrifugal Separation to Remove Dense Particles from Liquids Liquid enters the Hurricane filter s outer cham ber tangentially producing a rotational flow This flow pattern creates a centrifugal force which is used to separate dense particles such as sand rust grit and metal fines from liquids Heavy particles drop to the bottom of the filter s outer chamber where they are discharged manually automatically or continuousl
133. IP or ControlNet network to the DeviceNet network CompactLogix Linking Device Overview o ui ControlLogix Controller with 1756 ENBT Module Geng EtherNet IP Network CompactLogix Controller with Built in EtherNet IP Communication Port mmm TTT 1788 EN2DN Linking Device DeviceNet Network Personal Computer Js 0000 LES es DES e 0000 CompactLogix System I br Sensor with 1769 ADN I LL LIN Motor Ai DeviceNet Adapter jm Starter E uster l Bar Code Input Output pe Indicator Scanner Devices PowerFlex Lights AC Drive Additional Resources For additional information consult these publications e DeviceNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication DNET UM004 e Logix5000 Controllers Design Considerations Reference Manual publication 1756 RM094 Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 Communicate Over Networks 31 Serial Communications CompactLogix controllers have a built in RS 232
134. If three transformers are present the system is true three phase Make sure the transformer ratings in kilovolt amps KVA is sufficient for the motor load See Table C The percentage of current unbalance can be calculated by using the following formulas and procedures Total of current values measured Average current on each leg 3 Greatest amp difference from Current unbalance the average X 100 average current To determine the percentage of current unbalance A Measure and record current readings in amps for each leg hookup 1 Disconnect power B Shift or roll the motor leads from left to right so the drop cable lead that was on terminal 1 is now on 2 lead on 2 is now on 3 and lead on 3 is now on 1 hookup 2 Rolling the motor leads in this manner will not reverse the motor rotation Start the pump measure and record current reading on each leg Disconnect power C Again shift drop cable leads from left to right so the lead on terminal 1 goes to 2 2 to 3 and 3 to 1 hookup 3 Start pump measure and record current reading on each leg Disconnect power Add the values for each hookup Divide the total by 3 to obtain the average Compare each single leg reading from the average to obtain the greatest amp difference from the average G Divide this difference by the average to obtain the percentage of unbalance UTE OZ Use the wiring hookup which provides the lowest percentage of unbalance See Table F
135. In RSLogix 5000 programming software right click your controller and select Properties Su Backplane Compact oc 1769 L35 Contre 9 CompactB 8 oc 8 ui 2119 9 20 RR Jescription Samp fajor Fault finor Fault Properties Alt Enter i The Controller Properties dialog appears f Controller Properties Example for 1769 ASCII Module E Date Time Advanced SFC Execution File Nonvolatile Memory Memory General Serial Pot System Protocol User Protocol Major Faults Minor Faults Mode Baud Rate a00 si Data Bits HEH Parity Even e Stop Bits 1 ox Control Line No Handshake d ATS Gerd Delay 0 x20 ms RTS Off Delay 0 x20 ms DCD Wait Delay x1 sec 2 Click the Serial Port tab Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 Communicate Over Networks 35 3 From the Mode pull down menu choose System 4 Specify communication settings 5 Click the System Protocol tab is Controller Properties Example for 1769 ASCII Module Date Time Advanced SFC Execution File Monvolatile Memory Memory General Serial Port System Protocol User Protocol Major Faults Minor Faults Error Detection Protocal pr c CRC Station Address 0 MAK Receive Limit 3 ENG Transmit Lirit 3 ACE Timeout 50 xz ms Embedded Responses Autodetect W Enable Duplicate Detection 6 From the Protocol pull down menu choose a DF1 protoc
136. Indicators e 108 EtherNet IP LED Indhcatorg a 109 Module Status MS LED Indicator 109 Network Status NS LED Indicator ss 109 Link Status LNK LED Indicator liess 110 Appendix C IFaiiro SIUE STER CE TOT T TETTE TT Itt TERTIUM 111 MOS TOES eerte avoided eit o bd tarum bdo dat df d ol eie tor 112 Rolinx Tas ODDUPmiIZatiOl uo 624 racc gea am go end e ed ee v 112 RISO EEN 113 ibi OPC TOP E d EE E E ge eer 113 Specify Connections per PLC os vec tied ss koe hed o 113 Number of Connections Needed to Optimize Throughput 443 4453 6464702224 bak be Ss 115 View the Number of Open Connections 115 Index Rockwell Automation SUDDOFL i i sie Ad 124 Installation ASSAN E uuu Sas we E ote CRUS de RE 124 New Product Satisfaction Return liess 124 Additional Information Introduction Preface Use this manual to become familiar with the CompactLogix controller and its features This manual corresponds to controller firmware revision 16 This manual describes the necessary tasks to install configure program and operate a CompactLogix system In some cases this manual includes references to additional documentation that provides the more comprehensive details These documents address Logix5000 products 1769 131 1769 L32E 1769 L35CR and 1769 L35E 1769 L31 1769 L32C 1769 L32E 1769 L35CR and 1769 L35E 1769 L32E and 1769 L35E 1769 L32C and 17
137. N is in the middle of the measuring tube M When using a water sensor O optional In order for the water sensor O to work the float body N must be at the height of the water sensor O Measuring cell with floater stopper default upon delivery If the sample water flow rate is set too high or is increased temporarily no alarm is triggered and the control output remains active If the sample water flow rate is set too high or is increased temporarily there is a risk that the sample water will overflow at the overflow mechanism In this state no alarm is triggered and the control output remains active Measuring cell without floater stopper see section 12 3 1 Removing the floater stopper If the sample water flow rate is too high the float body N will move outside of the detection range of the water sensor O In this state an alarm is triggered via the connected measuring amplifier and the control output is switched off if necessary The flow rate is set correctly if the float body N is at the height of the water sensor O By increasing the sample water flow rate the delay time of the flow armature can be reduced 13 3 Switching off To avoid a dosing error the device controlled for instance a gas dosing unit or dosing pump must be switched off each time the measuring system is switched off Observe the installation and operating instructions of the measuring amplifier and device controlled 1
138. O NC input 6 NO or 6 NC appears in the display Run and Stop flash in the display Use the Up and Down buttons to switch between 6 NO Remote off normally open contact and 6 NC Remote off normally closed contact Press the Menu Info button confirm the setting and move on to the next menu item or press the Start Stop button confirm the setting and close the service level 7 Locking run on off The locking of the Start Stop button to prevent manual stopping of the pump can be enabled and disabled The display indicates 7 ON or 7 OFF the Run symbol is displayed Use the Up and Down buttons to switch between T ON Locking run on and 7 OFF Locking run off Press the Menu Info button confirm the setting and move on to the next menu item or press the Start Stop button confirm the setting and close the service level P CAL on off only for Flow Monitor CAL ON or CAL OFF appears in the display CAL appears Use the Up and Down buttons to switch between CAL ON Calibration of the pressure sensor for the Flow Monitor enabled and CAL OFF Calibration of the pressure sensor for the Flow Monitor disabled For calibration see section 9 10 7 Calibrating the sensor after the sensor has been replaced St e g 60 only for Flow Monitor Use the Up and Down buttons to set the number of er
139. ON E3B AA Jim s Pump Shop 98 High St 506 855 2178 MONCTON E1C 6B5 Harbour City Electro Mechanical Ltd 38 Bayside Dr 506 634 8314 SAINT JOHN EZ 4A5 Sunny Corner Pump Shop 53 River Rpad 506 836 7638 SUNNY CORNER E9E 1E8 Newfoundland Kean s Pump Shop 53 Pippy Place 709 726 7867 ST JOHN S A1C 5J2 Pioneer Enterprises 100 Brookfield Rd 709 364 3581 ST JOHN S A1C 52 Northwest Territories Ron s Auto Services Ltd 300 Woolgar Ave 867 873 5973 YELLOW KNIFE X1A 3B5 Nova Scotia Newport Pump Systems RR 3 902 757 2167 NEWPORT BON 2A0 island Well Drillers Ltd 118 Harvey St 902 562 3444 SYDNEY B1P 6H4 A J Walker amp Son 905 917 Prince St 902 895 4481 TRURO B2N5C7 Allswell Pumps Direct 2101D Cobequid Rd 902 860 2202 WAVERLY BON 2S0 Ontario Wallwin Electric 50 Innisfil St 705 726 1859 BARRIE L4N 4K5 Emsco Ltd 57 Cannifton Rd 613 966 3235 BELLEVILLE K8N 4V1 Busy Man Hwy 11 South R R 2 705 272 3828 COCHRANE POL 1CO The World of Pumps Ltd 1413 Cyrville Rd 613 744 3293 GLOUCESTER K1B 3L9 Murray Hydronics Ltd 178 Mary St 905 525 7344 HAMILTON L8L 3A2 Bennett s Marine Service R R 1 807 543 2163 KEEWATIN POX 1CO Bill Chapman s Pump Shop 1365 Midland Ave Unit 220 613 384 9500 KINGSTON K7P 2W5 London Pump Supply 119 Clarke Road 519 457 5519 LONDON N5W 5C9 Orser Electric 1995 Ltd 655 Harvie Sett
140. Rx10 for values over 10 ohms Zero adjust the meter and measure the resistance between leads Record the values Motor resistance values can be found in Electrical Data Table E Cable resistance values are in Table G What it Means If all the ohm values are normal and the cable colors correct the windings are not damaged If any one ohm value is less than normal the motor may be shorted If any one ohm value is greater than normal there is a poor cable connection or joint The windings or cable may also be open If some of the ohm values are greater than normal and some less the drop cable leads are mixed To verify lead colors see resistance values in Electrical Data Table E INSULATION RESISTANCE How to Measure Turn off power and disconnect the drop cable leads in the control box or starter Using an ohm or mega ohmmeter set the scale selector to Rx 100K and zero adjust the meter Measure the resistance between the lead and ground discharge pipe or well casing if steel What it Means For ohm values refer to table below Motors of all HP voltage phase and cycle duties have the same value of insulation resistance OHM VALUE 2 000 000 or more 1 000 000 or more 500 000 1 000 000 20 000 500 000 10 000 20 000 less than 10 000 0 5 1 0 0 02 0 5 0 01 0 02 0 0 01 Troubleshooting Chart Motor not yet installed 2 0 New Motor 1 0 MEGAOHM VAL
141. Start up 13 Installation of electrodes and sensors 13 Water connections 13 Floater stopper 14 Preparing the electrode cable for connection to the measuring amplifier 14 Electrical connections 15 Checks prior to start up 16 Switching on 17 Calibrating the parameters Clo CIO5 O3 17 Operation 19 Function 19 Operation 19 Switching off 20 Switching on again 20 Fault finding chart 21 Maintenance 22 Intervals for cleaning and maintenance 22 Cleaning and replacing the filter 22 Cleaning the flow armature 22 Assembling the measuring cell 23 Starting up the measuring cell 23 Spare parts and accessories 24 Electrodes sensors and cables 24 Other parts 24 Disposal 24 Warning These complete installation and operating instructions are also available on www Grundfosalldos com Prior to installation read these installation and operating instructions Installation and operation must comply with local regulations and accepted codes of good practice 1 Symbols used in this document Warning If these safety instructions are not observed it may result in personal injury If these safety instructions are not observed it may result in malfunction or damage to the equipment Caution Notes or instructions that make the job easier and ensure safe operation tf 2 Installation data Please fill in the data below after start up It will help you and your Grundfos Alldos service partner to make subsequent adjustments to the inst
142. Telefax 66 2 725 8998 Turkey GRUNDFOS POMPA San ve Tic Ltd Sti Gebze Organize Sanayi B lgesi Ihsan dede Caddesi 2 yol 200 Sokak No 204 41490 Gebze Kocaeli Phone 90 262 679 7979 Telefax 90 262 679 7905 E mail satis grundfos com Ukraine TOB lPYHAOOC YKPAIHA 01010 Kuis Byn MockoBcbka 86 Ten 38 044 390 40 50 Max 38 044 390 40 59 E mail ukraine grundfos com United Arab Emirates GRUNDFOS Gulf Distribution P O Box 16768 Jebel Ali Free Zone Dubai Phone 971 4 8815 166 Telefax 971 4 8815 136 United Kingdom Grundfos Alldos Dosing amp Disinfection ALLDOS Ltd 39 Gravelly Industrial Park Tyburn Road Birmingham B24 8TG Phone 44 121 3283336 Telefax 44 121 3284332 E mail alldos uk alldos com United Kingdom GRUNDFOS Pumps Ltd Grovebury Road Leighton Buzzard Beds LU7 8TL Phone 44 1525 850000 Telefax 44 1525 850011 U S A GRUNDFOS Pumps Corporation 17100 West 118th Terrace Olathe Kansas 66061 Phone 1 913 227 3400 Telefax 1 913 227 3500 Usbekistan l ipencraBurenbecrBo TPYHOPOC B TauikeHre 700000 Tauikeur yn YcmaHa Hocupa 1 n TynMkK 5 Teneqou 3712 55 68 15 Oakc 3712 53 36 35 Addresses revised 22 10 2008 Being responsible is our foundation BE gt THINK INNOVATE gt Thinking ahead makes it possible Innovation is the essence 15 730079 v9 0 Repl 15 730079 V8 0 96681492 1108 Repl 96681492 0908 WV www grundfosalldos com
143. These valves are available from your pump supplier It must be ensured that the foot valve remains well submerged at all times If large debris is present at the suction point install a filtration device to prevent the debris from entering the pump Thread com pound should be used on all pipe joints All connections should Fig 1 This way is allowing for a downward flow of water wh gn mee a Cette opt a ee named centi m be thoroughly tightened A leak in the suction line may prevent a complete prime and will reduce pump operating performance Figure 2 shows a typical pump installation _a et emeng N ant WRONG WAY RIGHT WAY TYPICAL INSTALLATION Fig 2 Priming Plug Discharge Pipe e Suction Pipe f Elbow Suction Pipe Concrete Well Casing Foot Valve d c DISCHARGE LINE A priming plug should be installed as shown in Figure 2 Long hose or pipe lengths add resistance to water flow which therefore reduces pumping capacity Use standard approved pipe or hose suitable for the pumping pressures which develop and use lengths only as necessary to reach the discharge point Avoid using nozzles or reduc ing fittings on the discharge line if they are not required in your application The discharge pipe or hose should be at least as large as the discharge thread opening on the pump casing If long line lengths are required increase pipe hose Size accordingly Avoid unnecessary bends
144. UE CONDITION OF MOTOR AND LEADS Used motor which can be reinstalled in the well Motor in well Ohm readings are for drop cable plus motor A motor in reasonably good condition A motor which may have been damaged by lightning or with damaged leads Do not pull the pump for this reason A motor which definitely has been damaged or with damaged cable The pump should be pulled and repairs made to the cable or the motor replaced The motor will still operate but probably not for long A motor which has failed or with completely destroyed cable insulation The pump must be pulled and the cable repaired or the motor replaced The motor will not run in this condition A Pump Does Not Run POSSIBLE CAUSES 1 No power at pump panel 2 Fuses are blown or circuit breakers are tripped 3 Motor starter overloads are burnt or have tripped out three phase only 4 Starter does not energize three phase only 5 Defective controls 6 Motor and or cable are defective T Defective capacitor single phase only Remove fuses and check for continuity with ohmmeter Check for voltage on line or load side of starter Energize control circuit and check for voltage at the holding coil Check all safety and pressure switches for operation Inspect contacts in control devices Turn off power Disconnect motor leads from control box Measure the lead to lead resistances with the ohmmeter Rx1 Measure l
145. UNDFOS Distribution S A Parc d Activit s de Chesnes 57 rue de Malacombe F 38290 St Quentin Fallavier Lyon T l 33 4 74 82 15 15 T l copie 33 4 74 94 10 51 Germany Grundfos Alldos Dosing amp Disinfection ALLDOS Eichler GmbH Reetzstrake 85 D 76327 Pfinztal S llingen Tel 49 7240 61 0 Telefax 49 7240 61 177 E mail alldos de alldos com Germany GRUNDFOS GMBH Schl terstr 33 D 40699 Erkrath Tel 49 0 211 929 69 0 Telefax 49 0 211 929 69 3799 E mail infoservice grundfos de Service in Deutschland E mail kundendienst grundfos de Greece GRUNDFOS Hellas A E B E 20th km Athinon Markopoulou Av P O Box 71 GR 19002 Peania Phone 0030 210 66 83 400 Telefax 0030 210 66 46 273 Hong Kong GRUNDFOS Pumps Hong Kong Ltd Unit 1 Ground floor Siu Wai Industrial Centre 29 33 Wing Hong Street amp 68 King Lam Street Cheung Sha Wan Kowloon Phone 852 27861 706 27861741 Telefax 852 27858664 Hungary GRUNDFOS Hungaria Kft Park u 8 H 2045 T r kb lint Phone 36 23 511 110 Telefax 36 23 511 111 India GRUNDFOS Pumps India Private Limited 118 Old Mahabalipuram Road Thoraipakkam Chennai 600 096 Phone 91 44 2496 6800 Indonesia PT GRUNDFOS Pompa Jl Rawa Sumur III Blok III CC 1 Kawasan Industri Pulogadung Jakarta 13930 Phone 62 21 460 6909 Telefax 62 21 460 6910 460 6901 Ireland GRUNDFOS Ireland Ltd Unit A Merrywell Business Park
146. a eE lies ae dene 05 Menace Lacks cc ou dae Tos Bee ewaes ee eek eben d 05 Additional Resources d es oe re we Y x Eva 65 Develop Programs 3d d mra e t e d re e tee 66 RRE EE 67 tee PIO Sas Eegeregie 69 DEC EE 69 Sample Controller Projects 34 mdp dem E REPE 70 Additional Resources e at code dera uen nen bee s d Kai EE wie Ve eet 429302 enee E Be ee d ed Zu Configure PhaseManager Maintain Nonvolatile Memory Maintain the Battery CompactLogix Controllers Specifications Table of Contents 7 Additional a a tenga aou Ge Pea gode ee Aas 71 Select a Programming Language 4422225 44 6 44 4 0444465 TZ Add E Eege Te EE 22 Additonal RESOUrCES e s saseda woke Kee daw oe E 74 Monitor Controller Status dh e aaaea 74 Accditional EE reegen Sege Fs Monitor CoOnDnectlofiss uus vari y cite Ee dt eso s 75 Determine if Device Communication Has Timed Out 76 Determine if I O Module Communication SE Ke UL 105392 tat Se VG SHE VADE MARCO S 77 Interrupt the Execution of Logic and Execute the Paulie Ee 78 EE BOSOUEGES x erte 78 select a System Overhead Time Slice Percentage 79 Chapter 7 TD OG CHO Dco 4 4 4 heme dos obitu s ila dad eee bab ded i Ede 83 Additional Resources 642 2646 dd oS oe ws SSS Ree bem d 83 About Phdse Mage 2a exo ed eed ee eee ET eee er 83 ADOUL Ite Model Joc an ard odo dpt d eae a eee a ds 85 Change Equipment Stdteso 29 244 6046 48442464 8484 86 Manually Chance SAES ua ad BAS eek Se red Se 88 C
147. ables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence ATTENTION TNA ava Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present PTT aha Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures EIN AN ES EIS AN A A Allen Bradley CompactLogix
148. afety standard of the dosing process is raised by the automatic open circuit monitoring of the current outputs Properties of the Conex DIA 2 measuring amplifier and controller include the following all control functions including PID and continuous action controls setpoint control e manual or automatic temperature compensation logbook function chronological recording of calibration values with date and time user coding function as a means of protection against access by unauthorised persons and for system administration error message function for indication of non functioning sensors 3 Installation data Please fill in the data below after commissioning It will help you and your Grundfos Alldos service partner make subsequent adjustments to the installation Owner Grundfos Alldos customer number Order number Product number Product serial number Put into service on Location of product Used for 4 Installation sketch 5 Instrument settings Parameter Chlorine _ Chlorine dioxide _ Ozone Peroxide Temp meas Yes _ No Temp comp Yes _ No pH compensation Yes _ No _ Measuring ranges mg l ppm Current output 1 mA Measuring cell Measuring cell type Cleaning motor Monitoring on Monitoring off Water sensor On Off _ Controller Setpoint contrl Interpulse Curls Pulse freq ctrl _ Cont controller _ Limit contact Dow
149. ajor Fault finor Fault Properties Alt Enter Date Time Advanced SFC Execution File Honvolatile Memory Memory General serial Part System Pratacal User Protocol Major Faults binor Faults Mode Baud Rate 4600 Data Bits z e Parity Even Stop Bits nei Control Line Me Handshake e ATS Send Delay 0 x20 ms ATS Off Delay 0 420 ms DCD wat Delay s sec 2 Click the Serial Port tab 3 From the Mode pull down menu choose User 4 Specify communication settings 5 Click the User Protocol tab ia Controller Properties Example for 1769 ASCII Module Sl Date Time Advanced SFC Execution Fie Monvolatile Memon Memory General Serial Pat System Protocol User Protocol Major Faults Minor Faults Proloco CNN RHiead write Buffer Size ne H Bytes Termination Character 1 KA a Tor Append Character 1 Ar a FF MOM ASOFF Echo Mode 6 From the Protocol pull down menu choose ASCII 7 Specify ASCII settings Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 Communicate Over Networks 37 The controller supports several instructions to manipulate ASCII characters The instructions are available in ladder diagram LD and structured text ST Read and Write ASCII Characters Instruction Code ABL ACB ACL AHL ARD ARL AWA AWT Description Determine when the buffer contains termination characters Count the characters in the buffer
150. allation Owner Grundfos Alldos customer number Order number Product number Product serial number Put into service on Location of product Used for 3 Installation sketch 4 Unit description preassembled systems TMO3 5850 1106 TMO03 5851 1106
151. alues e as input signal for another indicator e as input signal for an external controller 1 Connect the conductor to terminal 23 wall mounted enclosure or terminal 1 3 control panel enclosure 2 Connect the conductor to terminal 24 wall mounted enclosure or terminal 1 4 control panel enclosure Output 2 pH parameter 2 This current output shows the displayed measured value as an analog current signal Use of current signal for measured values e as input signal for another indicator e as input signal for an external controller 1 Connect the conductor to terminal 25 wall mounted enclosure or terminal 1 5 control panel enclosure 2 Connect the conductor to terminal 26 wall mounted enclosure or terminal 1 4 control panel enclosure Output 3 continuous controller parameter 2 or temperature Shows the calculated actuating variable signal of the controller as an analog current signal Use of actuating variable signal as input signal for a final control element with current input or temperature output Shows the temperature measured by the optional temperature sensor as an analog current signal Use of temperature current signal e as input signal for another indicator 1 Connect the conductor to terminal 27 wall mounted enclosure or terminal 1 6 control panel enclosure 2 Connect the conductor to terminal 28 wall mounted enclosure or terminal 1 7 contro
152. ame mounted pumps disconnect the coupling and bump start motor correct rotation as required and reconnect the coupling and coupling guard Do not run the pump dry see priming instructions PRIMING Ensure that the pump casing and suction piping is completely filled with liquid before starting the pump A centrifugal pump must be primed before it can operate damage will occur to close clearance rotating parts if allowed to run dry On flooded suction systems allow fluid into the pump and vent air from the plug located at the top of the casing On suction lift applications adequate means must be employed to maintain fluid in the pump casing this is usually accomplished using a suction foot valve or vacuum priming system air must be vented through the plug located at the top of the pump casing STARTING Ensure that the suction line is open and the discharge valve is closed Turn the starter on and off allowing the pump to rotate and coast to a stop if the unit stops suddenly or makes any undue noise correct the problem before proceeding At this point bring the pump up to its rated speed and slowly open the discharge valve to permit the pump to deliver its rated flow If there is any undue noise or vibration shut down the motor and correct the problem After pump has been running for some time check for bearing heat temperatures up to 175 F are acceptable providing they are stable and do not continue to rise Note Do
153. ample water flow rate is set too high or is increased temporarily there is a risk that the sample water will overflow at the overflow mechanism In this state no alarm is triggered and the control output remains active If the detection range of increased sample water flow rate is to be activated the floater stopper must be removed When the floater stopper is removed an alarm is triggered and the control output is disabled each time the sample water flow rate is increased 12 3 1 Removing the floater stopper 1 Close the water supply to the measuring cell ll Po Sa ATA N RY T i mg N BW E i SY P 8 8 e S W a 7 N LI Ed E yee S S HU N 1 Yi WV o mum XL Ef 2 MZ eo i S KZ e e a ic E Lr Fig 14 Floater stopper 2 Unscrew the adjusting spindle Q1 from the valve Q2 3 Unscrew the valve Q2 from the fittings c Co M c c co co LO LO e e eo eo Z
154. antity of sample water Check the filter and clean it if necessary Fit the cleaning wing correctly Recalibrate Activate the automatic temperature compensation Keep the pH value constant Recalibrate Activate the pH value compensation where applicable Analyse the sample water Check the chemicals used Check the screen and the connections to the amplifier Clean the diaphragm on the side at the bottom of the reference electrode using diluted hydrochloric acid 10 96 Replace the reference electrode if necessary Clean the measuring electrode using a diluted abrasive cleaning agent Replace the measuring electrode if necessary Check the filter and clean it if necessary 21 14 Maintenance 14 1 Intervals for cleaning and maintenance Warning Prior to maintenance work Switch off the system as described in section 13 3 Switching off Make sure that the mains is switched at all poles Clean the filter if high contamination is evident or if the pressure drops considerably Clean the whole flow armature if high visible contamination is evident if faults occur before starting up again after a prolonged stoppage Replace the electrodes Grundfos Alldos recommends that you replace the reference electrode and if necessary the redox or pH single rod electrode after 12 months The measuring electrode is wear resistant and does not have to be replaced on a regula
155. any component qs 2 Do not use to pump flammable or explosive fluids such as gasoline fuei oil kerosene etc DO NOT use in explosive atmospheres or hazardous locations as classified by NEC ANSI NFPAT Pump should be used with liquids compatible with pump component materials 3 Do not handle the pump with wet hands or when standing on a wet or damp surface or in water 4 Do not pull the pump out of the water by the power cord when the pump is operating or connected to power source 5 This pump is supplied with a grounding conductor and or grounding type attachment plug To reduce the risk of electrical Shock be certain that it is connected to a properly grounded grounding type receptacle 6 The National Electric Code requires a ground fault circuit inter rupter GFCI be installed in the branch circuit supplying foun tain equipment pools etc I Padi awarninca SR ja D H Se Figure 1 Typical installation Installation Type instalacion Tipica Separate protected and grounded service outlet minimum A from floor Prise de courant de mise a la terre a protection separee a une distance minimale de 1 2m du sol i Tree Tomacorrientes de servicio conectado a tierra y E protegido separado por io menos 2 122m del suelo f apum Pump Power Cord T il Cordon d alimentation de a pompe CY Seit Cable de potencia de la bomba DP MENE S CIE A Sall SA j m L9 y m d Discharge pipe no smaller t
156. apet de la vanne Tubo de descarga que no sea mas pequino V lvula de ia que fa salida de la bomba fo i dde 2 or 3 Vent Pipe O Canalisation de ventilation de 2 ou 3 Tube de ventilaci n 203 Sump Cover Couvercle de puisard Cubierta del sumidero 10 a Power Cord Grommet SIS Oeillet du cordon d alimentation Anillo protector det cable de tencia Check Valve Ciapet de retenue Verifique valvula Union Raccord Uni n Zen Zem CC Gas tight basin 18 dia x 24 deep min Bassin antibact rien d un diam tre minimal compris entre 18 po et 24 po Recipiente herm tico a gas de 18 di metro y de un m nimo de 24 de profundidad G N c Ze 3 16 Dia Bleed Hole in Discharge Pipe Trou de d gagement diam 3 16 po sur le tuyau d coulement NS Q UP MA AUT EE LAKE Agujero do purgado de 3 16 de di metro en l tuber a de descarga 7 10 on level 7 po 10 po niveau 7 a 10 en el nivel 2 po 5 po hors niveau ale ee del nivel Place pump on hard level surface Never place directly on clay earth or gravel surface Ninstallez jamais la pumpe sur une surface argileuse terreuse or sableuse Jamais place directement sur argile terre ou surface de gravier Posicione la bomba sobre una superficie dura y nivalada y nunca posicione la bomba directamen sobre superficies de arcilla tierra o grava In any installation where property damage and o
157. ark The display functions OK e If the display stays partly bright The display is faulty Press OK to leave the test menu 41 13 9 Calibration 13 9 1 Peculiarities for the calibration of chlorine 1 Press Cal to switch to the calibration menu with pH compensation The LED next to Cal illuminates PH calibration is of prime importance 2 Depending on the set access rights it may be since during the calibration of the necessary to enter the four digit code number chlorine value the device uses the using the Up and Down buttons Confirm using already calibrated measured value for OK pH as a reference value 3 Select a parameter for the calibration Therefore the pH value must be In order to avoid an overdosing the controllers are calibrated Hest switched off and the final control elements are Only then calibrate the chlorine value closed 13 9 2 Calibrating the pH value cal meas value temperature of buffer solution automatic reading of measuring water temperature manual measuring signal temp and automatic calibration slope asym pot cal result slope asym pot 1 100 days TMO03 6718 4506 Fig 30 Calibrating the pH value 42 The pH calibration is carried out as a two point calibration pH cal meas value cal result cal cycle 1 Press Cal to switch to the calibration function Select the line pH and press OK to switch to the pH calib
158. arranty must be borne by the purchaser For warranty service see your nearest Monarch Industries Authorized Service Depot THERE IS NO OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE LIMITED TO ONE YEAR FROM PURCHASE AND TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES UNDER ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUDED TO THE EXTENT EXCLUSION IS PERMITTED BY LAW This warranty is an addition to any statutory warranty MONARCH INDUSTRIES Ch SASS STEEN ERNATEN TAN R E EELER STAGNANT RRA SIREN ENS pan E EE EE EE EEN EE S S SEH Ge z S LARC ARTES 5 d GES 7 za XS x E 2 SSR ot NOE SIRE EEN PN a ENNI a Ge S e Sg KR ANE RESTS SEVERE SEEN EDA EELER PANT EIR RNG SR NS APES OF FR TEI EEN AFTER MARKET SALES SERVICE amp WARRANTY SERVICE APRES VENTE ENTRETIEN ET GARANTIE VENTAS SERVICIO Y GARANTIAS Alberta James Electric Motor Services 4020 8th Street S E 403 252 5477 CALGARY 12G 3A7 Pumps amp Pressure Inc 50 5200 64th ave SE 403 263 7207 CALGARY T2C 4V3 Western Pump Ltd 1143 42nd Avenue S E 403 287 0256 CALGARY T2G 123 Pumps amp Pressure Inc 8632 Coronet Road 780 430 9359 EDMONTON T6E 4P3 SRenown Industries Ltd 5608 94A Street 780 435 3447 EDMONTON T6E 3E4 Bermar Rewind Ltd 9609 109 St 780 532 0818 GRAND PRAIRIE T8V 4E3 SHagen Electric Lethbridge Ltd 1202 2nd Ave S 4
159. arting current locked rotor amp is between 4 and 6 5 times the full load current If direct on line starting is not acceptable and reduced starting current is required an auto transformer or resistant starters should be used for 5 to 30 HP motors depending on cable length For motors over 30 HP use auto transformer starters Engine Driven Generators If the submersible pump is going to be operated using an engine driven generator we suggest the manufacturer of the generator be contracted to ensure the proper generator is selected and used See Table B for generator sizing guide If power is going to be supplied through transformers Table C outlines the minimum KVA rating and capacity required for satisfactory pump operation Control Box Panel Wiring 1 Single Phase Motors Single phase motors must be connected as indicated in the motor control box A typical single phase wiring diagram using a Grundfos control box is shown Figure 6 A 2 Three Phase Motors Three phase motors must be used with the proper size and type of motor starter to ensure the motor is protected against damage from low voltage phase failure current unbalance and overload current A properly sized starter with ambient compensated extra quick trip overloads must be used to give the best possible motor winding protection Each of the three motor legs must be protected with overloads The thermal overloads must trip in less than 10 seconds at locke
160. ater sensor to the corresponding terminals of the measuring amplifier Connect an earth leakage circuit breaker in front of the measuring amplifier and the cleaning motor Connect the cleaning motor to the measuring amplifier in accordance with local regulations Connect the electricity supply to the measuring amplifier Before connecting the supply cables check that the supply voltage specified on the nameplate corresponds to the local conditions Observe the O1N M B RG C L installation and operating instructions of the measuring amplifier Pt 100 WU IC Toi Sensor interface TMO03 5871 1106 42 N co m CS CS 5 TMO03 5872 1106 Fig 20 Conex DIA 1 for wall mounting 15 M B RG C L Pt 100 Fam 3 3 TID 5 im Jl NO
161. ation VENDI SECS NESTON EE EE UN TAPA ITS ENNIO ILI II REALE S9 B p ERR FA A An md etch e rt pees Sends CUTE EC EASE EN Uv RAN rere Pes OMENS m Pr e te RI IET ANE TAILLES NO CU i H j E i f 4 i f i 5 1 H NF SRE TARTEAN te PA ETE EP TRANCE SA INO INA SINE TRAIN ANS gom ont rU IT SU CAS SID ETON a E ERENT ENNE NEA NO LATATA ERRA WS ETANOITA AATTEENA NO REANA E E AAA TA RENE AEN EAE AONANE AAEN AA EE NLS e ARA TUR EEREN SEN TN TESA NE RREN EAN ER EIEEE EENT Important User Information Solid state equipment operates differently than electromechanical equipment To learn how solid state equipment differs from hard wired electromechanical devices consult Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http www ab com literature Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many vari
162. bar counter pressure max 3 7 bar pressure difference max 0 3 bar e Permissible ambient temperature O to 40 C Permissible storage temperature 20 to 65 C Electrodes 10 to 30 C Observe the installation and operating ids instructions of the electrodes e Permissible humidity max 90 relative humidity no condensation e Sample water flow rate min 20 max 60 I h Materials of parts that come into contact with the media PMMA PVC steel PTFE EPDM e Electrode materials Glass metal noble metal PPO polyphenylene oxide PA 6 6 Connections inlet for PVC tube 6 12 or PVC pipe 12 x 1 2 outlet for PVC tube 6 12 or PVC pipe 12 x 1 2 Cleaning motor e Supply voltage 230 240 V 50 60 Hz 115 120 V 50 60 Hz 24 VDC Input power 10 W Measuring parameters chlorine chlorine dioxide and ozone Measuring ranges Dependent on the measuring amplifier See section 10 3 1 Measuring range for measuring parameters Clo ClO Os pH Redox e Sensitivity lt 10 ppb Accuracy lt 5 of full scale value Repeatability lt 3 96 e Response time tgo lt 60 s 10 2 Versions Power supply 230 240 V 50 60 Hz standard 115 120 V 50 60 Hz 24 VDC Equipment options electrode gold standard for free chlorine chlorine dioxide ozone electrode platinum redox single rod electrode redox electrode wi
163. be precisely defined by the operator If the personnel do not have the necessary knowledge the necessary training and instruction must be given If necessary training can be performed by the manufacturer supplier at the request of the operator of the pump It is the responsibility of the operator to make sure that the contents of this manual are understood by the personnel 2 4 Risks when safety instructions are not observed Non observance of the safety instructions may have dangerous consequences for the personnel the environment and the pump If the safety instructions are not observed all rights to claims for damages may be lost Non observance of the safety instructions may lead to the following hazards failure of important functions of the pump system failure of specified methods for maintenance harm to humans from exposure to electrical mechanical and chemical influences damage to the environment from leakage of harmful substances 2 5 Safety conscious working The safety instructions in this manual applicable national health and safety regulations and any operator internal working operating and safety regulations must be observed 2 6 Safety instructions for the operator user Hazardous hot or cold parts on the pump must be protected to prevent accidental contact Leakages of dangerous substances e g hot toxic must be disposed of in a way that is not harmful to the personnel or the environme
164. ble Pump Applications MOTOR HP SINGLE OR THREE PHASE UNITS MINIMUM KILOWATT RATING OF GENERATOR FOR THREE WIRE SUBMERSIBLE PUMP MOTORS EXTERNALLY INTERNALLY REGULATED REGULATED GENERATOR GENERATOR 1 5 KW 1 2 KW ep NOTES 1 Table is based on typical 80 C rise continuous duty generators with 35 maximum voltage dip during start up of single phase and three phase motors 2 Contact the manufacturer of the generator to assure the unit has adequate capacity to run the submersible motor 3 If the generator rating is in KVA instead of kilowatts multiply the above ratings by 1 25 to obtain KVA MINIMUM KVA RATING FOR EACH TRANSFORMER THREE PHASE MOTOR HP MINIMUM TOTAL KVA REQUIRED 2 TRANSFORMERS OPEN DELTA 3 TRANSFORMERS DELTA ORWYE Pump motor KVA requirements only and does not include allowances for other loads Page 15 Technical Data Table D Submersible Pump Cable Selection Chart 60 Hz The following tables list the recommended copper cable sizes and various cable lengths for submersible pump motors These tables comply with the 1978 edition of the National Electric Table 310 16 Column 2 for 75 C wire The ampacity current carrying properties of a conductor have been divided by 1 25 per the N E C Article 430 22 for motor branch circuits based on motor amps at rated horsepower To assure adequate starting torque the maximum cable lengths are calculated to maintain 95 of t
165. circuit is recommended Do not use 1 SOLAR RIES ECAR LL FS ET cL TIS SRT EP DEE ESTO RIE SIEHT WAM PRAT EE ELLE DONATE ERE COA ay e LEID EURO LT EE RACE BREA EE ROB MNT S ES E SEITEN ES SNEWS SANAT ENA LEP NTO SBR NM ka 7 PTA A wi AE ET PTE TR ATT EF AO 077 PVT TTL TEST EY CD AEn ALI ASST SAE WA URS SALUS 9S1 d AES EIER ech Meet PIRA Vereen HAITI ZA RO RN nde EUNT AMELECOURT Veit NEAR s cd AA ET FORANTVDNTPAYIASNCMIMNTOETITRTNQ RESIS VEEP PPA MT TONE LM SSAA NANNAN AINAN NEEN PASSA SEN ISAT CRN AYE REN LNAI FIOR II A Ae AN Hobo EEE t P En A TA te riu SAR A rA OE mgr rg rhe T TY CE BOSE EY SM O AATETTA mI DOT EN ECC EB STEPTOE AE TRUSTE ANARA Eh INOS an ebe Saad etre ROE SR OATS EST D TT ESTER RASA EES EENHEETEN TA PITTA TA ECKER BIER Y MOT EE PF SILENT EE EEN EE EE REENEN EENHEETEN EAR 5 a ute GIANT Pump Company Utile Giant Pump Company P O Box 12010 Oklahoma City OK 73157 2010 405 947 2511 Fax 405 947 8720 www LittleGiant com customerservice lgpc com INTRODUCTION This instruction sheet will provide you with information required to safely own and operate Little Giant 6E Series pumps The pump you have purchased is a submersible effluent pump for use in basins or lift stations and suitable for pumping sewage effluent wastewater and other non explosive non corrosive liquids with up to 1 2 inch spherical solids 6E CIA SFS 6E CIA RFSN 6E CIM This instruction sheet covers th
166. ck that the display is properly connected Check the sample water supply system pipes etc and make changes if necessary Check the sample water supply system pipes etc and make changes if necessary Check the connection cable and reestablish connection Replace the sensor electrode Disassemble the measuring cell and clean the electrode surface Replace the electrode Clean the electrode Use the correct buffer solution Replace the electrode Clean the electrode See section 13 5 8 Code function Check the settings and match them to the local conditions If necessary reset the device to the factory settings This product or parts of it must be disposed of in an environmentally sound way 1 Use appropriate private waste collection services 2 If this is not possible contact the nearest Grundfos or Grundfos Alldos company or service workshop Subject to alterations 49 Argentina Bombas GRUNDFOS de Argentina S A Ruta Panamericana km 37 500 Lote 34A 1619 Garin Pcia de Buenos Aires Phone 54 3327 414 444 Telefax 54 3327 411 111 Australia Grundfos Alldos Dosing amp Disinfection ALLDOS Oceania Pty Ltd Unit 3 74 Murdoch Circuit Acacia Ridge QLD 4100 Phone 61 0 7 3712 6888 Telefax 61 0 7 3272 5188 E mail alldos au alldos com Australia GRUNDFOS Pumps Pty Ltd P O Box 2040 Regency Park South Australia 5942 Phone 61 8 8461 4611 Telefax 61 8 8
167. component 2 Do not use to pump flammable or explosive fluids such as gasoline fuel oil kerosene etc DO NOT use in explosive atmospheres or hazardous locations as classified by NEC ANSI NFPAT Pump should be used with liquids compatible with pump component materials 3 Do not handle the pump with wet hands or when standing on a wet or damp surface or in water 4 Do not pull the pump out of the water by the power cord when the pump is operating or connected to power source 5 This pump is supplied with a grounding conductor and or grounding type attachment plug To reduce the risk of electrical shock be certain that it is connected to a properly grounded grounding type receptacle 6 The National Electric Code requires a ground fault circuit inter rupter GFCI be installed in the branch circuit supplying foun tain equipment pools etc Figure 1 Typical Installation Installation Type Instalacion Tipica Separate pire 2 grounded service outlet minimum 4 from Prise de courant SC mise a ia terre a protection separee a une distance minimale de Ka du wee I Tomacorrientes de servicio conectado a T protegido separado por lo menos a im del Sek A B Pump Power Cord Cordon d alimentation de la pompe Cable de potencia de la bomba E AIET Discharge pipe no smaller than pump outlet WE La canalisation de refoulement doit etre plus SW SV ET se H Gate Valve petite que ia sortie de pompe C Cl
168. d for a short time depending on the type of liquid by the housing sealing It is necessary to check regularly daily if liquid is leaking out of the intermediate flange For maximum safety we recommend the pump version with diaphragm leakage detection Atleast every 12 months or after 4 000 operating hours When dosing crystallising liquids more frequently e n the event of a fault 10 2 1 Cleaning the valves and diaphragm Clean the diaphragm and valves and replace if necessary for stainless steel valves inner valve parts 64 10 3 Cleaning suction and discharge valves If possible rinse the dosing head e g by supplying it with water 10 3 1 Switching off the pump 1 Switch off the pump and disconnect it from the power supply 2 Depressurise the system 3 Take suitable steps to ensure that the returning dosing medium is safely collected 10 3 2 Unscrewing the priming chamber valve Plus system When using the Plus system unscrew the priming chamber valve 3c as follows 1 Remove the cover L from the priming chamber 2 Remove the valve tube R with the valve 3c 3 Unscrew the valve 3c from the valve tube TMO03 6264 4506 Fig 68 Priming chamber valve 10 3 3 Unscrewing suction and discharge valves cleaning valves 1 Unscrew the suction and discharge valves 2 Dismantle the inner valve parts e Standard DN 4 DN 8 valve Carefully push out the inner valve part u
169. d rotor starting current For starter and overload protection guide see Table H A three phase motor wiring diagram is illustrated below See Figure 6 B Pumps should NEVER be started to check rotation unless the pump is totally submerged Severe damage may be caused to the pump and motor if they are run dry FIGURE 6 A Pressure Switch Fused Disconnect Switch Use dotted line for 115V operation Single Phase Wiring Diagram for GRUNDFOS Control Boxes FIGURE 6 B Power Supply Three Phase Wiring Diagram for GRUNDFOS and FRANKLIN Motors Page 6 Electrical High Voltage Surge Arresters A high voltage surge arrester should be used to protect the motor against lightning and switching surges Lightning voltage surges in power lines are caused when lightning strikes somewhere in the area Switching surges are caused by the opening and closing of switches on the main high voltage distribution power lines The correct voltage rated surge arrester should be installed on the supply line side of the control box Figure 6 C and 6 D The arrester must be grounded in accordance with the National Electrical Code and local codes and regulations FIGURE 6 C FIGURE 6 D Three phase power supply Single Phase Power Supply Pump Panel Install Lightning LIGHTNING Protectors ARRESTER Before True Fuses or Grounding Circuit Point Breaker Ground Lightning Arrester Single Phase Hookup To SP Motor
170. d the drain plug See Figure 2 Pour clean water into the priming hole Replace the drain plug Fill the pump casing full Rotate the motor shaft manually from the back of the motor to release internal air pockets inside the casing Refill if necessary at the priming hole Replace the priming plug peraiures it will be necessary to completely drain the fluid from the pump and lines To drain the pump casing remove the drain plug and the priming plug Disconnect the suction line at a connection close to the pump casing and allow the water to drain from the suction line Operate the pump for a few seconds only to clear water from the impeller Replace the suction line carefully cleaning the threads and applying fresh thread compound b STARTUP Dry operation may damage the water lubricated e ROTATION The arrow on the front of the pump casing in seal inside the pump If the pump does not deliver water dicates the correct rotation of the impeller during operation within seconds after startup stop the motor and repeat the Wire the motor as described above If it is not turning in the priming operation Several starting attempts may be neces proper direction refer to the motor wiring instructions sary to expel all of the air from the pump and suction lines c CONTINUOUS OPERATION Check the pump periodically for loose or rubbing parts Service the pump immediately if any unusual noise leaks or vibrations develop d DRAINING Should t
171. dosing pump as the device controlled 13 1 2 Electrode cleaning The measuring electrode and the counter electrode are continuously cleaned of deposits by a cleaning wing which has a gentle yet effective action This ensures uniform sensitivity for the measuring cell over a long period The cleaning motor drives a cleaning wing via a magnetic clutch 13 1 3 Influence of temperature The current generated on the electrodes depends on the temperature of the sample water The measured value increases by approx 4 9o per 1 C increase Temperature variations can be compensated for by the measuring amplifier if the temperature compensation function is activated The temperature can be measured using a Pt100 temperature sensor integrated into the measuring electrode The temperature measuring signals are transferred to the measuring amplifier and calculated using the electrode signals 13 1 4 Influence of the pH value on the chlorine measurement Free active chlorine is considered as the total of molecular chlorine gas Clo hypochlorous acid HOCI and hypochlorite anions OCI Dissolved chlorine gas in molecular form practically does not exist at the application dependent pH values pH 4 5 to 8 5 but is subject to hydrolysis in the presence of water according to the equation Clo H20 4 HOCI HCI The resulting hypochlorous acid is the actually effective compound for disinfection of the water The dissociation
172. e equipment is not going into service long term storage procedures should be followed Installation LOCATION Locate the pump in an accessible place so that it can be inspected during operation Place the pump as Close to the liquid supply as possible Provide ample head room and facilities for installation and removal The pump area should be safeguarded against flooding FOUNDATION Baseplatc mounted pumps are normally grouted on a concrete foundation which has been poured on a solid footing The foundation must be able to absorb any vibration and to form a permanent rigid support for the pumping unit Sleeved or J bolt foundation anchors are recommended for baseplate mounting See Fig 1 On Installations where the pump is to be mounted on a steel skid it is recommended to through bolt sub base to structure using vibration dampeners between the base and steel structure Do not weld the baseplate as this results in greater vibration and noise LEVELING The baseplate should be supported on leveling wedges or shims placed on each side and as close to the foundation bolts as possible Check the setting with a level and adjust shims as necessary The wedges or shims should be placed 24 apart around the base A gap of 4 to 1 1 2 should be allowed between the baseplate and foundation for grouting See Fig 1 GROUTING When the leveling is correct the foundation bolts should be tightened evenly but not t
173. e suction valve Avoid loops as they may cause air bubbles TMO03 6232 4506 Fig 18 Installation of suction line e Inthe case of long discharge lines install a non return valve 12i in the discharge line 6i 4 View v 4 TMO03 6233 4506 Fig 19 Installation with non return valve 5 6 Tube pipe lines 5 6 1 General Warning To protect the dosing pump against excessive pressure build up install a relief valve in the discharge line All lines must be free from strain Avoid loops and buckles in the tubes Keep the suction line as short as possible The flow must run in the opposite direction to gravity Observe the manufacturer s safety instructions when handling chemicals The resistance of the parts that come into contact with the media depends on the media media temperature and operating pressure Ensure that parts in contact with the media are chemically resistant to the dosing medium under operating conditions Only use the specified line types With Plus system e Use the suction line with foot valve and empty signal Fordegassing media maintain a maximum suction lift of 1 5 m Open the isolating valve on the calibration system Maximum suction line length 5m for standard pumps or pumps with Plus system when dosing media with a viscosity similar to water e 1 2 m when dosing media with a higher viscosity than water 5 6 2 Sizing of tube pipe lines Warning
174. e MSG instructions that send and receive data or configure devices e the personal computer uploads or downloads projects to the controllers e the personal computer configures devices on an EtherNet IP network CompactLogix EtherNet IP Overview i U ml FexLogix Controller with 1 88 ENBT Module Men Ki Distributed I O CompactLogix i IS Es Sg Es Controller with 1756 ENBT Module 1756 ENBT Module as an adapter with 1756 P I O Modules CL LI pm I rmm s CompactLogix Controller with Integrated EtherNet IP Port 1 94 AENT Adapter with IDN 1794 LA Modules b TE TET 1734 AENT Adapter with 1734 I O Modules PowerFlex 700S AC Drive with DriveLogix Se ele A 1 TAN ATV Te CTT TTT aid ET iA n Workstation ei E EX E Connections Over an EtherNet IP Network You indirectly determine the number of connections the controller uses by configuring the controller to comm
175. e cable you use to connect the controller depends on the port you use on the 1761 NET AIC converter Connection Required Cable Port 1 1747 CP3 DB 9 RS 232 DTE connection or 1761 CBL ACOO Port 2 1761 CBL APOO mini DIN 8 RS 232 connection or 1761 CBL PMO2 3 In RSLogix 5000 programming software right click on your controller and choose Properties Em Backplane Compact o zo 1769 135 zu Contr Compact Al 0 ce B uu E EE escription samt Aajor Fault dinor Fault Properties Alt Enter Communicate Over Networks 41 The Controller Properties dialog appears fr Controller Properties Example_for_1769_ASCII_Module PRI Date Time Advanced SFC Execution File Nonvolatile Memor Memory General serial Port System Protocol User Protocol Major Faults Minor Faults Mode System Show Dffine Values Baud Rate 9600 r Data Bits S Parity Even ha Stop Bits 1 Control Line Mo Handshake EI ATS Send Delay 0 x20 ms ATS Off Delay 0 x20 ms DCD wat Delay s sec 4 Click the Serial Port tab 5 From the Mode pull down menu choose System 6 Specify communication settings The baud rate specifies the communication rate for the DH 485 port All devices on the same DH 485 network must be configured for the same baud rate Select 9600 or 19200 KB 7 Click the System Protocol tab f Controller Properties Example for 1769 ASCII Module
176. e is triggered manually Press the Start Stop button The LED lights up green the Stop segment is turned off and Run flashes in the display The preset batch cycle is started Timer contact Batch dosing with the preset pause time is triggered by an external contact signal To activate the batch contact function press the Start Stop button The LED lights up green the Stop segment is turned off and Run appears in the display When the external contact signal is received Run flashes in the display The preset batch cycle is started During pause times The time remaining until the next dosing appears in the display To display the time already elapsed press the Down button To display the total time t4 or to press the Up button 61 During timer dosing The batch quantity still to be dosed appears in the display To display the batch quantity already dosed press the Down button To display the total batch quantity press the Up button Stop start of pump during timer dosing To stop the pump press the Start Stop button or actuate remote on off To restart the pump press the Start Stop button The preset batch cycle continues For the Contact timer an external contact signal must also be received Deactivating the timer function 1 Open the second function level 2 Repeatedly press the Menu Info button ON t appears in
177. e of Industrial Filters to be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of installation The warranty for Industrial Filters ordered with special coatings is limited only to the recoating of the defective parts due to failure in materials or workmanship for one year from date of installation This warranty does not cover any equipment purchased for use in applications in which the product is not suited It is the responsibility of the buyer to determine if a product is suitable for a particular application THIS WARRANTY EXCLUDES THE FOLLOWING a Any fresh water unit installed for salt water use b Damage caused by improper installation operation or care c Chemical attack d Rubber type parts and normal wear items i e o rings rim gaskets wing nuts pipe caps holding rods Any costs of labor or expenses incurred in the removal and or installation of Unit or any surrounding device Damage caused by galvanic or electrolytic attack Altering or removing the Harmsco Inc information label h Any unit not grounded Service under this warranty is to be provided by the dealer distributor who sold the unit to the distributor If the dealer distributor is unable to provide warranty service contact Harmsco Inc P O Box 14066 North Palm Beach Florida 33408 U S A Phone 561 848 9628 Fax 561 845 2474 A Returned Goods Authorization RGA number must be received from the abov
178. e office and placed on all shipments to and correspondence with Harmsco Inc Please be prepared with the following information Model number and serial number Date of installation Name of installer Nature of problem Your address and telephone number HARMSCO Filtration Products P O Box 14066 North Palm Beach FL 33408 800 327 3248 561 848 9628 Fax 561 845 2474 E mail sales 9 harmsco com Particle Separation Particle separation with Hurricane filters is influenced by particle weight and flow rate For optimum separation the drain valve should be opened routinely by hand or automatically using a timer actuated valve Automatic purge valves are not available from Harmsco However for more information regarding this equipment please contact the Authorized Harmsco Distributor in your area The data shown below was developed through tests conducted with Hurricane filters and twenty micron filter cartridges to deter mine optimum flow rates for particle separation Sand was used as the test s particulate with a specific gravity of 2 6 relative to water at 1 0 This data is provided for general sizing purposes only Results vary and depend on the particulate being filtered viscosity and other variables 100 90 2 80 2 70 9 60 es I s 30 Pg 20 10 O 25 50 75 100 125 150 Flow Rate GPM Tests indicate the separation of performance of all three Hurricane filters were essentially the same up to th
179. e power supply cable Before connecting the power supply cable check that the rated voltage stated on the pump nameplate corresponds to the local conditions Do not make any changes to the power supply cable or plug The pump can be automatically started aution f by connecting the power supply The assignment between the plug and socket connection and the pump must be labelled clearly e g by labelling the socket outlet Do not switch on the power supply until you are ready to start the pump 6 2 1 Versions without mains plug Warning The pump must be connected to an external clearly labelled mains switch with a minimum contact gap of 3 mm in all poles Connect the pump to the mains in accordance with local electrical installation regulations Pump in 24 V version Connect the power supply cable according to the table below Assignment Wire colour Brown C Blue Green yellow 28 96609030 321 210 96609031 321 217 96609032 321 223 Warning IP65 can only be ensured if the power supply cable is connected with IP65 protection 6 2 2 Version with mains plug Insert the mains plug in the mains socket 7 Start up shutdown Warning Risk of chemical burns Wear protective clothing gloves and goggles when working on the dosing head connections or lines Before each start up check the dosing head screws After initial start up and after each time the diaphragm
180. e rated flow rate of each model Part List Hurricane Filter parts and components are listed below Part No Material Description 550 E EPDM Rim gasket to seal filter 905 P PVC Retainer nut for filter cartridge 309SS Stainless steel Top plate 312 PVC Retainer nut insert 530 AC Stainless steel Lid with vent 316 C CPVC Standpipe for HUR 40 HP 317 C CPVC Standpipe for HUR 90 HP 315 C CPVC Standpipe for HUR 170 HP 202 B Brass Wing nut 329 CPVC Inner vessel isolator 330 Stainless steel Screw 1 4 x 1 2 for isolator Options 550 B Buna N Rim gasket to seal filter 550 V Viton Rim gasket to seal filter 327 Stainless steel 2 Flange fittings set of 2 Available From www harmsco com MADE IN U S A 003 4 07 COnrIX Water Systems SECTION 9 3 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION amp CONTROLS Section 9 3 Process Instrumentation amp Controls 9 3 17 Little Giant Sump Pump Model 6E CIA SFS Tag P 300 uge GIANT S Pump Company 6E CIA SFS 6E CIA RFSN 6E CIM Little Giant Pump Company P O Box 12010 Oklahoma City OK 73157 2010 405 947 2511 Fax 405 947 8720 www LitileGiant com customerservice glgpc com G5 INTRODUCTION This instruction sheet will provide you with information required to safely own and operate Little Giant 6E Series pumps The pump you have purchased is a submersible effluent pump for use in basins or lift stations and suitable for pumping sewage effluent wastewater and oth
181. e scale The LED lights up red 4 Press the Start Stop button The current calibration value is displayed not with replacement circuit boards 5 Use the Up and Down buttons to enter the calibration value read volume in ml The pump electronics automatically calculates the calibration value based on the actual strokes performed 6 Open the isolating valve Press the Menu Info button confirm the setting and move on to the next menu item or press the Start Stop button confirm the setting and close the second function level Adjusting the operating counter pressure without gauging the dosed volume during calibration If you do not gauge the dosed volume you can determine the calibration value from the following dosing capacity curves in order to adjust your pump to the operating counter pressure The curves represent 200 strokes Dosing medium with a viscosity similar to water e Pumps without Plus system 450 Veal ml a GEES 400 350 300 DDI 20 3 250 DDI 13 8 4 DDI 5 5 10 2 DDI 2 5 10 DDI22 16 DDI 0 4 10 oaa a 100 50 0 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 p bar TMOS3 6619 4506 Fig 45
182. e slave stations on the network link slave stations using modems or line drivers to the master When you have a single slave station on the network you do not need a modem to connect the slave station to the master You can configure the control parameters for no handshaking You can connect 2 255 nodes to a single link In DF1 slave mode a controller uses DF1 half duplex protocol e Une node is designated as the master and it controls who has access to the link All the other nodes are slave stations and must wait for permission from the master before transmitting User channel 0 only Communicate with ASCII devices This requires your program to use ASCII instructions to transmit data to and from ASCII device DH 485 e Communicate with other DH 485 devices e his multi master token passing network allows programming and peer to peer messaging DF1 Radio Modem e Compatible with SLC500 and MicroLogix1500 controllers e his mode supports master and slave and store and forward modes Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 32 Communicate Over Networks Baud Rate Selector Switch p Configure an Isolator Channel 0 on the CompactLogix controllers is fully isolated and does not need a separate isolation device Channel 1 on the 1769 L31 controller is not an isolated serial port To configure an isolator perform this procedure 1 Determine whether you need an isolator If you connect channel 1 of the 1769 L31 contr
183. e standard models in this pump Series This form is applicable to other models in this series not listed by catalog number in the replacement parts list section of this pamphlet If the catalog number of your pump is not listed in the replacement parts section then caution should be exercised When ordering replacement parts Always give the catalog number of your pump when ordering replacement parts The Little Giant unit you have purchased is of the highest quality workmanship and material It has been eee to give you long and trouble free service The Little Giant pumps are carefully packaged inspected and tested to insure safe operation and delivery When you receive your pump examine it carefully to determine that there are no broken or damaged parts that may have occurred during shipment If damage has occurred make notation and notify the firm that you purchased the pump from They will assist you in replacement or repair if required READ INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO INSTALL OPERATE OR SERVICE THE LITTLE GIANT PUMP KNOW THE PUMP APPLICATION LIMITATIONS AND POTENTIAL HAZARDS PROTECT YOURSELF AND OTHERS BY OBSERVING ALL SAFETY INFORMATION FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH INSTRUCTIONS COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY AND OR PROPERTY DAMAGE RETAIN INSTRUCTIONS FOR FUTURE REFERENCE SAFETY GUIDELINES M Mi AWARNING A 1 Make certain pump is disconnected from power source before attempting to service or remove any
184. e that parts in contact with the media are chemically resistant to the dosing medium under operating conditions Make sure that the pump is suitable for the actual dosing medium 1 4 Applications 1 4 1 Appropriate acceptable and correct usage The DDI 209 pump is suitable for liquid non abrasive and non inflammable media strictly in accordance with the instructions in this manual Warning Other applications or the operation of pumps in ambient and operating conditions which are not approved are considered improper and are not permitted Grundfos Alldos accepts no liability for any damage resulting from incorrect use 1 5 Warranty Warranty in accordance with our general terms of sale and delivery is only valid e if the pump is used in accordance with the information within this manual e if the pump is not dismantled or incorrectly handled ifrepairs are carried out by authorised and qualified personnel if original spare parts are used for repairs 2 Safety This manual contains general instructions that must be observed during installation operation and maintenance of the pump This manual must therefore be read by the installation engineer and the relevant qualified personnel operators prior to installation and start up and must be available at the installation location of the pump at all times It is not only the general safety instructions given in this Safety section that must be observed b
185. ead to ground values with ohmmeter Rx100K Record measured values Turn off the power then discharge capacitor Check with an ohmmeter Rx100K When meter is connected the needle should jump forward and slowly drift back HOW TO CHECK HOW TO CORRECT Check for voltage at panel If no voltage at panel check feeder panel for tripped circuits Replace blown fuses or reset circuit breaker If new fuses blow or circuit breaker trips the electrical installation and motor must be checked Replace burnt heaters or reset Inspect starter for other damage If heater trips again check the supply voltage and starter holding coil If no voltage check control circuit If voltage check holding coil for shorts Replace bad coil Replace worn or defective parts If open motor winding or ground is found remove pump and recheck values at the surface Repair or replace motor or cable If there is no needle movement replace the capacitor Page 12 Troubleshooting Chart B Pump Runs But Does Not Deliver Water POSSIBLE CAUSES HOW TO CHECK HOW TO CORRECT 1 Groundwater level in Check well draw down Water level If not lower pump if possible or throttle well is too low or well is should be at least 3 ft above pump discharge valve and install water level collapsed inlet during operation control 2 Integral pump check Install pressure gauge start pump If not close to the pump curve remove valve is blocked g
186. ean strainer inspect integral check valve for blockage rinse out pump and re install Same as B 2 above If not close to pump curve remove pump and inspect Page 13 Troubleshooting Chart D Pump Cycles Too Much POSSIBLE CAUSES HOW TO CHECK HOW TO CORRECT 1 Pressure switch is not properly adjusted or is defective 2 Level control is not properly set or is defective 3 Insufficient air charging or leaking tank or piping Check pressure setting on switch and operation Check voltage across closed contacts Check setting and operation Pump air into tank or diaphram chamber Check diaphram for leak Check tank and piping for leaks with soap and water solution Check air to water volume Re adjust switch or replace if defective Re adjust setting refer to manufacturer data Replace if defective Repair or replace damaged component 4 Plugged snifter valve or Examine valve and orifice for dirt or Clean and or replace if defective bleed orifice corrosion 5 Tank is too small Check tank size Tank volume should be approximately 10 gallons for each gpm or pump capacity If tank is too small replace with proper size tank E Fuses Blow or Circuit Breakers Trip HOW TO CHECK HOW TO CORRECT POSSIBLE CAUSES 1 High or low voltage Check voltage at pump panel If not within 10 check wire size and length of run to pump panel If wire size is correct contact power co
187. ed dosing head standard pump version e Dosing flow fluctuation and linearity deviation 1 5 of the full scale value Construction tolerance according to VDMA 24284 1 3 5 Inlet pressure and counter pressure suction lift during operation Maximum inlet pressure Operating conditions version c 9 T E S z S o gt Pump type e 2 e Oo o 5 T E a E z s o ad z o bar bar bar No flooded DDI 0 4 10 2 2 suction no DDI 5 5 10 positive inlet pressure DDI 13 8 4 2 2 DDI 20 3 1 5 1 5 For pumps with pressure sensor Flow Monitor pump option the inlet pressure on the suction side must not exceed 1 bar Minimum counter pressure at the pump discharge valve Operating conditions version Pump type All bar DDI 0 4 10 1 DDI 20 3 For pumps with pressure sensor Flow Monitor pump option the minimum system pressure is 2 bar and the minimum pressure difference between the suction and discharge sides is 2 bar If the volume flow is not constant as for example in the case of contact or analog control even small volume flows should not fall below the minimum pressure or the minimum pressure difference Maximum suction lift start up for media with a viscosity similar to water Operating conditions version Continuous Continuous Pump type operation with operaron Plus system m m DDI 0 4 10 Flooded suction iid DDI 2 2 16 1 5 ii DDI 2 5 10 1 5 me DDI
188. egga PCF 3L Tag P 315 ProS pec TECHNOLOGIES INC Spec Series PC offers heavy duty cast construction in an economical Ma versatile pump Produced in most ON 40 Testable alloys ProSpec Series PC features threaded and flanged ports industry standard shaft seals and either yg rame mounted or close coupled 9 CORRECT configurations ProSpec Series PC affordable and heavy duty MN KE EELER SOIC SAAN e Mayet SEANCE NR NN tee PIAS TSN NTA NEATORAMA X Dent Po DA EA NAR TH ES MEOS NAN REIT EEN PEIN EA NI ANM UR EU A aene ye DOCCT MENSA OS ASABE BIO HEN D eege Bese EE REI IEA OLE REND PITA TELL NIT y AS ON e a EAA ENT NRT LY A ASE GRETA TT NA MCE 4 SERIES PC CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ProSpec Series PC centrifugal pumps are a heavy duty single stage end suction design and are available in all iron bronze fitted and stainless steel construction In addition to our standard materials this product can be produced in other materials such as special bronze alloys duplex stainless steels and monel Series PC is available in close coupled and frame mounted configurations with threaded model PCT and flanged model PCF connections Utilizing industry standard mechanical type shaft seals and standard motors Series PC is the answer to today s tough services and economic demands FEATURES AND BENEFITS Heavy duty cast construction and d quality Tangential discharge on most models provides
189. elect the line hysteresis in the alarm values menu and press OK to switch to the corresponding submenu alarm values 0 00 mg l hysteresis 7 Set the hysteresis to a value between 0 and half of the measuring range using the Up and Down buttons The hysteresis ensures that the relays switch less frequently in the event of upward or downward violation of the limits 8 Press OK to return to the alarm values menu 9 Select the line alarm delay in the alarm values menu and press OK in the corresponding submenu alarm values 0 sec alarm delay 10 Set the alarm delay to a value between 0 and 300 seconds using the Up and Down buttons 13 7 1 Dosing time monitoring This function can be used to monitor the dosing process If the dosing flow remains at a constant level of 100 during a selected period an alarm message is triggered dos time monit 10 min max dosing time 1 Select the line dos time monit in the alarm menu and press OK to switch to the corresponding submenu In the dos time monit menu the monitoring function can be switched on or off e If off has been selected the device returns to the alarm menu e f on has been selected the dos time monit submenu is displayed 2 Set the maximum dosing time to a value between 0 and 600 minutes using the Up and Down buttons 39 13 8 Checking the settings in the service menu In the
190. els to the default settings while the power supply is being connected The service level settings pump type unit of display for the dosing flow input and output settings and the values for the total dosing capacity and operating hours counter remain as they are The pump is disconnected from the power supply 1 Simultaneously press the Up and Down buttons and hold them down 2 Switch on the power supply boot appears in the display 3 Release the Up and Down buttons All modified settings at the first and second function levels are reset to the default settings 9 9 Current signal control 0 20 mA 4 20 mA For controlling the dosing pump via an external current signal of 0 20 mA 4 20 mA f 0 205 Analog b S 0 Wh D t eo Run Rei e Ss Ne Fig 47 Display 0 20 mA current signal control oO 4 20mA p 2 t st oO eo eo ke Fig 48 Display 4 20 mA current signal control The flow rate is proportional to a current input signal of 0 20 mA 4 20 mA Above 19 5 mA the pump runs in continuous operation at maximum dosing flow Qmax Below 0 2 4 2 mA the pump switches off Default setting for Qmax is the dosing flow up to 3 bar default calibration value Once the pump has been calibrated the current signals must be weighted See sections 9 9 2 With calibrated pump and 9 9 3 Setting the weighting The pump must be started first in this operating mode LE
191. em with Conex DIA Conex DIS and DIP are used when the values of decontamination agents pH and redox potential have to be determined and controlled The basic element of the preassembled systems is the AQC D1 potentiostatic measuring cell 13 1 1 Functional principle of measurement e Sample water is taken at a representative position and passed to the measuring cell via an integral filter The water flow rate can be adjusted on the measuring cell A water sensor optional for example serves to trigger an alarm or to switch off the control function if there is a sample water deficiency The agent to be determined Clo CIO or O3 is measured at the noble metal electrode The material to be determined generates an electric current in the pA range proportional to the concentration of the parameters Cl CIO and Os The measuring cell is controlled by a potentiostat integrated into the measuring amplifier A constant voltage is applied to the measuring electrode An exactly defined potential of the working electrode is retained by means of the third electrode reference electrode This results in a linear response for the measuring cell as well as a stable zero point for the measurement The Conex or DIP measuring amplifiers and controllers amplify the current calculate it using the calibration parameters display the concentration as a digital value control a gas dosing unit or a
192. emote on off current Pin Assignment Wire colour input Contact input input 1 GND Brown X X 2 Current input White 3 Remote on off input Blue X 4 Contact input Black X 6 1 5 Empty signal only pre empty and empty signal Socket 5 For the empty signal only or pre empty and empty signal input The suction lines with empty signal or pre empty and empty signal are pre assembled with a plug for socket 5 Socket 5 Used for Pin Assignment Empty signal Pre empty signal 1 Empty signal X GND X Pre empty signal 27 6 1 6 Accessories cable and plug for DDI 209 Description 4 pole M12 plug suitable for socket 3 with 2 m signal cable 4 pole M12 plug suitable for socket 3 with 5 m signal cable 4 pole M12 plug suitable for socket 4 with 2 m signal cable 4 pole M12 plug suitable for socket 4 with 5 m signal cable 5 pole M12 plug set suitable for socket 2 with coupling for pressure sensor Product numbers 96609017 321 206 96609019 321 208 96609014 321 205 96609016 321 207 96645265 321 327 Flow Monitor and 2 m of signal cable for the current output 5 pole M12 plug suitable for sockets 1 2 and 4 screwed without cable with double cable entry 5 pole M12 plug suitable for sockets 1 2 and 4 screwed without cable with single cable entry Extension cable 5 m with 5 pole coupling for M12 plug 6 2 Connecting the power supply cable Warning Disconnect the power supply before connecting th
193. ened in order to resist the tendency of the motor to loosen the joins when stopping and starting When tightened the first section of the riser pipe must not come in contact with the check valve retainer in the discharge chamber of the pump After the first section of the riser pipe has been attached to the pump the lifting cable or elevator should be clamped to the pipe Do not clamp the pump When raising the pump and riser section be careful not to place bending stress on the pump by picking it up by the pump end only Make sure that the electrical cables are not cut or damaged in any way when the pump is being lowered in the well The drop cable should be secured to the riser pipe at frequent intervals to prevent sagging looping or possible cable damage Nylon cable clips or waterproof tape may be used The cable splice should be protected by securing it with clips or tape just above and below the splice If Plastic or Flexible Riser Pipe Is Used It is recommended that plastic type riser pipe be used only with the smaller domestic submersibles The pipe manufacturer or representative should be contacted to insure the pipe type and physical characteristics are suitable for this use Use the correct joint compound recommended by the pipe manufacturer In addition to making sure that joints are securely fastened the use of a torque arrester is recommended when using plastic pipe Page 4 Installation Do not connect the first
194. er or a saved setting can be activated Setup Save setup Saves all current device settings from the menus not just the setup settings Activate setup Resets the device to the last saved setup In this menu save your device settings once you have set all the values in the setup controller and alarm menus You can then activate them again at any time even after a factory reset 31 13 5 12 Factory setting reset In the factory setting submenu the Conex DIA 2 can also be reset to the factory setting using code 6742 Only use this function in an emergency All device settings are lost and must be re entered Do not disconnect the device from the power supply during the reset Resetting the Conex DIA 2 to the factory setting Reset Code 0000 is displayed Set code 6742 using the Up and Down buttons and press OK to confirm The device is now returned to the original factory setting Before subsequent start up Check all parameters and set the device again according to your application General factory settings Language The Conex DIA 2 is waiting for language input The languages Deutsch English Frangais are indicated alternately e Summer time off Code numbers 0000 calibration rights 0000 full rights Current outputs 1 4 0 20 mA Dosing monitoring off Parameter 1 chlorine Parameter 2 off For the first calibration the defaul
195. er inlet and outlet to the connections of the sample water inlet U1 and outlet U2 mm Wl ai mg C T D F d 1 C j U2 DOLI TE a TM03 5861 1106 Fig 13 Water connections 13 12 3 Floater stopper The measuring cell is supplied with a built in floater stopper If the sample water flow rate is increased the float body N will therefore not move outside of the detection range of the water sensor O See the figure in section 12 3 1 Removing the floater stopper An alarm is not triggered and the control output remains active The advantage of this is that in the event of frequent peaks in the sample water flow rate the alarm is not continuously triggered and the control output remains active Warning If the sample water flow rate is set too high or is increased temporarily no alarm is triggered and the control output remains active If the s
196. er non explosive non corrosive liquids with up to 1 2 inch spherical solids This instruction sheet covers the standard models in this pump series This form is applicable to other models in this series not listed by catalog number in the replacement parts list section of this pamphlet If the catalog number of your pump is not listed in the replacement parts section then caution should be exercised when ordering replacement parts Always give the catalog number of your pump when ordering replacement parts The Little Giant unit you have purchased is of the highest quality workmanship and material It has been engineered to give you long and trouble free service The Little Giant pumps ORITUR lj pocta inspected and iss ge to insure safe operation and delivery When you receive yee pu examine it carefully to determine that there are no byek6n o gama parts that may have occurred during sbieffient ia cede occurred make notation and notify thE firth hg attese pump from They will assist you in reply S ei er f V READ INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLA SRRORE WAN TO INSTALL OPERATE OR SERVICE ANE Lig SE GIANT PUMP KNOW THE PUMP APPLICATION AAR POTENTIAL HAZARDS PROTECT YOURSELF OBSERVING ALL SAFETY INFORMATION WFAG AND OR PROPERTY DAMAGE RETAIN INST Ms 3 FUTURE REFERENCE eg WITH INSTRUCTIONS COULD RESULT iN SAFETY GUIDELINES o Zane 1 Make certain pump is disconnected from poweRsour attempting to service or remove
197. erating counter pressure Due to the small stroke volume of the DDI 0 4 10 calibration is essential for a precise dosing flow Before calibrating the DDI 0 4 10 deaerate the pump and then let it run for 15 minutes at operating counter pressure with full stroke rate Display of operating time of drive 1 10 h to 9999 99 990 h 6 TMO03 6610 4506 The dosed volume must be gauged in litres during calibration e g by drawing the dosing medium from a gauged tank For an alternative for pumps with Plus system see section 9 6 1 Calibrating pumps with Plus system internal calibration 41 OFF CAL appears in the display 4 Use the Up and Down buttons to enter the 1 42 Press the Up button calibration value gauged volume in ml ON CAL appears in the display Press the Menu Info button confirm the setting Press the Start Stop button Calibration is started The LED flashes green and Run flashes in the display and move on to the next menu item or press the Start Stop button confirm the setting and close the second function level 200 strokes are performed by default The The calibration process does not number of strokes performed appears in the change the setting for the assignment display weighting of the current input and Press Start Stop to stop at any stroke value output for the flow rate The LED lights up red If a current input or output
198. ers Overview CompactLogix System Overview 1769 1 0 Modules Connected to the CompactLogix Controller Built in ControlNet or EtherNet IP Communication Ports or 1769 SDN Module Connected to the EtherNet IP Link Controller Remote O0 Modules Drives ControlNet Link FtherNet IP Link DeviceNet Link ControlNet Link DH 485 Link Computers Other Controllers The CompactLogix controller part of the Logix family of controllers provides a small powerful cost effective system consisting of e RSLogix 5000 programming software e built in communication ports for EtherNet IP 1769 L32E and 1769 L35E only and ControlNet 1769 L32C and 1769 L35CR only networks e a 1769 SDN communication interface module providing I O control and remote device configuration over DeviceNet e a built in serial port on every CompactLogix controller e Compact I O modules providing a compact DIN rail or panel mounted I O system Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 1769 CompactLogix Controllers Overview 13 CompactLogix Controller Combinations Controller Available Communication Options Number of Number of Local 1 0 Memory Tasks Supported
199. etwork ControlNet Network Software Combinations RSLogix 5000 programming e Configure the software CompactLogix project e Define EtherNet IP communications RSNetWorx software for ControlNet e Configure the ControlNet Yes network e Define the NUT network update time e Schedule the ControlNet network Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 26 Communicate Over Networks The ControlNet communications modules e support messaging produced consumed tags and distributed I O e share a common application layer with DeviceNet and EtherNet IP networks e require no routing tables e support the use of coax and fiber repeaters for isolation and increased distance In this example e the controllers produce and consume tags amongst themselves e the controllers initiate MSG instructions that send and receive data or configure devices e the personal computer uploads or downloads projects to the controllers e the personal computer configures devices on ControlNet and configures the network itself CompactLogix ControlNet Overview Personal Computer Workstation Distributed 1 0 CompactLogix Controller eran PowerFlex 700S Drive ne A EH e b s
200. for a specific example of correcting for three phase power unbalance Developing the Well After proper rotation and current unbalance have been checked start the pump and let it operate until the water runs clear of sand silt and other impurities Slowly open the valve in small increments as the water clears until the dseired flow rate is reached Do not operate the pump beyond its maximum flow rating The pump should not be stopped until the water runs clear Page 9 Start Up If the water is clean and clear when the pump is first started the valve should still be slowly opened until the desired flow rate is reached As the valve is being opened the drawdown should be checked to ensure the pump is always submerged The dynamic water level should always be more than 3 feet above the inlet strainer of the pump Disconnect the temporary piping arrangements and complete the final piping connections Under no circumstances should the pump be operated for any prolonged period of time with the discharge valve closed This can result in motor and pump damage due to overheating A properly sized relief valve should be installed at the well head to prevent the pump from running against a closed valve Start the pump and test the system Check and record the voltage and current draw on each motor lead Operation 1 The pump and system should be periodically checked for water quantity pressure drawdown periods of cycling and operation of
201. formity We Grundfos Alldos declare under our sole responsibility that the products DDI 209 to which this declaration relates are in conformity with the Council Directives on the approximation of the laws of the EC Member States relating to Machinery 98 37 EC Standard used EN ISO 12100 Electromagnetic compatibility 89 336 EEC Standards used EN 61000 3 2 1995 A1 A2 EN 61000 3 3 1995 and EN 61326 1997 A1 A2 Class B Electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits 73 23 EEC 95 Standard used EN 61010 1 2002 Pfinztal 1st July 2008 Disch LL W Schwald Ulrich Stemick Managing Director Technical Director CONTENTS NN ci ob A E H ORAON OT OTOT o ebat ut EE EE NOORWNM A com On P GO SH Oo General information Introduction 3 Service documentation 3 Information about the product 3 Applications 9 Warranty 9 Safety 9 Identification of safety instructions in this manual 9 Marking at the pump 9 Qualification and training of personnel 10 Risks when safety instructions are not observed 10 Safety conscious working 10 Safety instructions for the operator user 10 Safety instructions for maintenance inspection and installation work 10 Unauthorised modification and manufacture of spare parts 10 Improper operating methods 10 Safety of the system in the event of a failure in the dosing system 10 Transport and intermediate storage 11 Transp
202. g when the power supply is switched off and are also active when current weighting is called in the second function level Even for current input current output assignments that are already weighted in the second function level See curve 3a subsequent weighting can be set or weighting can be shifted here The value for the maximum flow rate Qselect mA max at MAmax iS shifted curve 3b Qmax default Qcai X Qselect max 4 Uh 2 Wh ZS LO t N 0 S 0 mA 4 mA 8 mA 12 mA 16 mA 20 mA Get lin MA Fig 51 Current input and current output with direct weighting 49 Q l h 10 I h 8 I h 6 I h Qselect mA min a i mA min 4 1 h 2 Vh 0 0 mA 4 mA 8 mA Qselect mA max b mA max 12 mA 16 mA 20 mA lin mA TMO03 6608 4506 Fig 52 Current input and current output with subsequent weighting 9 9 2 With calibrated pump When calibrating the pump for your application and using current signal control and or current output proceed as follows 1 Calibrate the pump 2 Determine the maximum flow rate O by taking a reading on the pump Qoa is the maximum adjustable flow rate after calibration e g in manual mode or the displayed flow rate in continuous operation press and hold down the Start Stop button for longer than 1 second 3 To set the current input current output weighting see section 9 9 3 Setting the weighting 50 For unweighted assignment curves
203. gle rod measuring chains for pH redox and fluoride o e co 4 Oo CO1 RI osm gt 10 11 12 13 13 L Description Brown White Black Blue Screen Outer conductor screen Inner conductor Reference electrode Measuring electrode Counter electrode Pt100 temperature sensor Water sensor Yellow Green Outer conductor TMOS3 6969 4506 Peculiarities for the connection at the control panel enclosure of Conex DIA 2 1 First connect the measuring cells the single rod measuring chains and the water sensor if present to the separate sensor interface Secondly connect the sensor interface to the Conex DIA 2 control panel enclosure Connecting the sensor interface to the Conex DIA 2 see back side of device Measuring cells AQC D1 AQC D2 AQC D3 HP peroxide Connect terminals 4 1 to 4 14 of the sensor interface to the corresponding terminals of the Conex DIA 2 Measuring cells HP peroxide In addition connect terminal A to terminal 1 1 and terminal B to terminal 1 2 of the Conex DIA 2 Single rod measuring chains pH Connect terminals 3 1 to 3 4 of the sensor interface to the corresponding terminals of the Conex DIA 2 Sample water deficiency sensor Connect terminal A to terminal 2 3 and terminal B to terminal 2 4 of the Conex DIA 2 When using measuring cell AQC D2 the water sensor must always be connected and activated DIP switch
204. han pump outlet SN G te Vae pette que la sortie de pompe que la safda de fa bomba 2 or 3 Vent Pipe G Canalisation da ventilation de 2 ou La canalisation de reloulement doit ete plus S SS E 99 Clapet de la vanne Tubo de descarga que no sea mas pequino fe Karte l u VLA i Powei Cord Grommet uis Check Valve Oeillet du cordon d alimentation Ciapet de retenue ging ES del cable de Verifique valvula 3 po Tube de ventilaci n li d 2o03 accor 1 Uni n Sump Cover A Couvercla de puisard Cubierta del sumidero 10 Gas tight basin 18 dia x 24 deep min Bassin antibact rien d un diam tre minimal compns entre 18 po et 24 po Recipiente herm tico aj gas de 18 di metro y de un m nimo de 24 de profundidad 3 16 Dia Bleed Hole in Discharge Pipe Trou de d gagement diam 3 16 po sur la tuyau d coulement Agujero do purgado de 3 16 de di metro en la tuber a de descarga o GERNE NER AVAE es 2k ETICA an oen d V aum enam A e 7 10 on level 7 po 10 po ntveau 7 a 10 en el nivel 5 off level 2 po 5 po hors niveau 2 a S tuera det nivet Place pump on hard levet surface Never place directly on clay earth or gravel surface Ninstatiez jamais la pumpe sur une surface argileuse terreuse or sableuse Jamals place directement sur argile terre ou surface de gravier Posicione ia bomba sobre una superficie dura y ts nivelada y nunca poslcio
205. hannel 0 on the CompactLogix controllers is fully isolated and does not need a separate isolation device Channel 1 on the 1769 L31 is not an isolated serial port Serial Connection to Controller 1769 L31 Personal Controller Computer 1747 CP3 or 1756 CP3 Serial Ep Cable al If you connect channel 1 of the 1769 L31 controller to a modem or an ASCII device consider installing an isolator between the controller and modem or ASCII device An isolator is also recommended when connecting the controller directly to a programming workstation One possible isolator is the 1761 NET AIC interface converter For more information on installing an isolator see Configure an Isolator on page 32 Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 16 Connect to the Controller Via the Serial Port To connect a serial cable perform this procedure 1 Obtain a 1747 CP3 or 1756 CP3 serial cable TP If you make your own serial cable complete this procedure A Limit the length to 15 2 m 50 ft B Wire the connectors Workstation Controller 1CD 1 CD 2 RDX 2 RDX 3 TXD m 7s 3 TXD 4DTR 4 DTR anno unt 6DSR 6 DSR 7 RTS 4 7 RIS 8 CTS 8 CTS 9 d
206. he pH value for the chlorine measurement has fallen since the calibration C Interference by other oxidation agents in the sample water a Interferences on the signal lines b The reference electrode diaphragm is blocked c The measuring electrode is contaminated or faulty d The filter is contaminated and the quantity of sample water is therefore too low Remedy Check the concentration by making a reference measurement Check the dosing units and activate dosing Check the settings of the measuring amplifier Remake the connection Replace damaged cables Clean the filter check the flow rate and check the sample water inlet pressure Replace the measuring electrode Dismantle clean or replace the measuring electrode Replace the measuring electrode Remove clean or replace the measuring electrode Recalibrate Activate the automatic temperature compensation where applicable Let the system run for at least two hours and recalibrate Only use chlorine solutions such as chloric gas sodium hypchlorite and chlorinated lime Do not use organic products such as trichlorine isocyanic acid as these cannot be measured if this procedure is used Check the reference measurement and take another measurement Repeat the calibration Keep the pH value constant Recalibrate Activate the pH value compensation Check the power voltage Replace the cleaning motor if necessary Check and set the qu
207. he pump be subject to freezing tem MAINTENANCE ZA WARNING ELECTRICAL PRECAUTIONS EE M 1 Clean all parts thoroughly Inspect for damage or All wiring electrical connections and system grounding on must comply with the National Electrical Code NEC and with any local codes and ordinances Employ a licensed electrician AX WARNING RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK a b Before servicing motor operated equipment shut off the power at the main electrical panel and disconnect the power supply from the motor and the accessories Use safe working practices during servicing of equipment LUBRICATION The pump itself does not need lubrication Refer to instructions provided with the motor for motor lubri cation and maintenance REPLACEMENT OF SEAL if available refer to the repair parts list illustration showing the relative location and names of all components to assist you while following these instruc tions Disassembly 1 Disconnect piping and wiring 2 Remove the four nuts to dismount the pump casing from the motor housing 3 Remove motor s end cover if required 4 Secure motor s shaft end with screwdriver and remove impeller by turning it counter clockwise 5 Remove the spring seal from the shaft and slide the seal plate off l 6 Remove the ceramic seat and its rubber housing from the seal plate 2 Liquid soap the rubber only of the stationary seal seat Use clean thumbs only to press seat into seal pla
208. he service entrance voltage at the motor when the motor is running at maximum nameplate amps Cable sizes larger than specified may always be used and will reduce power usage The use of cables smaller than the recommended sizes will void the warranty Smaller cable sizes will cause reduced starting torque and poor motor operation Single Phase Motor Maximum Cable Length Motor to service entrance 2 vors HP i2 10 8 6 4 2 o 00 000 0000 250 300 115 1 3 130 210 340 540 840 1300190602910 1 T 1 2 100 160 250 390 620 960 1460 2160 1 1 1 3 550 880 1390 2190 3400 5250 7960 1 J 3880588 3 4 X 300 480 760 1200 1870 2890 4370 6470 1 250 400 630 990 1540 2380 3610 5360 6520 J 1 1 2 190 310 480 770 1200 1870 2850 4280 5240 2 150 250 390 620 970 1530 2360 36204480 J 3 120 190 300 470 750 1190 1850 2890 3610 5 480 280 450 710 111017402170 742 f200 310 490 750 11401410 T 1 le50 aeo eoo sso te 1 CAUTION Use of wire size smaller than listed will void warranty FOOTNOTES 1 If aluminum conductor is used multiply lengths by 0 5 Maximum allowable length of aluminum is considerably shorter than copper wire of same size 2 The portion of the total cable which is between
209. hey are displayed in the adaptation menu under adapt result 5 If the adaptation was not successful the message adaption abortive is shown Press OK or Esc to quit The adaptation may be aborted in the following cases f an error message was shown during the adaptation e Ifthe controller is set to manual operation fthe standstill time was more than one hour If the total measuring time was more than two hours With selected temperature pH measurement the temperature value pH value and their compensations will not be displayed during the adaptation 37 13 7 Alarm menu With the help of the alarm function the measured value can be monitored and compared with the permitted range If the measured value exceeds the limits of the measuring range an alarm is triggered The alarm relay is activated after the selected alarm delay time When the cause of the alarm has been removed the relay is deactivated immediately without delay alarm value alarm off alarm on alarm value 1 switching point1 alarm value 2 switching point2 alarm value 2 as alarm 1 hysteresis alarm delay dos time monit Fig 28 Alarm menu in main menu 38 downward viol upward violation downward viol upward violation TMO03 6737 4506 1 Select the line alarm in main menu using the Up and Down buttons 2 Press OK to switch to the alarm menu Two functions are ava
210. higher materials and workmanship ensure long volute efficiencies and installation flexibility dependable service life Fully enclosed cast impellers are inherently efficient Close coupled and frame mounted configurations and robust in design for lower energy use and for maximum installation and operating flexibility long life Popular back pull out design allows for quick e Inditstry standard mechanical seals and motors ensure and easy maintenance easy aftermarket replacements and modifications Water treatment Washing systems Waste water Sanitizing systems Brine transfer Bottling filling services Oils Seawater Chemical transfer Irrigation Machine tool coolants Heating and cooling MODEL PCT SELECTION CHART 1800 rpm MODEL PCT SELECTION CHART 3600 rpm m ft m ft Sor ies i204 400 90 s DM 360 100 320 ME R E at ES PCT 1 5H lt L Se SEH S TI lt lt o 5 gor 200 m d suum CNN 10F 40H es PCT 125L 8C 20 40 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180 195 210 225 240 usgpm 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 usgpm 5 10 15 Ws 5 10 15 20 235 s SEN CAPACITY MODEL PCF SELECTION CHART 1800 rpm MODEL PCF SELECTION CHART 3600 rpm m ft m ft A PCF 2 5L E PCE3H mp B PCF 3L F PCF 1 5HS 120 400 oe C PCFAL G PCF 2 5HS SUC Ton D PCF 25H H PCF3HS ee 200 320 60 q 2 280 M lt We sot PCF 2 5H
211. hton Buzzard Beds LU7 8TL Phone 44 1525 850000 Telefax 44 1525 850011 U S A GRUNDFOS Pumps Corporation 17100 West 118th Terrace Olathe Kansas 66061 Phone 1 913 227 3400 Telefax 1 913 227 3500 Usbekistan l ipencraBurenbecrBo TPYHOPOC B Tauikeure 700000 Tauikeur yn YcmaHa Hocupa 1 n TynMK 5 Teneqou 3712 55 68 15 Oakc 3712 53 36 35 Addresses revised 18 12 2008 Being responsible is our foundation BE gt THINK gt INNOVATE gt Thinking ahead makes it possible Innovation is the essence 15 730023 v5 0 Repl 15 730023 V4 0 96681473 0309 Mw www grundfosalldos com GRUNDFOS Za ALLDOS COnrIX Water Systems SECTION 9 3 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION amp CONTROLS Section 9 3 Process Instrumentation amp Controls 9 3 15 Alldos Chemical Metering Pumps Grundfos Model Grundfos Part DDI 2 5 10AR PVC P33 V C F 3133B DDI 2 5 10AR PVC P33 V C F 3133B DDI 5 5 10AR PVC P33 V C F 3133B Tag MP 411 MP 412 MP 413 UA EDDA Ea ode tM Ae UR ce Sm EAI ENNE A2 AS CY DX GEL LU SELAMAT A SHY Yr A EA ANT VAULT A ANNI ELS Eve OS et PLAN erh SIR breet cedit MANE ONE EE END BD e ERS TU EN AXE ESPANA ANS RAMEE NEARER EG REID ES ANDO AS A a LEE a v ta e t t sientas a sedat patere en tote it sat Kat uode ALLDOS GRUNDFOS ions truct GRUNDFOS ALLDOS INSTRUCTIONS ing ins GB Installation and operat BE gt THINK gt INNOVATE gt DDI 209 Dosing pump Declaration of Con
212. ibility that the products AquaCell AQC D1 and the preassembled systems to which this declaration relates are in conformity with the Council Directives on the approximation of the laws of the EC Member States relating to Electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits Standard used EN 61010 1 2002 Electromagnetic compatibility 89 336 EEC Standards used EN 61000 3 2 1995 A1 A2 1998 EN 61000 3 3 1995 EN 61326 1997 A1 1998 A2 2001 class B EN 61326 1997 A1 1998 A2 2001 Pfinztal 1st September 2007 W Schwald Ulrich Stemick Managing Director Technical Director CONTENTS 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 11 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 12 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 12 6 12 7 12 8 13 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 5 14 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 15 16 16 1 16 2 17 Page Symbols used in this document 3 Installation data 3 Installation sketch 4 Unit description preassembled systems 5 Identification 6 Nameplate AquaCell 6 Type key AquaCell 6 Type key preassembled system 7 Unit description holders for electrodes and sensors 8 General information H Guarantee 9 Applications 9 Safety information 9 Obligations of the owner 9 Avoidance of danger 9 Technical data 10 General data 10 Versions 10 Measuring ranges 10 Dimensional sketches drilling diagram 11 Installation 12 Transport and storage 12 Unpacking 12 Installation requirements 12 Mounting 12
213. ifying the switch assignment 35 9 4 First function level Pump not running LED lights up red Pump running LED lights up green Manual control Manual Vh 1 20 4 Set the dosing rate to approx e 1 9o to 100 of max dosing rate I h Contact signal Contact ml control Set the dosing quantity signal 1 75 gt Q Win volume per stroke ml Dosing rate proportional to current signal Current signal 0 20 mA in 220mA Continuous operation max dosing control O 000 rate 0 20 mA 0 2 mA Pump stops 0 2 20 mA Dosing rate proportional to current signal Dosing rate proportional to current signal 220mA Continuous operation max dosing rate Analog lt 0 2 mA Pump stops Vid sedie 4 20 mA Vh 0 2 20 mA Dosing rate proportional to current 420m 0 000 signal lt 2 mA Fault signal switches on gt Display ERROR LED flashes red TMO03 6600 4506 Fig 38 First function level You can modify the assignment between the current input and the flow rate See section 9 9 Current signal control 0 20 mA 4 20 mA 9 4 1 Setting the operating modes 9 4 2 Manual control function level and settings can be made for the adjustable dosing flow DEE i In this operating mode all the settings are entered This function level can only be opened when the on the pump by the operator pump is stopped e Use the Start Stop button to start or stop the 1 When
214. ilable there alarm values dos time monit alarm values If the measured value exceeds the permitted range the alarm relay is activated and an alarm message is triggered The red alarm LED starts flashing dos time monit If the dosing flow constantly remains at 100 during a selected maximum dosing time the alarm relay is activated and an alarm message is triggered The red alarm LED starts flashing Setting the alarm values 1 Select the line alarm values using the Up and Down buttons Press OK to switch to the alarm on alarm off submenu 2 Confirm the line alarm on using OK and select the alarm values selection menu Setting the upper and lower switching point limits 1 Select the line alarm value 1 or alarm value 2 Press OK to confirm and switch to the desired menu alarm value 1 0 00 mg l switching point1 2 Set switching points between 0 and the upper limit of the measuring range defined earlier using the Up and Down buttons in the unit of the measured value the resolution depends on the selected measuring value and measuring range See section 10 4 Measuring ranges 3 Press OK to switch to the eff direction menu Options alarm message in the event of upward downward violation of the selected switching point 4 Select the desired line using the Up and Down buttons 5 Press OK to return to the alarm values menu automatically 6 S
215. ime the kind of time shift and the number of hours of the time shift 13 5 8 Code function The code function is designed to protect the device from unauthorised access Entering the four digit code number and changing it 1 Select the line code function in the setup menu using the Up and Down buttons and press OK to switch to the corresponding menu There are two types of access rights Calibration rights The owner of calibration rights has access to the calibration menu and to manual operation The owner of access rights may do the following alter calibration data operate control relays manually Full rights The owner of full rights has full access to all settings including calibration data The owner of full rights may do the following alter calibration data alter setup parameterise the controller alter alarm settings run the device manually cal right code old code 2 Select the desired type of access rights and press OK to get to the corresponding menu 3 If an old code exists confirm the old code number first on first use confirm code 0000 4 Select change 5 Enter the old code in the submenu see the comment line at the bottom of the display using the Up and Down buttons and press OK to confirm and switch to the query new code see the comment line at the bottom of the display 6 Enter a new four digit code number using the Up and Down
216. in a range The lower number is the number of connections we recommend you make to maintain reasonable ControlNet port CPU utilization rates The higher number is the maximum number of connections possible for that NUT RPI combination You can use all 32 communication connections on the built in ControlNet port However we recommend that you leave some connections available for tasks such as going online and unscheduled network traffic Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 28 Communicate Over Networks DeviceNet Communications Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 Additional Resources For additional information consult these publications e Control Net Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication CNET UMOO1 e Logix5000 Controllers Design Considerations Reference Manual publication 1756 RM094 The DeviceNet network uses the Common Industrial Protocol CIP to provide the control configuration and data collection capabilities for industrial devices The DeviceNet network uses the proven Controller Area Network CAN technology which lowers installation costs and decreases installation time and costly downtime A DeviceNet network provides access to the intelligence present in your devices by letting you connect devices directly to plant floor controllers without having to hard wire each device into an I O module CompactLogix DeviceNet Communications Interfaces If your applicat
217. in lines Proper installation will enable efficient service from your pump WIRING All wiring electrical connections and system grounding must comply with the National Electrical Code NEC and with any local codes and ordinances Employ a licensed electrician it is recommended that a separate circuit be led from the distribution panel to the pump unit Aproper fused disconnect switch is to be installed in the line making sure that the correct gauge of cable is used to carry the load Very long leads will require a larger cable For all 3 Phase motors a separate manual thermal overload switch or a magnetic starter having the proper size heater elements must be installed An electrician should be employed to do the wiring After wiring is complete check the impeller rotation Dy switching the motor on for one Second only Dn m ad Gert Meet MNSMATNSASENSINGNENNEENSNINSSARINUSASSS EF WINNERS NEE TFET ER SRE I NESE VENOUS AT ARN PVE TN PENMAN Ems e S KNASEN SE SEAS LAN SAE EE LTTE EAI SPAS costa Sintered Oise EEN SELENA USURIS TNR RSS MEER A T EE RU CSI SSE TRE ENEE SI EE OPERATION PRIMING THE PUMP LY a WARNING DO NOT RUN THE PUMP BEFORE PRIMING IT SINCE THE SEAL AND IMPELLER COULD BE PERMANENT DAMAGED PRIMING These pumps are not self priming For best prim ing fill the pump casing and the suction line full with water To prime the casing Remove the priming plug an
218. inal surface wiring connection of the drop cable to the control box or panel it is a good practice to check the insulation resistance to ensure that the cable and splice are good Measurements for a new installation must be at least 2 000 000 ohm Do not start the pump if the measurement is less than this If it is higher than 2 000 000 ohm the FIGURE 6 E drop cable should then be run through the well seal by means of a conduit connector in such a way as to eliminate any possibility of foreign matter entering the well casing Conduit should always be used from the pump to the control box or panel to protect the drop cable See Figure 6 E Finish wiring and verify that all electrical connections are made in accordance with the wiring diagram Check to ensure the control box or panel and high voltage surge arrester have been grounded Start Up After the pump has been set into the well and the wiring connections have been made the following procedures should be performed A Attach a temporary horizontal length of pipe with installed gate valve to the riser pipe B Adjust the gate valve one third of the way open C On three phase units check direction of rotation and current unbalance according to the instructions below For single phase units proceed directly to Developing the Well D Under no circumstances should the pump be operated for any prolonged period of time with the discharge valve closed This can
219. ined cut off pressure is shown in the display The default value is the maximum counter pressure of the pump type 1 bar pumps lt 10 bar or 2 bar pumps from 10 bar and up 2 Use the Up and Down buttons to enter the desired cut off pressure You can set the cut off pressure at which the pump is to be stopped at around 2 bar up to the default value Press the Menu Info button confirm the setting and move on to the next menu item or press the Start Stop button confirm the setting and close the second function level The actual cut off pressure Daat orr S higher than the set pressure Pset Pcut off Pset 0 5 bar When you are setting the cut off pressure be aware that the pressure measured in the dosing head is higher than the system pressure It is Caution advisable to display the measured Caution Ge pressure first see section Displaying the pressure that has been measured The set cut off pressure should be higher than the measured pressure in the dosing head 9 10 3 Dosing controller function The pump software monitors the dosing process and emits a pulse for each dosing stroke For each stroke the flow display is momentarily turned off When switched on the electronics detects whether the dosing controller is activated flow appears in the display Manual 1 210 flow TMO03 6574 4506 Fig 57 Display Dosing controller Suppression of do
220. ing rate with Up Down Input of batch quantity with Up Down TMO03 6615 4506 Enabling batch mode Batch manual Batch dosing is triggered manually Press the Start Stop button The LED and the Stop segment are turned off and Run flashes in the display The preset batch quantity is dosed Batch contact Batch dosing is triggered by an external contact signal To activate the batch contact function press the Start Stop button The LED lights up green the Stop segment is turned off and Run appears in the display When the external contact signal is received Run flashes in the display The preset batch quantity is dosed During batch dosing The batch quantity still to be dosed appears in the display To display the batch quantity already dosed press the Down button To display the total batch quantity press the Up button 59 Stop start of pump during batch dosing To stop the pump press the Start Stop button or actuate remote on off To restart the pump press the Start Stop button The preset batch cycle continues For the Contact timer an external contact signal must also be received Deactivating the batch function 1 Open the second function level 2 Repeatedly press the Menu Info button ON P appears in the display 3 Press the Up button OFF B appears in the display The batch function is deact
221. ing with the pump The nameplate should be completed in pen and attached to the control box Pre Installation Checklist Before beginning installation the following checks should be made They are all critical for the proper installation of this submersible pump A Condition of the Well If the pump is to be installed in a new well the well should be fully developed and bailed or blown free of cuttings and sand The stainless steel construction of the Grundfos submersible make it resistant to abrasion however no pump made of any material can forever withstand the destructive wear that occurs when constantly pumping sandy water If this pump is used to replace an oil filled submersible or oil lubricated line shaft turbine in an existing well the well must be blown or bailed clear of oil Determine the maximum depth of the well and the draw down level at the pump s maximum capacity Pump selection and setting depth should be based on this data The inside diameter of the well casing should be checked to ensure that it is not smaller than the size of the pump and motor Page 1 B Condition of the Water Submersible pumps are designed for pumping clear and cold water that is free of air and gases Decreased pump performance and life expectancy can occur if the water is not cold and clear or contains air and gasses Maximum water temperature should not exceed 102 F Special consideration must be given to the pump and motor if
222. instructions of the electrodes 20 w N JI o o0 o N 11 Store electrodes with protective caps in a dry place If they are stored for an extended period of time add a 3 molar potassium chloride solution if necessary 12 Carefully unscrew the screwed part H and empty it of water if any Carefully remove the screwed part H The cleaning wing X and inlet chamber W are loose on the measuring electrode D and may fall out 13 Before starting up again and if it is very dirty clean the whole flow armature F See section 14 Maintenance 13 4 Switching on again Observe the installation and operating instructions of the measuring amplifier and device controlled for instance a gas dosing unit or dosing pump 13 4 1 After short term stop Fill the measuring cell with water 1 Open the connection to the sample water outlet U2 2 Open the connection to the sample water inlet U1 3 Check the quantity of sample water 4 Switch on the measuring amplifier Caution Let the system run for at least two hours to avoid Caution e f faulty measurements and calibrations 5 Take a photometrical measurement 6 Recalibrate if necessary See section 12 8 Calibrating the parameters Clo ClOs Os 7 Switch on the device controlled for instance a gas dosing unit or dosing pump if necessary 13 4 2 After long term stop inspection If the measuring cell has been switched off for a long period
223. ion Select eCommunicates with other DeviceNet devices 1769 SDN e Uses the controller as a master or slave on DeviceNet DeviceNet scanner module e Uses a controller ControlNet Ethernet or serial port for other communications e Accesses remote Compact 0 over a DeviceNet network 1769 ADN e Sends remote 1 0 data for as many as 30 modules back to scanner or DeviceNet controller adapter module This table specifically describes using the 1769 ADN module to access remote Compact 1 0 over DeviceNet However CompactLogix controllers can access other Allen Bradley remote 1 0 over DeviceNet In those cases you must select the appropriate interface For example if accessing remote POINT 1 0 modules you must select the 1734 ADN Communicate Over Networks 29 CompactLogix DeviceNet Overview CompactLogix EF y PLC 5 Controller with ControlLogix Controller E SI M r 1771 SDN Scanner Module with 1756 DNB Module DeviceNet Network
224. ion of hypochlorous acid HOCI into the hypochlorit anion OCT leads to a loss of slope loss of sensitivity of the sensor for chlorine measuring Using a mathematical compensation function this loss of sensitivity can be eliminated Temperature compensation Using a compensation function the influence of temperature on the measurement can be eliminated mathematically Control field for pH value pH compensation temperature and temperature compensation in the display of measured value chlorine 0 43 mg l 5 20 pH Sep TMO3 6703 4506 Fig 21 Chlorine measurement with pH and temperature compensation Press Esc once or twice to change to the display with the measured value See sections 13 2 Display elements during initial commissioning and 13 6 3 Controller control fields on the display In addition to the current measured value the current pH value and the temperature of the sample water are indicated as well With activated pH compensation or temperature compensation the letter c for compensation is displayed at the end of the line With deactivated temperature measurement the water temperature for compensation should be entered manually after calibration See section 13 9 2 Calibrating the pH value 13 5 3 Selection of measuring cell The measuring cell submenu is shown only if the measured values chlorine chlorine dioxide ozone or peroxide were selected during the parameterisatio
225. ions j Variation of the dosing medium Check the concentration Use an density viscosity agitator if necessary 5 Loud piercing a At dosing capacities lower than 10 The resonance noise of the stepper noises of the maximum dosing capacity of motor does not indicate an error the pump resonance noises may temporarily occur at the stepper motor 6 Liquid leaks out of a A diaphragm leakage has occurred Replace the diaphragm the hole in the intermediate flange between the pump and the dosing head For further error signals for the control unit refer to the relevant section 12 Disposal This product or parts of it must be disposed of in an environmentally sound way 1 Use appropriate waste collection services 2 If this is not possible contact the nearest Grundfos or Grundfos Alldos company or service workshop Subject to alterations 68 Safety declaration Please copy fill in and sign this sheet and attach it to the pump returned for service We hereby declare that this product is free from hazardous chemicals biological and radioactive substances Product type Model number No media or water A chemical solution name see pump nameplate Fault description Please make a circle around the damaged part In the case of an electrical or functional fault please mark the cabinet GrA3494 Please give a short description of the fault Date and signature Company stamp 69 Argenti
226. ish Francais Nederlands The word language in the header is displayed in all available languages successively at intervals of approximately one second Start the Conex DIA 2 by selecting the desired operating language 1 Select the desired language using the Up and Down buttons The selected language is displayed inversely white letters on black background 2 Press OK to confirm The selected language is stored and will remain the operating language when the device is rebooted If necessary the operating language can be changed in the language submenu in the setup menu See section 13 5 Setup The translations for the words setup and language into the currently available languages are Deutsch Hauptmen Grundeinstellung Sprache English main menu setup language Fran ais Menu principal Param trage Langue Nederlands hoofdmenu basisinstelling taal Espa ol Menu principal Ajuste b sico Idioma Italiano Menu principale programm fond lingua Portugu s Menu principal Posi o inicial L ngua Pycckun JlaBHOe MeHIO Polski manu gtowne CTaHo HACTPONKA ABbIK ustawienia jezyk chlorine 0 43 mg l e After selecting and confirming the operating language by pressing OK during initial commissioning the display shows chlorine as the value to be measured On subsequent start ups the display will show the measured value selected the previous time chlorine
227. ith hydromechanical cleaning Clo CIO5 O3 Pressure loading valve P With pressure loading valve X Without pressure loading valve Electrodes AU Gold PT Platinum PCB pH ceramic diaphragm with buffer solution PCX pH ceramic diaphragm without buffer solution PTB pH PTFE diaphragm with buffer solution PTX pH PTFE diaphragm without buffer solution PKB pH KCI filling with buffer solution PKX pH KCI filling without buffer solution PGB pH gel filling with buffer solution PGX pH gel filling without buffer solution RCB Redox ceramic diaphragm with buffer solution RCX Redox ceramic diaphragm without buffer solution RTB Redox PTFE diaphragm with buffer solution RTX Redox PTFE diaphragm without buffer solution RRB Redox without reference system with buffer solution RRX Redox without reference system without buffer solution A No electrode Flow sensor QS Flow sensor X No flow sensor Temperature sensor T With Pt100 Power supply G 1 x 230 240 V 50 60 Hz H 1 x 115 120 V 50 60 Hz 24 VDC X No power supply 5 3 Type key preassembled system Example DIA 1 A D1 P AU PCB Units for measurement and control DIA 1 Dosing Instrumentation Advanced with 1 input DIA 2 Dosing Instrumentation Advanced with 2 inputs DIA 2Q Dosing Instrumentation Advanced with 1 input flow measurement DIP Dosing Instrumentation Pool DIS PR Dosing Instrumentation Standard for pH redox measuremen
228. ittonal RESOULCES qucd dao dote unde eroe e depu eodem 48 Chapter 5 MEO eg x yii outs sos de rod dtes tak A e ORC ae E S de b nto Oe 49 Select DO Modil eS vo cra aed de Reto d Bek Re BRA dee edo 49 Additional Resources de od sede d DEEST PY ERES 49 KEE SEE m 50 Estimate Request Packet Interval 5a e e 50 Calculate System Power Consumption 51 Validate Placement of I O Modules 51 Place Local pO MOduleSa cia 8 4 faba d Sos oO SEU ae s 54 Additional RESOURCES Se ger qd e rw pars dore dod 55 Com Cure I O 6 44552 55 DC Oe CHOM e pei vie erated ul as eee a 56 Additonal RESOULCES e ace px Oe e et axis 24 Configure Distributed I O on an EtherNet IP Network 24 Additional RESOULCES a aes racio m e x dfs Rd hm d 27 Configure Distributed I O on a ControlNet Network 58 Additional RESOUICES a xau eg he ue td eee a dod 58 Configure Distributed I O on a DeviceNet Network 59 Additonal RESOUICES 2 3 44 4 dte Soe ore eS ee eae 59 Addes T MNT 60 Determine When Data Is Updated 61 Additional Resources 0 61 Montor VO Modules s bat bti debt ue doy dos bees tice 62 Additional Resources 0 62 Display Fault DAC aue vere ee do pone e Seb qr do diee 62 End cap Detection and Module Faults 63 Reconfigure an I O Module 63 Reconfigure a Module via RSLogix 5000 Programming DOW EE 63 Reconfigure a Module via a MSG Instruction 64 Chapter 6 It OAUCHOM Sekt im er do
229. ivated Repetition time t2 Start time t4 Fig 66 Timer mode Risk of dosing errors If repetition time tz is not long enough to dose the batch quantity at the set dosing flow within this time the pump continues dosing until the current batch quantity is finished The pump is then stopped and the next batch dosing is triggered after the next repetition time Batch dosing in timer mode may be insufficiently or excessively triggered in the event of an error if the pump system is not monitored The system must be protected redundantly Timer mode is controlled at the first and second function levels e The batch quantity and times t4 and tz are set in the second function level e Timer mode is enabled in the first function level 60 9 12 Timer menu timer mode In timer mode a defined batch quantity is dosed with a defined dosing flow The first dosing starts after the start time t4 has elapsed Batch dosing is then repeated after the repetition time to has elapsed until the user stops the process by pressing the Start Stop button or with remote off Input range for the batch quantity 0 0 999 9 ml 1 00 99 99 I e Input range for the times t4 and to 1 min lt t4 lt 999 h 1 min lt to lt 999 h Input hh mm Repetition time t2 TMO03 6616 4506 Fig 67 Setting timer mode OFF t appears in the display 1 Press the Up button ON t appears in the displa
230. ki d A CARDBOARD RING Installing Single Type 21 Seal FIG 3 l Install seat as described on opposite page and clean lapped faces LAPPED FACES 2 Clean polish and oil shaft or sleeve over which seal will pass and make sure there is a 1 32 minimum radius on leading edge also make certain that all edges of any keyways or snap ring grooves are smooth and broken Clean and oil lapped sealing faces using clean light oil not grease 3 When eat ic installed in body casting See Fig 3 place the sealmg washer and bellows assembly on the shaft or sleeve but not the spring and slide the assembly in until it meets the seat Make sure that the notches on the edge of the sealing washer mate with the retainer lugs See Fig 3 In case assembly cannot be slid into position with the fingers use sleeve and mallet as shown in Fig 5 Install spring and make sure it is seated properly over tail of bellows Install impeller or other holding means and check spring position again for proper seating PS f i FIG 4 4 a When seat is installed in end plate See Fig 4 put on snap ring and spring holder when specified and spring Be surc that spring is centcrcd in LAPPED FACE spring holder b Slide rubber bellows and washer assembly as a unit along shafe just far enough to center in spring and hold spring in this location Do not compress spring at this stage c After installing seat as described on opposite page and bef
231. l options To Choose Monitor the project in the controller Go Online Transfer a copy of the project from the controller to RSLogix Upload 5000 software Transfer the open project to the controller Download Additional Resources For additional information consult these publications e EtherNet IP Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication ENET UMOOT1 e ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control System User Manual publication CNET UMOO1 e DeviceNet Modules in Logix5000 Control System User Manual publication DNET UM004 Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 Introduction Function Control distributed remote 1 0 e EtherNet IP e ControlNet e DeviceNet Produce consume interlock data between controllers e EtherNet IP e ControlNet send and receive messages to and from other devices This includes access to the controller via RSLogix 5000 programming software e EtherNet IP e ControlNet e DeviceNet to devices only e serial e DH 485 Chapter J Communicate Over Networks This chapter explains how CompactLogix controllers support additional networks to enable various functions CompactLogix Controller Network Support Example g ITA LOCH OA Compactlogix Controller
232. l panel enclosure Output 4 continuous control parameter 1 This current output shows the calculated actuating variable signal as an analog current signal Use of actuating variable signal as input signal for a continuous final control element 1 Connect the conductor to terminal 29 wall mounted enclosure or terminal 1 8 control panel enclosure 2 Connect the conductor to terminal 30 wall mounted enclosure or terminal 1 7 control panel enclosure 12 5 Connections of controller stop sample water sensor and temperature sensor Connecting the controller stop 1 Connect the conductor to terminal 17 wall mounted enclosure or terminal 2 1 control panel enclosure 2 Connect the conductor to terminal 18 wall mounted enclosure or terminal 2 2 control panel enclosure Connecting the sample water sensor Cable colours and marking See connections of measuring cell types AQC D1 AQC D2 AQC D3 1 Connect the conductor to terminal 19 wall mounted enclosure or terminal 2 3 control panel enclosure 2 Connect the conductor to terminal 20 wall mounted enclosure or terminal 2 4 control panel enclosure When using measuring cell AQC D2 the water sensor must always be connected and activated Connecting the Pt100 temperature sensor 1 Connect the conductor to terminal 21 wall mounted enclosure or terminal 1 11 control panel enclosure 2 Connect the conduc
233. lable on www Grundfosalldos com Prior to installation read these installation and operating instructions Installation and operation must comply with local regulations and accepted codes of good practice 1 General information 1 1 Introduction These installation and operating instructions contain all the information required for starting up and handling the DDI 209 diaphragm dosing pump If you require further information or if any problems arise which are not described in detail in this manual please contact the nearest Grundfos Alldos company 1 2 Service documentation If you have any questions please contact the nearest Grundfos Alldos company or service workshop 1 3 Infor mation about the product 1 3 1 Pump types The DDI 209 dosing pump is available for a variety of performance ranges in various sizes Pump types DDI 0 4 10 DDI 2 2 16 DDI 2 5 10 DDI 5 5 10 DDI 13 8 4 DDI 20 3 The following is indicated on the pump nameplate see section 4 1 Identification The pump type which specifies the stroke volume connection size and performance data see below The pump serial number which is used to identify the pump The most important characteristics of the pump configuration e g dosing head and valve materials They are described in section 4 2 Type key e Maximum flow rate and maximum counter pressure e Supply voltage or mains voltage and mains frequency The pump for vi
234. lations deeper than 200 feet check valves should be installed at no more than 200 foot intervals Protect the well from contamination To protect against surface water entering the well and contaminating the water source the well should be finished off above grade and a locally approved well seal or pitless adapter unit utilized Electrical WARNING To reduce the risk of electrical shock during operation of this pump requires the provision of acceptable grounding If the means of connection to the supply connected box is other than grounded metal conduit ground the pump back to the service by connecting a copper conductor at least the size of the circuit supplying the pump to the grounding screw provided within the wiring compartment All electrical work should be performed by a qualified electrician in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code local codes and regulations Verification of the electrical supply should be made to ensure the voltage phase and frequency match that of the motor Motor voltage phase frequency and full load current information can be found on the nameplate attached to the motor Motor electrical data can be found in Table E If voltage variations are larger than 10 do not operate the pump Page 5 Direct on line starting is used due to the extremely fast run up time of the motor 0 1 second maximum and the low moment of inertia of the pump and motor Direct on line st
235. lement Rd 705 326 6427 ORILLIA L3V 6H2 Mannion s Pump House 848 Clyde Ave 613 722 4226 OTTAWA K1Z 5A2 Johnson Pumps amp Motors Inc 285 8th Street East 519 376 3305 OWEN SOUND N4K 1L2 m MAJOR PARTS DISTRIBUTOR B DISTRIBUTEUR PRINCIPAL DE PIECES B DISTRIBUIDOR PRINCIPAL DE PIEZAS PRINTED IN CANADA 232100 R29 08 06 ANM ere 22i RTE LATER EEN PANTER SATS VERA TE a RON EPG SSCS Pv NNT SNE GUE BU IE NTN PMN SOT RAN OR SRDS RAE HAGE TREATS ENS EE Ra eB ERENT SEET EELER Ko EE Y n Za i SRR COnrIX Water Systems SECTION 9 3 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION amp CONTROLS Section 9 3 Process Instrumentation amp Controls 9 3 13 Chlorine Analyzer Grundfos Aquacell Model Grundfos Aquacell AQC D1 Tag AIT 316 GRUNDFOS ALLDOS INSTRUCTIONS AQC D1 Measuring cell Installation and operating instructions ev BE THINK INNOVATE5 GRUNDFOS ALLDOS EANAN HAGA NICE NM NER BAAN SESE d Ia eA Ah hA EERSTEN echan c OY ARE ENE Ae UJ AGEN AN ESSA ESAS TEENA SRA ven EVN AM ereesee etas tct vette Acten WC SCANS ee SABEN SEET Sf Vn URS SSR COREE EELER NT Rp SPT EE EP NOD FF AUTEN ESE ETE RP A THN NREL OB pT NN eer cte ON Gor AT EERSTEN METERS EI EA 159 ATE NANSPO A TERIA NSS RAR WENN SY RENEE SO ATTI TUS LN TTA CT ENEE A Declaration of Conformity We Grundfos Alldos declare under our sole respons
236. liability for damage caused by incorrect Caution e transportation or missing or unsuitable packaging of the pump Before returning the pump to Grundfos Alldos for service the safety declaration at the end of these instructions must be filled in by authorised personnel and attached to the pump in a visible position If a pump has been used for a medium Caution which is injurious to health or toxic the pump will be classified as contaminated If Grundfos Alldos is requested to service the pump it must be ensured that the pump is free from substances that can be injurious to health or toxic If the pump has been used for such substances the pump must be cleaned before it is returned If proper cleaning is not possible all relevant information about the chemical must be provided If the above is not fulfilled Grundfos Alldos can refuse to accept the pump for service Possible costs of returning the pump are paid by the customer The safety declaration can be found at the end of these instructions The replacement of the power supply cable must be carried out by an authorised Grundfos Alldos service workshop 4 Technical data 4 1 Identification O oc W N gt Made in Germ c o o oc o nNN ch DI 60 10 AF PVC T C S 31C5C5 D 10261 222 0 050 kW IP 65 60 Hz 07120722288 ID C e ev GRUNDFOS ZA ALLDOS 8 DDI 209
237. lication ENET APO01 e Logix5000 Controllers Design Considerations Reference Manual publication 1756 RM094 ControlNet Network Communication Communicate Over Networks 25 ControlNet is a real time control network that provides high speed transport of both time critical I O and interlocking data and messaging data including uploading and downloading of programming and configuration data on a single physical media link The ControlNet network s highly efficient data transfer capability significantly enhances I O performance and peer to peer communication in any system or application The ControlNet network is highly deterministic and repeatable and remains unaffected as devices are connected or disconnected from the network This robust quality results in dependable synchronized and coordinated real time performance The ControlNet network most often functions as e the default network for the ControlLogix platform e a substitute replacement for the remote I O RIO network because the ControlNet network adeptly handles large numbers of I O points e a backbone to multiple distributed DeviceNet networks e a peer interlocking network For ControlNet communications you can use these CompactLogix controllers with a built in ControlNet communication port e 1769 L32C CompactLogix controller e 1769 L35CR CompactLogix controller You can use these software products with a 1769 CompactLogix controller on a ControlNet n
238. lines The pump can now be started see section 7 1 5 Starting the pump TMO3 6245 4506 7 1 4 Assisting suction for systems without Plus system At the dry suction discharge valves 1 Remove the suction line 2 Hold a small container of water directly next to the suction valve and draw water until the dosing head is full 3 Reinsert the suction line 7 1 5 Starting the pump 1 Open the suction and discharge isolating valves if installed 2 Open the deaeration valve of the dosing head by approximately 1 turn 3 Let the pump run in continuous operation Switch on the power supply Press the Start Stop button and keep it pressed The pump switches to continuous operation at maximum stroke frequency 4 Leave the pump running until the dosed medium is free of air bubbles and for the Plus system until the calibration tube is full Leave the pump DDI 0 4 10 running in continuous operation for approximately 5 min 5 Carefully close the deaeration valve The pump is now ready for operation 7 1 6 After initial start up of pumps with Plus system After initial start up remove the adhesive label M from the cover L see figs 3 and 29 Nach Inbetriebnahme Aufkleber entfernen TMO03 6247 4506 Fig 29 Adhesive label 7 1 7 Tightening dosing head screws After initial start up and after each time the diaphragm is changed tighte
239. lly for instance using the Grundfos Alldos DIT hand photometer Observe the installation and operating instructions of the photometer 12 8 2 Calibration example based on chlorine measurement with pH compensation not with Conex DIS D Observe the installation and operating iiis instructions of the measuring amplifier e f not done yet Define the basic settings for the measuring amplifier When carrying out a chlorine measurement with pH compensation the pH value must be calibrated first since the pH value is used when calibrating the chlorine value It is not necessary to remove the pH or redox single rod electrodes for calibration Simply fill the calibration cup I with the relevant buffer solution Filling the calibration cup I with the relevant buffer solution 1 Close the shut off spindle for sample water inlet V1 and outlet V2 2 Open the deaeration spindle R1 open the evacuation spindle J and drain the sample water through the slit in the calibration cup I 3 Unscrew the calibration cup I and tighten the evacuation spindle J again 4 Fill the calibration cup I up to the mark with buffer solution and then loosely screw it back into the flow armature F by hand This position ensures that the electrodes are immersed deeply enough in the buffer solution Calibrating the pH value e DIP Select the right hand display for pH with the Select button e Conex DIA and DIP Use the CAL button
240. loading valve must be fitted to the outlet of the flow armature if the counter pressure may fall below 0 3 bar for instance if there is an open outflow Product number 96609179 12 6459 400 Component Pressure loading valve V with adaptor 12 2 1 Mounting the pressure loading valve 1 Unscrew the connection of the sample water outlet U2 2 Screw the pressure loading valve and adaptor V onto the measuring cell outlet 3 Screw the connection of the sample water outlet U2 onto the pressure loading valve TMO3 5858 1106 TMO03 5859 1106 TMO3 5860 1106 Fig 12 Pressure loading valve Observe the correct installation of the pressure loading valve See the arrow on the pressure SE loading valve The arrow must point in the flow direction Warning At a pressure of more than 4 bar and if the measuring cell is not deaerated the cell might burst Do not exceed the max system pressure of 4 bar Fit a pressure reducer if necessary Observe the local pressure The permissible primary water pressure is 0 3 to 4 bar Fit a pressure booster pump if necessary Check the iN tightness of the measuring cell Close the shut off spindle for sample water inlet V1 and outlet V2 Connect the sample wat
241. low sensor Temperature sensor T With Pt100 X No temperature sensor Mounting W Wall mounted p Panel mounted Power supply G 1 x 230 V 50 60 Hz H 1 x 120 V 50 60 Hz 24 VDC QS T W G 6 Unit description holders for electrodes and sensors Q2 Q1 A1 2 R R1 B1 TAIN qe CS CS eg BS gem FE U1 p od HOH SE x G1 D QP A12 R Bi VIE O lt 4 E eee cl Q1 Q2
242. manently indicates zero 3 Display permanently at full scale value 4 Display with measured value unsteady 5 With measurement of oxidisers insufficient sensitivity of measuring cell 6 With pH measurement Display with measured value reacts extremely slowly 7 With pH measurement error message during calibration 8 Device cannot be set 9 Faulty control 15 Maintenance The device is maintenance free Repairs can only be carried out in the factory by authorised personnel Cause a a No power supply Short circuit in cable between measuring cell and instrument amplifier moisture in connectors Open circuit in cable between measuring cell and instrument amplifier Interferences on cable from electrode measuring cell pH and redox measurement air in sample water flow pH measurement sample water flow interrupted Cable between electrode measuring cell and instrument amplifier broken Sensor electrode faulty Measuring cell contaminated or passivated by deposits Electrode aged Electrode dirty Wrong buffer solution used Electrode aged Electrode dirty Incorrect code set device protected against adjustment Device is incorrectly parameterised 16 Disposal Remedy Connect the power supply Check the connection cable and eliminate short circuit and moisture Check the connection cable and reestablish connection Che
243. mation ES E PE EI E Absolute Position DriveLogix Gel Cam Recovery MES My Recent td CNET messaging Documents T E Coord Motion Drill Cycle Infeed Blend Messaging Configuration 1758 PLS Desktop aMicpi chassis Info Ma G ModbusMaster A IDHplus messaging c RU Equipment Phase Sequencer Mu Documents hu Computer File name Example for 1768 ASCII Module EN Mu WT Files of type A ASLogm 5000 Files T ACD UK M Cancel Places Help 2 From the Communications pull down menu choose Who Active is RSLogix 5000 Example for 1769 ASCII Module File Edit View Search Logic E a ee Tools Wine S Sieg amp a Select Recent Path Offline fi E RUN Ho Forces d l OK Go Online FT BAT i Upload Ho Edits ch Cup Download The Who Active dialog appears 5 Who Active EU OO Jl xl v Autobrowse E Workstation LISMAYVASCOJO I Linx Gateways Ethernet E 3 Flas AB DF1 1 D I Upload El i 01 CompactLogix Processor Controller1 l EI Backplane CompactLogix System o Downoad Elgg AB ETHIP 1 Ethernet Sr Elgg AB_PCIC 1 ControlNet Update Firmware Kl Close KS re p Erbe eler E 3 Expand the communication driver to the level of the controller 4 Select the controller Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 20 Connect to the Controller Via the Serial Port Controller Options Once you have selected a controller you have severa
244. measure between the legs phases What it Means When the motor is under load the voltage should be within 10 of the nameplate voltage Larger voltage variation may cause winding damage Large variations in the voltage indicate a poor electrical supply and the pump should not be operated until these variations have been corrected If the voltage constantly remains high or low the motor should be changed to e the correct supply voltage CURRENT How to Measure What it Means MEASUREMENT By use of an ammeter setontheproper If the amp draw exceeds the listed scale measure the current on each power lead at the control box or starter See Electrical Data Table E for motor amp draw information Current should be measured when the pump is operating at a constant discharge pressure with the motor fully loaded service factor amps SFA or if the current unbalance is greater than 596 between each leg on three phase units check for the following 1 Burnt contacts on motor starter 2 Loose terminals in starter or control box or possible cable defect Check winding and insulation resistances 3 Supply voltage too high or low 4 Motor windings are shorted 5 Pump is damaged causing a motor overload WINDING RESISTANCE How to Measure Turn off power and disconnect the drop cable leads in the control box or starter Using an ohmmeter set the scale selectors to Rx1 for values under 10 ohms and
245. minum conductor is used multiply lengths by 0 5 Maximum allowable length of aluminum is considerably shorter than copper wire of same size 2 The portion of the total cable which is between the service entrance and a 30 motor starter should not exceed 25 of the total maximum length of assure reliable starter operation Single phase control boxes may be connected at any point of the total cable length 3 Cables 14 to 0000 are AWG sizes and 250 to 300 are MCM sizes Page 17 Technical Data Electrical Data Submersible Pump Motors 60Hz GRUNDFOS MOTORS CIR BRKR FULL LOAD MAX GRUNDFOS OR FUSES AMPERAGE EFF PWR THRUST NAMEPLATE PRODUCT START FACT NO NO 4 Inch Single Phase 2 Wire Motors control box not required 6 Inch Three Phase 3 Wire Motors 79952101 79952102 79952103 79952104 79952105 79453101 79453102 79453103 79453104 79453105 79302005 79362005 79392005 79302006 79362006 79392006 79304507 79354507 79394507 79304509 79354509 79394509 79305511 79355511 79395511 791595016 791595026 791595036 791595046 791595056 791545016 791545026 791545036 791545046 791545056 791530056 791536056 791539056 791530066 791536066 791539066 96405801 96405810 96405815 96405802 96405811 96405816 96405805 96405814 96405819 7 1 2 3 230 1 15 60 35 119 26 4 80 5 76 1000 78305511 96405781 460 1 15 30 15 59 19 2 80 5 76 1000 78355511 96405794 460 1 15
246. mpany If not correct and or replace as necessary 2 Three phase current Check current draw on each lead If current unbalance is not within 5 unbalance Unbalance must be within 5 contact power company 3 Control box wiring and components single phase only 4 Defective capacitor single phase only 5 Starting relay Franklin single phase motors only Check that control box parts match the parts list Check to see that wiring matches wiring diagram Check for loose or broken wires or terminals Turn off power and discharge capacitor Check using an ohmmeter Rx100K When the meter is connected the needle should jump forward and slowly drift back Check resistance of relay coil with an ohmmeter Rx1000K Check contacts for wear Correct as required If no meter movement replace the capacitor Replace defective relay Page 14 Technical Data Table A Minimum Water Flow Requirements for Submersible Pump Motors 18 NOTES 1 A flow inducer or sleeve must be used if the water enters the well above the motor or if there is unsufficient water flow past the motor 2 The minimum recommended water velocity over 4 motors is 0 25 feet per second 3 The minimum recommended water velocity over 6 8 and 10 motors is 0 5 feet per second Table C Transformer Capacity Required for Three Phase Submersible Pump Motors Table B Guide for Engine Driven Generators in Submersi
247. n Names of the measuring cells contained in the software e AQC D1 e AQC D2 e AQC D3 HP peroxide The measuring cell that corresponds to the selected measured value can be selected e AQC D1 AQC D2 AQC D3 with chlorine chlorine dioxide or ozone e AQC D1 AQC D3 HP with peroxide Monitoring the cleaning motor measuring cells AQC D1 Having selected measuring cell type AQC D1 press OK to get to the cleaning motor submenu 1 Switch the monitoring of the cleaning motor on off Measuring cell AQC D2 D3 selected chlorine TMO03 6708 4506 Fig 22 Chlorine measurement with AQC D2 D3 A black bar on the display indicates the actual data of the water sensor See installation and operating instructions for the potentiostatic measuring cell AQC D2 D3 29 13 5 4 Setting the measuring ranges for chlorine chlorine dioxide ozone peroxide and pH In the measuring ranges menu the corresponding measuring ranges are assigned to the measured values which have been selected in the parameters menu e Inthe measuring ranges menu the following options are available standard measuring ranges others See section 10 4 Measuring ranges The measuring ranges for temperature can be defined in C Celsius or in F Fahrenheit The temperature submenu is only shown if the temperature measurement has been switched on in the parameter menu or if parameter pH has bee
248. n only with sensor optional diaphragm leakage detection only with sensor optional access code protected settings e remote on off Hall sensor for motor monitoring calibration adjust the pump to local operating conditions dosing capacity display can be reset operating hours counter cannot be reset e interface PROFIBUS optional Operating modes e manual input display of the dosing flow in I h or gal h Quasi continuous dosing short suction stroke dosing stroke as long as possible contact signal control input display in ml contact most constant dosing current signal control 0 20 mA 4 20 mA Adjustment of volumetric flow proportional to the current signal displayed in I h Weighting of current input output batch dosing setting the dosing capacity and dosing flow per batch triggered manually or by an external contact signal batch dosing with timer functions setting the dosing capacity and dosing flow per batch setting thestart time for first batch setting the repeat time for subsequent batches slow mode for viscous media long suction stroke Inputs and outputs Inputs Maximum load 12 V 5 mA Minimum pulse length 10 ms Minimum pause time 20 ms Contact signal Current 0 20 mA Remote on off Maximum load 22 Q Maximum load 12 V 5 mA Tank empty signal Maximum load 12 V 5 mA Dosing controller and diaphragm leakage sensor Outputs
249. n error if the pump system is not monitored The system must be protected redundantly Setting batch dosing Batch mode is controlled at the first and second function levels The batch quantity is set in the second function level e The batch function is enabled in the first function level Input range for the batch quantity 0 0 999 9 ml 1 00 99 99 I 2 00 Fig 65 Setting batch dosing In the second function level OFF B appears in the display 1 Press the Up button ON P appears in the display 2 Press the Start Stop button The currently defined flow rate appears in the display 3 Use the Up and Down buttons to enter the desired flow rate 4 Press the Start Stop button The currently defined batch quantity appears in the display 5 Use the Up and Down buttons to enter the desired batch quantity Press the Menu Info button confirm the setting and move on to the next menu item or press the Start Stop button confirm the setting close the second function level and enable batch dosing in the first function level Performing batch dosing Inthe first function level only the batch function is displayed with the Batch manual and Batch contact menu items e Stop and the preset batch quantity appear in the display The LED lights up red Use the Menu Info button to select e Batch manual or Batch contact Input of dos
250. n selected 13 5 5 Controller parameters 1 2 See section 13 6 Selection configuration and parameterisation of the controller 13 5 6 Water sensor In the wat def sensor menu the water sensor can be switched on off In the event of sample water deficiency the following will occur The malfunction indicating relay is activated and the alarm message fault water sensor is triggered e With devices with control functions the actuators are switched to passive or closed The water sensor must be switched on for the measuring cell AQC D2 30 13 5 7 Setting the current time date time summer time 1 Switch from the setup menu to the date time menu time set wl 01 18 40 pm SES time TMO03 6709 4506 Fig 23 Time setting 2 Set the device to the current time in the time set menu in the format hh mm ss Press OK to switch to the next number field The number field which is currently activated flashes Alter the settings by pressing the Up and Down buttons Pressing the buttons continuously makes the adjustment dynamically faster 3 Set the device to the current date in the date menu in the format mm dd yyyy with English as operating language or the format dd mm yyyy for all other languages similarly to the adjustment of time The corresponding day of the week Mo Su is displayed automatically 4 If necessary enter the beginning and end date of the summer t
251. n the dosing head screws After approximately 6 10 operating hours or two days cross tighten the Caution dosing head screws using a torque wrench Maximum torque DDI 0 4 DDI 5 5 2 1 Nm DDI 13 8 DDI 20 2 5 Nm 7 2 Operating the pump To operate the pump see sections 8 Operation and 10 Maintenance and if necessary section 11 Fault finding chart 7 3 Shutdown Warning Risk of chemical burns Wear protective clothing gloves and goggles when working on the dosing head connections or lines Do not allow any chemicals to leak from the pump Collect and dispose of all chemicals correctly If possible rinse the dosing head before shutting down the pump e g by supplying it with water 7 3 1 Switching off uninstalling 1 Switch off the pump and disconnect it from the power supply 2 Depressurise the system 3 Take suitable steps to ensure that the returning dosing medium is safely collected 4 Carefully remove all lines 5 Uninstall the pump 7 3 2 Cleaning 1 Rinse all parts that have come into contact with the medium very carefully lines valves dosing head diaphragm 2 Remove any trace of chemicals from the pump housing 7 3 3 Storage Storage of the pump 1 After cleaning see above carefully dry all parts and reinstall the dosing head and valves or 2 change the valves and diaphragm See section 70 Maintenance 7 3 4 Disposal Disposal of
252. n working on the dosing head connections or lines Do not allow any chemicals to leak from the pump Collect and dispose of all chemicals correctly If possible rinse the dosing head e g by supplying it with water 10 4 1 Resetting the diaphragm When replacing the diaphragm it must be at the back dead point end of suction stroke As the stroke usually ends at the front dead point reset the diaphragm as follows e With the pump stopped LED lights up red press the Up and Down buttons simultaneously The diaphragm is reset 10 4 2 Switching off the pump 1 Switch off the pump and disconnect it from the power supply 2 Depressurise the system Take suitable steps to ensure that the returning dosing medium is safely collected 2 10 4 3 Replacing the diaphragm See fig 72 or 73 1 Loosen the four screws 1q 2q on the dosing head 2 2 Remove the dosing head 2 3 Unscrew the diaphragm Q counter clockwise For pumps without Plus system Replace the sealing diaphragm 3q intermediate ring 4q and support disk 5q 4 Screw in the new diaphragm Q 5 Replace the dosing head 2 and cross tighten the screws 1q 2q Maximum torque DDI 0 4 DDI 5 5 2 1 Nm DDI 13 8 DDI 20 2 5 Nm 6 Vent and start up the dosing pump 65 After initial start up and after each time the diaphragm is changed tighten the dosing head screws After approximately 6 10 operating h
253. na Bombas GRUNDFOS de Argentina S A Ruta Panamericana km 37 500 Lote 34A 1619 Garin Pcia de Buenos Aires Phone 54 3327 414 444 Telefax 54 3327 411 111 Australia Grundfos Alldos Dosing amp Disinfection ALLDOS Oceania Pty Ltd Unit 3 74 Murdoch Circuit Acacia Ridge QLD 4100 Phone 61 0 7 3712 6888 Telefax 61 0 7 3272 5188 E mail alldos au alldos com Australia GRUNDFOS Pumps Pty Ltd P O Box 2040 Regency Park South Australia 5942 Phone 61 8 8461 4611 Telefax 61 8 8340 0155 Austria GRUNDFOS Pumpen Vertrieb Ges m b H Grundfosstrake 2 A 5082 Gr dig Salzburg Tel 43 6246 883 0 Telefax 43 6246 883 30 Belgium N V GRUNDFOS Bellux S A Boomsesteenweg 81 83 B 2630 Aartselaar T l 32 3 870 7300 T l copie 32 3 870 7301 Belorussia l ipencraBurenbcrBo l PVHIIGOC B Muucke 220090 Munck yn Onewesa 14 Teneqou 8632 62 40 49 axc 8632 62 40 49 Bosnia Herzegovina GRUNDFOS Sarajevo Paromlinska br 16 BiH 71000 Sarajevo Phone 387 33 713290 Telefax 387 33 231795 Brazil Mark GRUNDFOS Ltda Av Humberto de Alencar Castelo Branco 630 CEP 09850 300 Sao Bernardo do Campo SP Phone 55 11 4393 5533 Telefax 55 11 4343 5015 Bulgaria GRUNDFOS Pumpen Vertrieb Representative Office Bulgaria Bulgaria 1421 Sofia Lozenetz District 105 107 Arsenalski blvd Phone 359 2963 3820 2963 5653 Telefax 359 2963 1305 Canada GRUNDFOS Canada Inc 2941
254. na la bomba directamen Sobre superficies de arcilla tierra o grava NS BY oen poo In any installation where property damage and or personal injury might result from an inoperative or leaking pump due to power outages discharge line blockage or any other reason gaf system s and or alarm should be used Be upport Deep and piping when assembling and when installed Faute zz d OQ 488 may cause piping to break pump to fail failures etc e pump s motor housing is filled with a dielectric oil for motor heat transfer and lifetime lubrication of the bearings This oil is non toxic to aquatic life However suffocation can occur if oil is left on the water surface If oil escapes the motor housing it can be removed from the surface quickly by placing newspapers on the water surface to soak up the oil The pump motor is equipped with an automatic resetting thermal protector and may restart unexpectedly Protector tripping is an indication of motor overloading as a result of excessively high or low voltage inadequate wiring incorrect motor connections or a defective motor or pump ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS EISEN Check the pump label for proper voltage required Do not connect to voltage other than that shown If pump is supplied with a 3 prong electrical plug the third prong is to ground the pump to prevent possible electrical shock hazard DO NOT REMOVE the third prong from the plug A separate branch
255. nameplate Description Type designation Model Maximum capacity l h Voltage V Frequency Hz Product number Country of origin Year and week code Marks of approval CE mark etc Maximum pressure bar Serial number TMO03 8687 2207 4 2 Type key Example DDI 2 16 AR PVC V G F 31 3 B1 Type range DDI Maximum flow l h Maximum counter pressure bar Control variant AR Standard AF AR with Flow Monitor AP AR with PROFIBUS AR with Flow Monitor and PROFIBUS APF Dosing head variant PP Polypropylene PVDF polyvinylidene fluoride PVC Polyvinyl chloride SS Stainless steel DIN 1 4401 PP P3 PP with Plus system PVC P3 PVC with Plus system PP integrated diaphragm PV npa leakage detection PV integrated diaphragm PV L leakage detection PVC L PVC integrated diaphragm leakage detection SS L SS integrated diaphragm leakage detection Gasket material E EPDM V FKM i PTFE Valve ball material C Ceramics G Glass T PTFE SS Stainless steel DIN 1 4401 Control panel position F Front mounted T Top mounted Supply voltage 3 1 x 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 24 V DC 12 Mains plug X No plug F EU Schuko B USA Canada Australia New Zealand Taiwan E Switzerland Connection suction discharge B6 3 A5 Pipe 4 6 mm Tube 4 6 mm Tube 5 8 mm Tube 6 9 mm Tube 9 12 mm Tube 1 8 1 4 Tube 1 4 3 8 Tube 3
256. nd 412B 6 Remove 108 adapter from frame 228 once removed push mechanical seal stationary seat from machined counter bore Replace or re lap seat as required 7 Remove 123 slinger and replace if required 8 Remove rear bearing cap 134B and pull shaft with bearings out of bearing frame 228 It may be necessary to tap shaft from impeller end by using a wooden block on the impeller end of the shaft and tapping out the complete shaft assembly 9 Oil lubricated pumps are supplied with standard lip seals 332 and 333 and are pressed into caps 134A and 134B The lip seals should be replaced on oil lubricated pumps 10 Remove lock nut and washer 136 and 382 and replace bearings 112 and 168 Inspect shaft for straitness and replace if bent or worn at the bearing journals INSPECTION Check all O rings and gaskets for tears nicks or cracks and replace as required Inspect impeller and casing wear ring if installed for grooving or dimensional wear and replace if worn Inspect lapped surface of seal 383 for grooving cracking or scratches and replace if required Check shaft run out with a dial indicator and replace bearings if required shaft run out should not be more than 002 at the sleeve area ASSEMBLY Reverse disassembly procedure noting the following Mechanical seal stationary seat must be installed into bore machined into item 108 lightly lubricate seal cup and press with fingers or special tool into adapter
257. ndfos Alldos Warning Protect the cable connections and plugs against corrosion and humidity Only remove the protective caps from the sockets that are being used The power supply must be electrically isolated from the signal inputs and outputs Caution 6 1 Connecting the signal lines for DDI 209 A Manual Analog Contacti m 1 m D nv ynv yn al h BS flow SEN vU So output contact analog flow MBS fault stroke tanklevel E 220 240V BI 24V 110 1208 Fig 24 DDI 209 connection diagram 6 1 1 Diaphragm leakage signal Socket 1 For diaphragm leakage signal MLS The diaphragm leakage signal is pre assembled with an M12 plug for socket 1 Connect the cables according to the table below Socket 1 Pin Assignment 1 12V 2 MLS GND 3 MLS supply 5 MLS output MLS is an abbreviation of the function in German language Membranleckagesignalisierung diaphragm leakage signalling Used for wire colours Diaphragm leakage signal MLS Cable 0 8 m Cable 3 m without plug White White Blue Yellow Green yellow Green TMO03 6595 4506 25 6 1 2 Current output Flow Monitor Socket 2 For pressure sensor for Flow Monitor option The pressure sensor is supplied ready made with M12 plug for socket 2 The current output indicates the curren
258. ng a 1761 NET AIC converter and the appropriate RS 232 cable 1756 CP3 or 1747 CP3 a CompactLogix controller can send and receive data on a DH 485 network CompactLogix DH 485 Communications Overview 1747 CP3 Cable or 761 CBL ACOO Cable port 1 Connection from CompactLogix 1761 CBL APOO Cable Controller to Port 1 or Port 2 or 1761 CBL PM02 Cable 1747 CP3 Cable or 1761 CBL ACOO Cable DH 485 Network 1747 AIC Converter SLC 5 03 Controller On the DH 485 network the CompactLogix controller can send and receive messages to and from other controllers A DH 485 network consists of multiple cable segments Limit the total length of all the segments to 1219 m 4000 ft Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 40 Communicate Over Networks Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 For the controller to operate on a DH 485 network you need a 1761 NET AIC interface converter for each controller you want to put on the DH 485 network You can have two controllers for each 1761 NET AIC converter but you need a different cable for each controller To establish DH 485 communication perform this procedure 1 Connect the serial port of the controller to either port 1 or port 2 of the 1761 NET AIC converter 2 Use the RS 485 port to connect the converter to the DH 485 network Th
259. not operate the pump below 10 of the best efficiency point or rated minimum flow or against a closed discharge or Suction valve These conditions will lead to rapid pump failure and possible injury STOPPING Close the discharge valve shutdown and lockout the power supply Do not restart the pump until it comes to a complete stop Exposure to freezing conditions while the pump is idle may cause damage to the pump casing In these conditions drain liquid from plug provided in bottom of pump casing Note When handling toxic or corrosive fluids precautions must be taken to prevent injury or environmental contamination Pumpage must be handled and disposed of in accordance with applicable environmental regulations OPERATION CHECKS Inspect pump frequently during the first few hours of operation Mechanical seals may weep slightly but should run in in a few hours of operation Check pump bearings for excessive heat and check pump assembly for unusual noise and vibrations correct any problems before restarting pump MAINTENENCE GENERAL The pump and motor unit should be checked at regular intervals for any slight increase in noise or bearing temperature Consult the troubleshooting section of this manual for the most common occurring pump problems BEARINGS All ball bearings are lubricated at the factory and only require regular maintenance as required by the specific application Grease lubricated pumps will
260. not unscrew completely press the flow armature upwards and remove it from the mounting plate aes W wt fe D ___ e ALONE 61 o i co e ke Fig 29 Exploded view of screwed part 14 3 2 Dismantling the measuring cell 1 Remove the screw plug R and deaeration spindle R1 and separate them Do not remove the plug from either of the two holes under the screw plug 2 Remove the sample water regulating device and float body Remove the valve insert Q2 and adjusting spindle Q1 and separate them Remove the float body N 3 Remove the filter Unscrew the filter cartridge P Slacken the screw cap for the filter P1 at the upper end of the filter cartridge P Remove the filter strainer P2 from the filter receptacle P3 4 Remove the calibration cup and evacuation spindle Remove the calibration cup I and evacuation spindle J and separate them 5 Remove the shut off spindles and the bleeding spindle Unscrew the shut off spindles of the sample water inlet V1 and outlet V2 and the bleeding spindle L 14 3 3 Cleaning the measuring cell Required tools and aids soap suds possibly diluted hydrochloric acid 5 10 water
261. nt Legal regulations must be observed Damage caused by electrical energy must be prevented for more details see for example the regulations of the VDE and the local electricity supply company 10 2 7 Safety instructions for maintenance inspection and installation work The operator must ensure that all maintenance inspection and installation work is carried out by authorised and qualified personnel who have been adequately trained by reading this manual All work on the pump should only be carried out when the pump is stopped The procedure described in this manual for stopping the pump must be observed Pumps or pump units which are used for media that are harmful to health must be decontaminated All safety and protective equipment must be immediately restarted or put into operation once work is complete Observe the points described in the initial start up section prior to subsequent start up Warning Electrical connections must only be carried out by qualified personnel The pump housing must only be opened by personnel authorised by Grundfos Alldos 2 8 Unauthorised modification and manufacture of spare parts Modification or changes to the pump are only permitted following agreement with the manufacturer Original spare parts and accessories authorised by the manufacturer are safe to use Using other parts can result in liability for any resulting consequences 2 9 Improper operating methods The
262. nt dosing then it is again ready to receive new contact signals i e it rejects excess contacts With memory If the pump is running when a contact signal is received the signal is stored in the memory First the pump performs the current dosing then it processes the contact signals from the memory The contents of the memory are deleted by switching off the power supply by switching the operating mode The contents of the memory are not deleted by actuating the remote on off contact by pressing the Start Stop button by continuous operation The memory function can be enabled and disabled in the second function level 9 2 8 Flow Monitor The pump can be equipped with a pressure sensor Flow Monitor pump option Based on the pressure measured by the sensor and on the motor position an indicator diagram is created Possible dosing faults or the exceeding of the permissible counter pressure are detected reliably and indicated by the display or the error message output The following errors are recognised Pressure exceeded the pump is stopped and restarts automatically when the pressure decreases Dosing error the pump doses 30 to 100 less due to a leaking discharge valve or suction valve a clogged suction line or an air bubble in the dos ing head Depending on the operating conditions it may be impossible to detect dosing Caution F errors which are caused by leaking suction
263. nual operation mode is used to switch off the automatic control and run the control relays manually Manual operation is only possible after a controller has been configured Manual operation can only be accessed with calibration rights or full rights 1 Press Man manual operation controller stop 2 Depending on the set access rights it may be necessary to enter the four digit code number using the Up and Down buttons The LED next to Man illuminates 3 The display reads controller stop All configured controllers are switched off With configured two position and continuous controllers the actuating variable is set to 0 With configured limit contacts the corresponding relay is switched off manual operation controller active 4 Press Man to return to automatic operation The LED next to the button goes out The message controller active is shown on the display for five seconds After that the device automatically returns to the menu from which the manual operation was started Every time the manual operation mode is entered every single controller type must be activated again 13 10 1 Manual operation with configured two position and continuous controllers controller manual stop operation dosing flow 0 100 dosing flow 0 100 TMO3 6721 4506 Fig 32 Manual operation with configured two position and continuous controllers 46 With
264. nward viol _ Upward violation _ Ctrl direction Downward control _ Upward control _ P P PID Type of control Proportional Xp Reset time TN PI PID control Deriv action Tv PID control Int pulse period interpulse ctrl Min ON time interpulse ctrl Max frequency pulse freq ctrl n min Setpoint limit contact Constant load Max dosing flow Limit limit contact Hysteresis limit contact Alarm value 1 Switching point Alarm value 1 Switching direction Upward violation _ Downward viol _ Alarm value 2 Switching point Alarm value 2 Switching direction Upward violation _ Downward viol _ Hysteresis Alarm delay Dos time monit On _ Off _ Dos time monit Max dosing time Parameter 2 Proportional Xp Parameter Controller Setpoint contrl Reset time TN H imit _ PI PID control P Interpulse ctrl Pulse freq cl Cont controller Temp meas Limit contact e Yes _ Downward viol _ No Upward violation _ Alarm value 1 Switching point Alarm value 1 Switching direction Upward violation _ Downward viol _ Int pulse period interpulse ctrl Alarm value 2 Temp comp Control direction Switching point Yes _ Downward control _ No Upward control _ Alarm value 2 Switching direction Upward violation _ Downward viol _ Type of control Min ON time P pH compensation interpulse ctrl Yes _
265. o firmly Build a dam around the baseplate The consistency of grout should be such to allow free flowing of the mixture Follow the mixing instructions of the manufacturer The dam should be completely filled with grout and allowed to set At this point the baseplate should be completely filled with grout and allowed to set before finally tightening the foundation bolts Note Non grouted baseplates result in higher noise and vibration levels which lead to reduced overall pump life PIPING It is important that the suction and discharge piping be correctly aligned to the pump The weight of all piping and valves should be supported independent of the pump All piping should be flushed removing any construction debris prior to final connection to the pump Suction piping should be short direct and one or two sizes larger than the pump suction Avoid the use of short radius elbows there should be a minimum of two pipe diameters of straight pipe between the elbow and the pump inlet Suction reducers should be eccentric type with the sloping side mounted down If suction strainers are required they should be sized to have a free area of at least 3 times that of the suction pipe area On suction lift applications the suction piping must slope upwards toward the pump suction to eliminate suction pockets all joints must be air tight On non self priming pumps a means of priming the pump must be provided On flooded suction
266. o queden ids 8 10 Wire Cable Type cie ote ntes 2 roubleshooling etit 10 14 Splicing the Motor Cable 3 Technical Defter ierat 15 21 TTT e BE 4 5 Limited Walrdhly eiii ders 23 Please leave these instructions with the pump for future reference be GRUNDFOS A Leaders in Pump Technology TEE D M LESAN CEASA AAAS EEN EN BENS OSES EAST NAA IED ENE SSA AAR EARN TE REN KERALA SAN PRE EERIE SSSR ene D ASN EEN RTS RETR SEENEN ETC SAFETY WARNING Grundfos Stainless Steel Submersible Pumps Your Grundfos Submersible Pump is of the utmost quality Combined with proper installation your Grundfos pump will give you many years of reliable service To ensure the proper installation of the pump carefully read the complete manual before attempting to install the pump Shipment Inspection Examine the components carefully to make sure no damage has occurred to the pump end motor cable or control box during shipment This Grundfos Submersible Pump should remain in its shipping carton until it is ready to be installed The carton is specially designed to protect it from damage During unpacking and prior to installation make sure that the pump is not dropped or mishandled The motor is equipped with an electrical cable Under no circumstance should the cable be used to support the weight of the pump You will find a loose data plate with an adhesive back
267. o the supply bottle Flush the calibration cup I with water 4 Press OK to automatically jump to the menu buffer value 2 Buffer 2 1 Select one of the two other buffer values 2 Fill the calibration cup I up to the mark with buffer solution 3 Screw the calibration cup 1 into the flow armature F 4 Press OK to automatically read the measured signal of buffer value 2 and compare it with the buffer values The calibration result is then displayed sensor gradient asymmetry potential CALDATA pH slope 60 17 mV pH asymmetry pot 19 mV 5 Then discard the buffer solution Unscrew the calibration cup I Do not return the buffer solution to the supply bottle Flush the calibration cup I with water Screw the calibration cup I into the flow armature F 6 Go back to the menu calibration with ESC Then calibrate the chlorine value Calibrating the parameters chlorine chlorine dioxide and ozone e DIP Select the left hand display for chlorine with the Select button 1 Select the calibration function with the CAL button The LED illuminates 2 Press OK to select the menu calibration 3 Select chlorine and confirm with OK chlorine cal meas value cal result cal cycle 4 Enter the reference value for instance the value measured photometrically using DIT The measured signal is then read in automatically and compared with the reference value
268. ol 7 Specify DF1 settings Communicate with ASCII Devices You can use the serial port to interface with ASCII devices when the controller is configured for user mode For example you can use the serial port to e read ASCII characters from a weigh scale module or bar code reader e send and receive messages from an ASCII triggered device such as a MessageView terminal ASCII Device Serial Communications AFLA T i O go L O am mre e se mr O se MITT ef DD e TTT TTT e Lf EE E EE i o Wann E li ae i i f GG CC OEC CJ ES EE SES USC Ji Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 36 Communicate Over Networks To configure the controller for ASCII communications perform this procedure 1 In RSLogix 5000 programming software right click your controller and select Properties 88 Backplane CompactLoc REIS s 1769 L35 ca Contre Compact 8 0 cc 8 un i gt escription Samr A
269. oller is empty partially filled or completely filled depending on the set dosing rate and when configured accordingly and the filling of the bar always refers to 100 of dosing rate Example om 50 100 I 36 TMO03 6736 4506 13 6 4 Adaptation An adaptation can be started to simplify the setting of the controller parameters The adaptation is only available for Pl and PID controllers 1 Start adaptation in the controller menu main menu under adaptation by pressing start chlorine 0 43 mg l adaptation Fig 27 Chlorine measurement with adaptation of continuous controller TMO03 6715 4506 2 Return to the display measured value automatically A black bar on the display indicates the adaptation process The LED next to the Man button flashes during the whole adaptation A progress bar shows the advancement of the adaptation The configured controllers can only be adapted separately Onupward control the measuring value has to be more than 20 below the setpoint On downward control the measuring value has to be more than 20 above the setpoint In case of a fault the message Start conditions false is shown directly after the start 3 The message adaptation successful is shown after ending the adaptation 4 Press OK or Esc to quit The determined controller settings are automatically adapted by the parameterisation of the controller T
270. oller to a modem or an ASCII device consider installing an isolator between the controller and modem or ASCII device An isolator is also recommended when connecting the controller directly to a programming workstation One possible isolator is the 1761 NET AIC interface converter a Port 2 Mini DIN 8 RS 232 EXTERNAL O Port 1 DB 9 RS 232 DIE i a DC Power Source Selector Switch O O Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 E Terminals for External 24V dc ii Power Supply Communicate Over Networks 33 2 Select the appropriate cable Are you using Then use this cable an isolator No The 1756 CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller cp icp 2 RDX 2 RDX 4 DTR 4 DTR COMMON m COMMON 6 DSR e DSR 7 RTS gt 7 RTS 8 CTS 8 CTS 9 9 If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell that surrounds the pins on both ends of the cable You can also use a 1747 CP3 cable from the SLC product family This cable has a taller right angle connector housing than that of the 1756 CP3 cable Yes The 1761 CBL APOO cable right angle connec
271. ompare PhaseManager to Other State Models 88 Minimum System Requirements 000 39 Equipment Phase Instructions 0 0 0000000005 89 Chapter 8 TRO TE MOM EE 91 Prevent a Major Fault During a Load 92 Use Compac FASE Reade u buch Sat bole deas 92 Additional RESOULCES lt 2 atc obe Adak CE SEES oes 92 Chapter 9 t EOGU CHO 2 cio bs Seeds he een eee Kd E E ENS S 93 Check Ir the Battery B EOW 5e os tutti SR eege RS 93 Estimate 1769 BA Battery te 94 POLS EE e e Set tse hee apicis recta det 94 Additional Resources llle 94 Appendix A Tia te rel CHO DEE 95 1769 L31 CompactLogix Controller 95 1769 L32C and 1769 L35CR CompactLogix Controllers 97 1769 L32E and 1769 L35E CompactLogix Controllers 98 Realediime Clock AGCULACY esu reote Ve eoe eoe esos 100 Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 8 Table of Contents LED Indicators Dynamic Memory Allocation in CompactLogix Controllers Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 Appendix B rtr o UICE 2 mings dex aree RAS Meg XE MS uw RE ORC NUR ee 103 1769 L3xx Controllers LED Indicators 103 CompactFlash LED Indicator 224225 642k e 3 abet ees 105 RS 232 Serial Port LED Indicators 00 105 ControlNet LED Indicators lesen 106 Interpret ControlNet Network LED Indicators 106 Module Status MS LED Indicator 107 Network Channel LED
272. onfirm the setting and close the service level 3 Pre empty signal NO NC input 9 NO or 3 NC appears in the display empty signal symbol flashes in the display Use the Up and Down buttons to switch between 3 NO Pre empty signal normally open contact and 3 NC Pre empty signal normally closed contact Press the Menu Info button confirm the setting and move on to the next menu item or press the Start Stop button confirm the setting and close the service level 4 Empty signal NO NC input 4 NO or 4 NC appears in the display empty signal symbol lights up in the display Use the Up and Down buttons to switch between 4 NO Empty signal normally open contact and 4 NC Empty signal normally closed contact e Press the Menu Info button confirm the setting and move on to the next menu item or press the Start Stop button confirm the setting and close the service level 46 5 Error signal NO NC output 5 NO or 5 NC appears in the display ERROR flashes in the display Use the Up and Down buttons to switch between 5 NO Error signal relay normally open contact and 5 NC Error signal relay normally closed contact Press the Menu Info button confirm the setting and move on to the next menu item or press the Start Stop button confirm the setting and close the service level 6 Remote off N
273. operational safety of the supplied pump is only ensured if it is used in accordance with section 1 General information The specified limit values must under no circumstances be exceeded 2 10 Safety of the system in the event of a failure in the dosing system DDI 209 dosing pumps are designed according to the latest technologies and are carefully manufactured and tested However a failure may occur in the dosing system Systems in which dosing pumps are installed must be designed in such a way that the safety of the entire system is still ensured following a failure of the dosing pump Provide the relevant monitoring and control functions for this 3 Transport and intermediate storage 3 1 Transport Do not throw or drop the pump 3 2 Delivery The DDI 209 dosing pump is delivered in a cardboard box Place the pump in the packaging during transport and intermediate storage 3 3 Unpacking Retain the packaging for future storage or return or dispose of the packaging in accordance with local regulations 3 4 Intermediate storage Permissible storage temperature 10 C to 50 C Permissible air humidity max relative humidity 92 non condensing 3 5 Return Return the pump in its original packaging or equivalent The pump must be thoroughly cleaned before it is returned or stored It is essential that there are no traces of toxic or hazardous media remaining on the pump Grundfos Alldos accepts no
274. ore puttin end plate over shaft thoroughly clean and oi both lapped faces Then slide eni plate on shaft and press it tn as far as it will go Do not allow it to spring out or move backward Tighten screws or bolts uniformly to keep the face of the seat at right angles to shaft Tightening of end plate automatically sets seal in proper position 5 Make sure all by pass connections are properly attached 6 Bleed all air and vapor from unit prior to start and make sure there is liquid SPRING HOLDER in seal housing to insure proper initial lubrication for seal faces Never run SNAP RING seals dry SLEEVE ABOUT 1 32 DRIVING BAND OVER SHAFT DIAMETER FIG 5 NOTE When sliding seal assembly on shaft be sure to press ONLY on Meer on SERE EUN tail sections of bellows and driving AND DRIVING BAND band as illustrated by Fig 5 Use a smooth sleeve of about 1 32 over shaft diameter with a wall thickness sufficient to butt against the driving band Installing Double Type 21 Seal l Install both inboard and outboard seats and clean lapped faces 2 Place washer and bellows inboard assembly on shaft not spring and slide into position against inboard seat In case finger pressure can not be applied see Fig 5 above 3 Install spring into position making sure it is proper ly seated over cail of bellows 4 Place washer and bellows outboard assembly on sliaft and slide into a position Make sure
275. orrect before starting up the device 9 Identification 9 1 Nameplate I pIA 2 1 D HP 2 P W G L384220010000 gie S N 08 08565 2 3 4 5 11 6 GRUNDFOS ALLDOS Conex DIA 2 230 240V 50 60Hz 15 VA IP 65 96622366P1108060808565 OL UN Ce Made in Germany EY 7 8 Fig 1 Nameplate Conex DIA 2 o d c o o oc o Il Description Type designation Model Product name Voltage V Frequency Hz Product number Country of origin Year and week of production 10 Power consumption VA 11 Enclosure class 12 Serial number Marks of approval CE mark etc TM04 0452 0708 9 2 Type key Conex DIA 2 controllers Type key example DIA 2 1 D HP 2 P W G Example DIA 2 1 D HP 2 P W G Measuring amplifier and controller DIA 2 Dosing Instrumentation Advanced with 2 inputs Input parameter 1 D Chlorine Cl5 chlorine dioxide CIO2 or ozone O3 HP Hydrogen peroxide H202 Input parameter 2 P pH Mounting W Wall mounted P Panel mounted G 1 x 230 V 50 60 Hz H 1 x 120 V 50 60 Hz 24 VDC 10 9 3 Type key Conex DIA 2 preassembled systems Type key example DIA 2 A D1 P PT PCB QS T W G Example DIA 2 A D1 P PT PCB QS T W G Units for measurement and control DIA 2 Dosing Instrumentation Advanced with 2 inputs Assembly A Preassembled Cell type D1 Pressure proof with cleaning motor D2 Pressure proof
276. ort 11 Delivery 11 Unpacking 11 Intermediate storage 11 Return 11 Technical data 11 Identification 11 Type key 12 General description 13 Dimensional sketches 17 Weight 19 Materials 19 Control unit 19 Installation 20 General information on installation 20 Installation location 20 Mounting 20 Installation examples 21 Installation tips 22 Tube pipe lines 23 Electrical connections 24 Connecting the signal lines for DDI 209 25 Connecting the power supply cable 28 Start up shutdown 28 Initial start up subsequent start up 28 Operating the pump 31 Shutdown 31 Operation 32 Control and display elements 32 Switching on off 32 Checking the dosing flow with Plus system 32 Deaeration 33 Changing the tank with Plus system 33 How to use the control unit 33 Menu levels 33 General functions of the control unit 33 Signal outputs 35 First function level 36 Second function level 38 9 6 Calibration 41 9 7 Service level 44 9 8 Resetting to default settings 47 9 9 Current signal control 0 20 mA 4 20 mA 47 9 10 Flow Monitor 54 9 11 Batch menu batch mode 59 9 12 Timer menu timer mode 60 9 13 Creating a master slave application 62 9 14 Hotkeys info keys 63 10 Maintenance 64 10 1 General notes 64 10 2 Maintenance intervals 64 10 3 Cleaning suction and discharge valves 64 10 4 Replacing the diaphragm 65 11 Fault finding chart 67 12 Disposal 68 Warning AN These complete installation and operating instructions are also avai
277. ositive pressure difference of at least 1 bar must be ensured between the counter pressure at the injection point and the pressure of the dosing medium at the pump suction valve 22 If this cannot be ensured install a pressure loading valve 7i immediately before the outlet or the injection unit p 2 1 bar ids gt amp d wu Dir TN oe ni Kai TMO03 6229 4506 Fig 15 Installation with pressure loading valve To avoid the siphon effect install a pressure loading valve 7i in the discharge line and if necessary a solenoid valve 14i in the suction line Di p2 p4 gt 1 bar _ due Ti P A D B S ZS pa x B l AV I 3 T _ p 3 SE Fig 16 Installation to avoid the siphon effect To protect the dosing pump against excessive pressure build up install a relief valve 61 in the discharge line For degassing media Flooded suction not with Plus system Install a filter 15i in the suction line to prevent the valves being contaminated oa JP TMO03 6231 4506 Fig 17 Installation with relief valve and filter When installing the suction line observe the following Keep the suction line as short as possible Prevent it from becoming tangled If necessary use swept bends instead of elbows Always route the suction line up towards th
278. ossible in order to reduce the delay time of the flow armature Retain the permissible inlet pressure and counter pressure of the sample water Fit a pressure booster pump or pressure reducer if necessary If the counter pressure is under 0 3 bar or if there is an open outflow fit the pressure loading valve V to the outlet of the measuring cell U2 It is available together with an adaptor for the measuring cell Grundfos Alldos product number 96609179 12 6459 400 12 11 4 Mounting The flow armature is fastened to the mounting plate from factory The measuring cell breaks when the screws are tightened Do not tighten the screws only screw them in without tightening them The potentiostatic measuring cell or preassembled system must be mounted vertically Individual device for AQC D1 measuring cells 1 Drill four dowel holes with a diameter of 10 mm and min 60 mm deep See section 10 4 Dimensional sketches drilling diagram 2 Mount the measuring cell and the mounting plate on the wall using the mounting material provided TMO03 5856 1106 Fig 8 Mounting of AQC D1 measuring cell Preassembled systems 1 Drill four dowel holes with a diameter of 10 mm and min 60 mm deep See section 10 4 Dimensional sketches drilling diagram 2 Mount the preassembled system and the mounting plate on the wall using the mounting material provided Distance between the mounting plate and the wall min 20 mm Do
279. ours or two days cross tighten the Caution dosing head screws using a torque wrench Maximum torque DDI 0 4 DDI 5 5 2 1 Nm DDI 13 8 DDI 20 2 5 Nm Co e LO st O LO N c eo e ke Fig 72 Replacing diaphragm without Plus system LO e LO st D E P d 0 S e e S 1q Fig 73 Replacing diaphragm with Plus system 66 11 Fault finding chart Fault 1 Dosing pump does not run 2 Dosing pump does not suck in 3 Dosing pump does not dose Cause a Not connected to the mains b Incorrect mains voltage c Electrical failure a Leaking suction line b Cross section of the suction line too small or suction line too long c Clogged suction line d Foot valve covered by sediment e Buckled suction line f Crystalline deposits in the valves g Diaphragm broken or diaphragm tappet torn out h Empty dosing tank a Air in the suction line and dosing head b Viscosity or density of medium too high c Crystalline deposits in the valves d Valves not correctly assembled e Injection unit blocked f Incorrect installation of lines and peripheral equipment g Empty dosing tank h Sealing elements not chemically resistant Remedy Connect the power supply cable Switch off the pump Check voltage and motor If the motor is faulty return the pump for repair Return the pump for repair Replace or seal the suction line
280. oxide ozone reference value cal meas value automatic reading of the cell signal and calibration cal result slope TMO03 6719 4506 Fig 31 Calibration of the parameters chlorine chlorine dioxide peroxide and ozone Having switched to the calibration function by pressing Cal the display is in the mode measured value and indicates the current measured value 1 Press OK to switch to the calibration menu the first line reads chlorine for instance chlorine cal meas value cal result cal cycle 2 Select the line cal meas value and press OK to switch to the corresponding menu Inthe bottom line the entry field value in mg l for the reference value determined photometrically or analytically and the present cell current or electrode current in pA are displayed cal meas value 0 45 mg l I cell 10 4 uA 3 Enter a reference value for example determined photometrically with the Grundfos Alldos DIT photometer 4 Press OK to start calibration An automatic reading function reads in the sensor data and the calibration is carried out The slope sensitivity of the sensor is calculated Immediately after calibration the result of the calibration is indicated automatically first line cal meas value The slope of the sensor in uA ppm is displayed CALDATA chlorine slope 34 67 uA ppm 45 13 10 Manual operation The ma
281. parameter 1 2 settings in the setup menu EI setpoint contrl setpoint contrl limit contact interpulse ctrl limit setpoint hysteresis prop band xp stop reset time TN deriv action TV int pulse period Min ON time constant load max dosing flow only with PID Geh i only with PI PID SP Fig 25 Settings for setpoint controllers C setpoint contrl setpoint contrl pulse freq contrl cont controller setpoint setpoint prop band xp prop band xp reset time TN reset time TN deriv action TV deriv action TV max frequency constant load constant load max dosing flow max dosing flow adaptation adaptation stop stop TMO03 6735 4506 35 13 6 3 Controller control fields on the display 1 Press Esc once or twice to switch to the display measured value See sections 13 2 Display elements during initial commissioning and 13 2 1 Display modes controller control fields chlorine continuous controller output relay 1 or 2 0 43 mg l 5 20 pH 22 C control fields for pH or temperature pH meas value temp meas value c compensation on Fig 26 Chlorine measurement with pH and temperature compensation The control fields for relays 1 and 2 appear as follows for configured limit monitors two position controllers Unfilled field for relay off Filled field displayed inversely for relay on The control field for the continuous contr
282. ple chlorine select the line others using the Up and Down buttons Press OK to confirm In the subsequent display 0 00 mg l enter the start of scale value of the range using the Up button Press OK to confirm n the same line 0 mA is displayed chlorine 0 20 mg l 0 mA Enter the associated start of scale current value using the Up button Press OK to confirm An additional line is displayed with the scan for the full scale value of the range 20 00 mg l Enter the full scale value of the range using the Down button Press OK to confirm n the same line 20 mA is displayed chlorine 0 20 mg l 0 mA 15 00 mg l 20 mA e Enter the associated full scale current value using the Down button Press OK to confirm and return to the current output menu 13 5 14 Program version program version Conex DIA 2 v0 20 1 20030304 In case problems make it necessary to contact our service department the program version menu enables the operator to easily identify the software components of the actual device Version for example v0 20 1 Last update yyyymmdd 33 13 6 Selection configuration and parameterisation of the controller It takes two steps to set up the controller 13 6 1 Selection and configuration of the controller First selection and configuration of the controller type in the setup menu controller submenu Secondly
283. put Limit Hysteresis Setpoint input Proportional band Xp Reset time T Limit monitor interpulse controller P Pl PID pulse frequency controller P Pl PID continuous controller P Pl PID 0 to 100 of measuring range adjustable in the unit of the measured value only with limit monitor 0 to 50 of full scale value adjustable in the unit of the measured value only with limit monitor 0 to 100 of measuring range adjustable in the unit of the measured value 0 1 to 3000 0 1 to 3000 seconds resolution 1 second only with PI PID controllers 10 4 Measuring ranges Clo CIO2 03 H202 mg l mg l mg l mg l 0 00 0 50 0 00 0 50 0 00 0 50 0 100 0 00 1 00 0 00 1 00 0 00 1 00 0 500 0 00 2 00 0 00 2 00 0 00 2 00 0 1000 0 00 5 00 0 00 5 00 0 00 5 00 0 2000 0 00 10 00 0 00 10 00 0 00 20 00 Derivative action time Ty Interpulse period Minimum ON time Tmin Maximum frequency Basic load Maximum dosing rate Control direction Controller stop pH pH 0 00 14 00 2 00 12 00 5 00 9 00 O to 1000 seconds resolution one second only with PID controller 1 to 100 seconds only with interpulse controller 0 1 to 10 0 seconds only with interpulse controller 1 to 180 pulses per minute only with pulse frequency controller 0 to 50 of dosing rate Value basic load 1 to 100 of dosing rate Adjustable to upward or downward control
284. r TMO3 5853 1106 7 General information This manual contains all important information for users of the AquaCell AQC D1 and the preassembled systems technical data instructions for start up use and maintenance e safety information Should you require further information or should problems occur which are not handled in sufficient depth in this manual please contact Grundfos Alldos We will enjoy supporting you with our comprehensive know how in the fields of measurement and control as well as water treatment We always welcome any suggestions on how to optimise our installation and operating instructions to satisfy our customers 7 1 Guarantee A guarantee claim in the sense of our general conditions of sale and delivery can only be recognised if these requirements are complied with The device has been used according to the information in this manual The device has not been dismantled or incorrectly handled in any manner Repairs have only been carried out by authorised personnel Only original parts have been used during repairs e Only components approved by Grundfos Alldos are used in the complete plant Typical parts subject to wear are excluded from the guarantee for instance a gaskets magnetic stirrer reference electrode and pH redox single rod electrodes 8 Applications The AQC D1 potentiostatic measuring cell is used for measuring the concentration of chlorine Cl2 in the pH range 4 5
285. r 8 3 control panel enclosure Switch the device on and off by switching the power supply on and off accordingly The device itself is not equipped with a separate on off switch 12 3 Relay outputs The connection of the relay outputs depends on the application and the final control elements used Therefore the connections described below should only be considered as guidelines With inductive loads also relays and contactors interference suppression is necessary If this is not possible protect the relay contacts using a suppressor circuit as described below With AC voltage Current up to Capacitor C Resistor R 60 mA 10 nF 275 V 3900 2W 70 mA 47 nF 275 V 220 2W 150 mA 100 nF 275V 470 2W 1 0 A 220 nF 275V 470 2 W e With DC voltage Connect the free wheeling diode in parallel to relay or contactor Provide the relay outputs with a Caution corresponding backup fuse DC AC o TMO03 7209 4506 Fig 10 Suppressor circuit DC AC 12 4 Current output Make sure that the polarity of the current output is correct Maximum load 500 Q The current output can be set to one of the two standard ranges 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA or it can be freely adjusted Connect the screen to earth PE at one end Output 1 chlorine chlorine dioxide ozone hydrogen peroxide parameter 1 This current output shows the displayed measured value as an analog current signal Use of current signal for measured v
286. r basis When cleaning the measuring electrode do not unscrew it from the cleaning motor 14 2 Cleaning and replacing the filter Required tools and aids water soft brush 1 Close the connection to the sample water inlet U1 and outlet U2 2 Unscrew the filter cartridge P 3 Unscrew the plastic screw thread P1 at the upper end of the filter cartridge P using a screwdriver or coin if necessary 4 Remove the filter strainer P2 from the filter receptacle P3 and clean it under running water Use a soft brush if necessary 5 If damaged Replace the filter strainer P2 6 Re assemble the filter cartridge P in reverse order 7 Check the tightness of the filter cartridge P After cleaning check the sample water flow rate and adjust it if necessary Pir TMO3 5880 1106 Fig 28 Filter 14 3 Cleaning the flow armature 14 3 1 Removing the measuring cell The measuring cell must only be removed by E authorised personnel 1 Close the water inlet and switch off the measuring cell Close the shut off spindles of the sample water inlet V1 and outlet V2 Close and or switch off the device controlled for instance a gas dosing unit or dosing pump Wait until the display of the measuring amplifier is at zero Switch off the electricity supply to the measuring amplifier and cleaning motor 22 2 Empty the measuring
287. r personal injury might result from an inoperative or leaking pump due to power outages discharge line blockage or any other reason a backup system s and or alarm should be used Support pump and piping when assembling and when installed Failure to do so may cause piping to break pump to fail motor bearing failures etc This pump s motor housing is filled with a dielectric oil for motor heat transfer and lifetime lubrication of the bearings This oil is non toxic to aquatic life However suffocation can occur if oil is left on the water surface If oil escapes the motor housing it can be removed from the surface quickly by placing newspapers on the water surface to soak up the oil The pump motor is equipped with an automatic resetting thermal protector and may restart unexpectedly Protector tripping is an indication of motor overloading as a result of excessively high or low voltage inadequate wiring incorrect motor connections or a defective motor or pump ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS WLAwARNINGA Check the pump label for proper voltage required Do not connect to voltage other than that shown If pump is supplied with a 3 prong electrical plug the third prong is to ground the pump to prevent possible electrical shock hazard DO NOT REMOVE the third prong from the plug A separate branch circuit is recommended Do not use 1 TARE SSNPS ESSA NNT ENSIGN ENEE US PCT BES FE RATA EE S E i
288. r than design head Ensure the driver speed is correct Impeller is clogged Check that all valves and discharge line is fully open Check for correct rotation 6 Suction lift is to high or insufficient submergence of the suction pipe 7 Incorrect impeller diameter 8 Excessive impeller clearance 9 Viscosity or specific gravity is greater than that for which the pump is capable 10 Air leaks in suction pipe system 11 Pump is not primed 12 Insufficient NPSH available gt Wh CA Loss of suction following a period of satisfactory operation 1 Air leaks in suction pipe system 2 Mechanical seal failure causing pump to loose prime 3 Suction lift to high or insufficient NPSH available 4 Entrained air or gas in pumped fluid Defective casing or flange gasket 6 Clogged suction strainer CA PUMP OVERLOADS DRIVER l 2 Driver speed to high for pump design System head is to low and pump is delivering to much flow Fluid is of greater viscosity or specific gravity than the pump was sized for Binding or rubbing of the rotation element Check for impeller rub faulty bearings or bent shaft Impeller may be oversize Check with supplier before taking corrective action EXCESSIVE VIBRATION J Q tA P Lu Ne Insufficient submergence of suction Impeller clogged or out of balance Worn out bearings Bent shaft Misalignment of pump as
289. radually close the discharge valve and pump and inspect discharge section read pressure at shut off After taking Remove blockage repair valve and reading open valve to its previous valve seat if necessary Check for other position Convert PSI to feet damage Rinse out pump and re install For water PSI x 2 31 ft PSI ft and add this to the total vertical distance from the pressure gauge to the water level in the well while the pump is running Refer to the specific pump curve for the shut off head for that pump model If the measured head is close to the curve pump is probably OK 3 Inlet strainer is clogged Same as B 2 above If not close to the pump curve remove pump and inspect Clean strainer inspect integral check valve for blockage rinse out pump and re install 4 Pump is damaged Same as B 2 above If damaged repair as necessary Rinse out pump and re install C Pump Runs But at Reduced Capacity 1 Wrong rotation three Check for proper electrical connection Correct wiring and change leads as phase only in control panel required 2 Draw down is larger Check draw down during pump Lower pump if possible If not throttle than anticipated operation discharge valve and install water level control 3 Discharge piping or Examine system for leaks Repair leaks valve leaking 4 Pump strainer or check Same as B 2 above If not close to the pump curve remove valve are clogged pump and inspect Cl
290. ration menu 2 Select cal meas value and press OK to switch to the corresponding menu Selecting buffer types and buffer values reading in buffer values and calibrating Three optional buffer types are available e GRUNDFOS buffer values pH 4 01 7 00 9 18 e DIN NIST buffer values pH 4 01 6 86 9 18 others Lower and upper buffer values can be freely adjusted difference at least 1 pH within the configured pH value measuring range setup menu buffer GRUNDFOS DIN NIST others 1 Select a buffer type using the Up and Down buttons 2 Press OK to jump to the temperature menu automatically 3 Enter the temperature of the buffer solution used 4 Press OK to jump to the buffer value 1 menu automatically buffer value 1 4 01 pH 7 00 pH 9 18 pH 5 Select one of the three optional buffer values offered for the buffer solutions GRUNDFOS or DIN NIST 6 Fill buffer 1 from the storage bottle into a clean calibration cup 7 Dip the electrode into the buffer solution 8 Press OK to start the automatic reading function reading in of measured signal and the calibration The display shows the message please wait during the calibration The automatic reading function during pH calibration has the effect that the correct electrode signal for the buffer value is read in only when the measuring signal remains stable during a defined interval 9 Dispose of
291. rial Port 15 Configure the Serial Driver A sg metti 17 Select the Controller Path 19 Controller EE e oe et de da Ro ee ee E ee er 20 Additional Resources oes 20 Chapter 3 Regel Te 664 4465 4 540 000 ee ee EL bee ae es 21 EtherNet IP Network Communication 22 Connections Over an EtherNet IP Network 23 Additional Resources aa 24 ControlNet Network Communication 25 Connections Over ControlNet lesen Zi Additional Resource 28 DeviceNet Communications ise Aer sot owe 9 ba edd 28 Additional Resource 30 Serial Communications oaoa aaa 31 Conticure dn IsoldtOf EE 32 Communicate with DF1 Devices 0 0 34 Communicate with ASCII Devices 0 00 35 MOCODUS SUPPO 2 4 225 2 8 eg scam ha ded ee Om eH Oe Re 38 Additional Resource 38 DH 485 Network Communications 0 39 Additional Resources aa 42 Chapter 4 atto CIHCLIOLE o 4 31 3 055 oh ian oe be dr bees OES ee fS gra 45 Produce and Consume Dan 43 Send and R eelye MessageS A x scarsa ua m Ce OO bd o ed 44 Determine Whether to Cache Message Connections 45 CONNECHODS ea x3 Deeg A e e Ee Soe eee easel 45 Calculate Total Connections llle 46 Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 6 Table of Contents Place Configure and Monitor UU Develop Applications Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 Connectors EXAM Plot sas dde dex teda 335i pd ws 47 Acc
292. rich Stemick Managing Director Technical Director CONTENTS 1 Symbols used in this document 2 A few words in advance 3 Installation data 4 Installation sketch 5 Instrument settings 6 General information 6 1 Warranty T Applications 8 Safety 8 1 Obligations of the owner operations manager 8 2 Avoidance of danger 9 Identification 9 1 Nameplate 9 2 Type key Conex DIA 2 controllers 9 3 Type key Conex DIA 2 preassembled systems 10 Technical data 10 1 Design enclosure class 10 2 General data 10 3 Electronic data and functions 10 4 Measuring ranges 10 5 Dimensions 11 Installation 11 1 Transport and storage 11 2 Unpacking 11 3 Installation requirements 11 4 Installation in control panel 11 5 Installation of wall mounted enclosure 12 Commissioning electrical connections 12 1 Terminals 12 2 Power supply connection 12 3 Relay outputs 12 4 Current output 12 5 Connections of controller stop sample water sensor and temperature sensor 12 6 Connection of measuring cells 13 Operation 13 1 Control and display elements 13 2 Display elements during initial commissioning 13 3 Software overview 13 4 Main menu 13 5 Setup 13 6 Selection configuration and parameterisation of the controller 13 7 Alarm menu 13 8 Checking the settings in the service menu 13 9 Calibration 13 10 Manual operation 14 Fault finding 15 Maintenance 16 Disposal UU D e o o Oo Oo
293. rodes between 10 and 30 C Keep protective caps moist with 3 molar potassium chloride solution 11 2 Unpacking Caution Do not allow any foreign bodies to enter Check scope of delivery e Assemble as soon as possible following unpacking 11 3 Installation requirements Warning For safety reasons the customer must install an earth leakage circuit breaker for the cleaning motor of the measuring cell and the measuring amplifier Non observance of the general installation Caution requirements may result in damage or errors in measurement ib For safety during service and maintenance the measuring amplifier and the measuring cell must be switched off at all poles To make the switching off easy we suggest installing an all pole mains switch in front of the measuring amplifier The location must be vibration free dry dust free and free of corrosive pungent fumes or aggressive solvents Maximum permissible cable length Individual devices for AQC D1 measuring cells between measuring cell and measuring amplifier or sensor interface 3 m Preassembled systems with Conex DIS DIA or DIP as wall mounted unit completely prewired Preassembled systems with Conex DIA as control cabinet unit Distance between measuring amplifier and sensor interface 100 m Ensure a continuous supply of sample water Install the measuring cell so that the line length of the sample water feed is as short as p
294. rol applications The EtherNet IP network also uses commercial off the shelf Ethernet components and physical media providing you with a cost effective plant floor solution For EtherNet IP communications you can use these CompactLogix controllers with a built in EtherNet IP communication port e 1769 L32bE CompactLogix controller e 1769 L35E CompactLogix controller You can use several software products with a 1769 CompactLogix controller on an EtherNet IP network EtherNet IP Network Software Combinations RSLogix 5000 programming e Configure the software CompactLogix project e Define EtherNet IP communications BOOTP DHCP utility with Assign IP addresses to RSLogix 5000 software devices on an EtherNet IP network RSNetWorx software for an Configure EtherNet IP EtherNet IP network devices by IP addresses and or host names The EtherNet IP communication modules e support messaging produced consumed tags HMI and distributed I O e encapsulate messages within standard TCP UDP IP protocol e share a common application layer with ControlNet and DeviceNet e interface via RJ45 category 5 unshielded twisted pair cable e support half full duplex 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps operation e support standard switches e require no network scheduling e require no routing tables Communicate Over Networks 23 In this example e the controllers produce and consume tags amongst themselves e the controllers initiat
295. ror strokes permitted when starting If the number of error strokes is exceeded the Flow error error message appears FE e g 7 only for Flow Monitor Use the Up and Down buttons to set the number of error strokes permitted during operation If the number of error strokes is exceeded the Flow error error message appears Selection of unit display Unit I h or Unit gph appears in the display Use the Up and Down buttons to switch between Unit h Unit Q I h and Unit gph Unit Q gal h Press the Start Stop button confirm the setting and close the service level or press the Menu Info button for a minimum of 10 seconds confirm the setting and open the pump selection Pump selection The actual pump type must always be selected to ensure error free operation of the electronic control function Otherwise the displayed pump and signals differ from the actual conditions 0 4 2 2 2 5 5 5 13 8 or 20 appears in the display Use the Up and Down buttons to switch between the pump types DDI 0 4 10 DDI 2 2 16 DDI 2 5 10 DDI 5 5 10 DDI 13 8 and DDI 20 3 Select your pump type which is indicated on the pump nameplate Press the Start Stop button and switch the power supply off then back on again confirm the setting and close the service level 9 8 Resetting to default settings You can reset the first and second function lev
296. rt the Conex DIA 2 into the opening from the front Do not damage the gasket 1 2 The gasket must be fitted exactly Hook the clamps into the tightening cones on the sides at the top and bottom Secure the device from the rear using a screwdriver Install a separate sensor interface near the sensors maximum distance of three metres 15 11 5 Installation of wall mounted enclosure Warning Switch off the power supply before installing Enclosure class IP65 is only guaranteed if the terminal cover is correctly sealed if the front panel of the terminal enclosure is closed and the appropriate cable glands or dummy caps fitted Do not damage the terminal cover gasket The terminal cover gasket must fit exactly Fig 7 Mounting drawing 16 C1 27 145 el e Fig 6 Wall mounted enclosure Conex DIA 2 Drill three holes 8 mm as shown in the diagram and insert the supplied dowels Screw the screw A into the top centre dowel TMO03 6691 4506 until it projects by approximately 1 cm See fig 6 Loosen the fastening screws of the front panel and remove the front panel Hang the instrument onto the screw A Tighten the instrument with the two screws B Mount the front panel of the enclosure TMO03 6692 4506 12 Commissioning electrical connections Warning Switch off the power supply before installing Enclosure class IP65 is onl
297. ry if necessary to briefly increase the quantity of sample water with the adjusting spindle Q1 in order to move the cleaning wing X If the cleaning wing X still does not rotate check and correct its position if necessary See section 14 Maintenance 6 Switch on the measuring amplifier 7 Only switch on the device controlled after the first calibration if necessary 12 7 1 Setting the quantity of sample water e Setan average quantity of sample water with the adjustment spindle O1 so that the float body N is in the middle of the measuring tube M In order for the water sensor to work the float body must be at the height of the water sensor 12 8 Calibrating the parameters Clo CIO O5 At first start up or after a long term stop Let the system run for at least two hours to avoid faulty measurements and calibration Due to the electro chemical behaviour of the measuring cell no zero point adjustment is necessary Only the rate of rise sensitivity must be adjusted during calibration During the calibration Keep the pH value sample guy water flow rate and water temperature constant e Check the calibration after 24 hours and repeat if necessary 12 8 1 Photometrical measurement 1 Open the bleeding spindle L and let the water run for a few seconds NO Take a water sample and close the bleeding spindle L C2 Determine the concentration of the measuring parameter photometrica
298. s system at a maximum system pressure of 3 nonabasve 3 bar H202 up to a maximum of 31 can be dosed No flooded suction s non inflammable Maximum permissible viscosity at operating temperature Maximum viscosity Bune ione Normal Slow mode Normal operation Slow mode operation p typ operation operation with Plus system with Plus system mPa s mPa s mPa s mPa s DDI 0 4 10 DDI 2 5 10 200 200 200 200 DDI 5 5 10 100 200 100 200 DDI 13 8 4 DDI 20 3 100 200 Pump type HV variant DDI 0 4 10 500 1000 500 500 DDI 2 2 16 DDI 2 5 10 iin E E DDI 5 5 10 GE 200 500 The stated values are approximate values and apply to Newtonian liquids Note that the viscosity increases with decreasing temperature Permissible media temperature Min Max media Dosin media temperature head g tempera ture p lt 10bar p lt 16bar material C C C Stainless steel 10 70 70 DIN 1 4571 PVDF 10 60 20 A temperature of 120 C at a counter pressure of max 2 bar is permitted for a short period 15 minutes At 70 C the maximum counter pressure is 3 bar The dosing medium must be in liquid form Observe the freezing and boiling points of the dosing medium Warning Observe the manufacturer s safety instructions when handling chemicals The resistance of the parts that come into contact with the media depends on the media media temperature and operating pressure Ensur
299. scheduled connection is unique to ControlNet communications A scheduled connection lets you send and receive data repeatedly at a set interval which is the requested packet interval RPI For example a connection to an IAU module is a scheduled connection because you repeatedly receive data from the module at a specified interval Other scheduled connections include connections to e communication devices e produced consumed tags On a ControlNet network you must use RSNetWorx for ControlNet to enable all scheduled connections and establish a network update time NUT Scheduling a connection reserves network bandwidth to specifically handle the connection An unscheduled connection is a message transfer between nodes that is triggered by ladder logic or the program such as a MSG instruction Unscheduled messaging lets you send and receive data when needed Unscheduled messages use the remainder of network bandwidth after scheduled connections are allocated The 1769 L32C and 1769 L35CR controllers support 100 connections However the built in ControlNet port only supports 32 communication connections With these controllers the number of end node connections they effectively support depends on the connection s NUT and RPI NUT RPL Supported ControlNet Communication Connections 2 ms 0 1 3 ms 1 2 5 ms 3 4 10 ms 6 9 14 ms 10 12 5 ms 12 16 II For each NUT RPI combination the number of connections supported is listed
300. scous liquids is called HV variant in the following 1 3 2 Connection size Pump type Connection size HV variant DDI 0 4 10 DN 4 DN 4 DDI 2 2 16 DN 4 DN 8 DDI 2 5 10 DN 4 DN 8 DDI 5 5 10 DN 4 DN 8 DDI 13 8 4 DN 8 10 DN 8 DDI 20 3 DN 8 10 DN 8 1 3 3 Pump performance Performance data at maximum pump counter pressure Normal operation Q Pump type With p max Standard Plus system l h l h bar DDI 0 4 10 0 4 0 4 10 DDI 2 2 16 2 2 1 9 16 DDI 2 5 10 2 5 2 2 10 DDI 5 5 10 5 5 4 9 10 DDI 13 8 4 13 8 4 DDI 20 3 20 3 Max stroke rate n min 180 180 180 180 180 180 Q With p max Standard Plus system l h l h bar 0 26 0 26 10 1 5 1 2 16 1 7 1 4 10 3 7 3 2 10 9 2 4 13 3 3 Slow mode operation Max stroke rate n min 120 120 120 120 120 120 Observe the maximum permissible temperatures and that the friction loss increases with the viscosity of the dosing medium The maximum dosing flow of HV variant pumps is up to 10 lower At counter pressures lower than 10 bar the maximum dosing flow of the DDI 0 4 10 gradually increases to up to 1 I h The pump can be operated in the range between 1 and 100 of the maximum dosing capacity The maximum display indication is higher than the nominal capacity of the pump because it refers to the default setting 1 3 4 Accuracy Applies to water as dosing medium fully deaerat
301. se inputs from the master pump are forwarded to the slave pumps when output signal pulse input is set They are processed on the slave pumps according to the slave pump settings 9 14 Hotkeys info keys The following important displays and functions of the DDI 209 can be accessed quickly using button combinations hotkeys Service functions Operating state of the Function pump In Run Stop or Deaerate Menu Info mode Move back the diaphragm for servicing The pump must be in Stop mode The pump is disconnected from the power supply Boot function Delete the total dosing i In Run mode capacity Display functions in batch and timer operation Operating state of the Display function pump Display the batch quantity already dosed During the batch dosing since start of the batch jn batch or timer Display total batch operation quantity Display the time that has already elapsed During pause times in timer operation Display the total time Other display functions Operating state of the Display function pump Display the total dosing In Run mode capacity Display the input current In Analog mode 0 20 mA 4 20 mA Activate function display Press the Start Stop button for at least 1 second Simultaneously press the Up and Down buttons Simultaneously press the Up and Down buttons while switching on the power supply
302. sembly Foundation is not sufficiently rigid Insufficient NPSH available Ge Aueniqe 4 0 00dSO WHO japow duund uo 1uapuedeg BORNE EE QNEM SS 91 ee ol sseic ss re ssec oq Jeyedwy vOE 18815 eas gens gens deo Biq p1eoqino L ween 7 SERIES SE Hl t MNOLLllH2e OI Pwa lees Civ uoyer Elt eung Lt 80b KACHS ENOHBA ieeis cae AS ELE 1801S CLE BOIS LZE OZE Lat e uoJ 1562 8 109989 1S EGL jeeis BLL jeeis BSL ege e DEI jeeis iee1s vvEL SS OLE 9ct seqqny EZL OBIS CC KI m cit B 9 o git SS SLE EOL SS 941E LOL oR a c pe1unou awed 19d 13300 UOn29S SSOJ2 od S3dle83sS Grel Ge ELE EEL CBE cit 881 EGL EZL ZLE QTL EBE LLE BOL OLE JO dc SHIDO TONHOAL 80r LSE EOL ELE SLL civ LOL 86 Aueniqa4 OPODdSO WHOA jeeis tesi 1983S eung sung eung You ee ezuoJg jeeis Pes 1203S SNOBA snouen SNOUBA leeis mee 1903S jeeis teers EIDA 1981S ees jeeis TECH Sau oded aiqi Jaded ss ele SS Mle LO ise uon me OI 1S8 jeeis teers jeeis leeis eas jeeis jeeics wes jee1sS 8991S ee ege Jeeis mes jeeis jeeis eem jee1s SS Ole ssese SS OLt seqqny seaanu seqaqny veel wl ren BIS mes 1981S SS Sle uonisen UoH SBD SS 91 ss ole ezuoig SS Ole ssec ezuoig eisen
303. sensor system e The alarm LED flashes The code flashes 13 Gradient error The alarm is triggered if the plausibility check establishes an upward or a downward violation of the following gradient ranges depending on the selected measuring cell Measuring cell Lower limit AQC D1 Upper limit 7 0 uA ppm 70 0 uA ppm Press OK to acknowledge the error message and to return to the display level The calibration data are then imported The instrument is operating in emergency mode Eliminate the fault see section 13 5 Fault finding chart and calibrate again 13 Operation 13 1 Function Various oxidation agents are used for the disinfection of swimming pool water and drinking water for instance chlorine Cl chlorine dioxide CIO2 and ozone O3 It is necessary to measure the concentration of the oxidation agent and to regulate its dosing for various reasons The disinfection effect is too weak at too low concentrations Too high concentrations have consequences danger to health unpleasant odour and taste corrosion damage increased operating costs The AQC D1 potentiostatic measuring cell is used for measuring the concentration of chlorine Cl chlorine dioxide CIO2 or ozone Os and is equipped with additional holders for pH single rod electrodes and redox single rod electrodes and also for a water sensor and an integrated Pt100 temperature sensor The preassembled syst
304. service menu the operator can check all important settings and test the functions of the device in the event of problems that make service necessary In the service menu calibration data and controller settings cannot be altered Therefore the menu can be accessed without an access code Select the line service in main menu and press OK to switch to the corresponding menu CalData LogBook 5 cal no data set 1 10 cal date cal time slope cal temp 1 cal pH 2 actual cell current in pA measured value actual measured value in mg l water sensor calibration value in 1 min 4 actual measured value 1 min controller 1 3 controller parameters controller 2 3 controller parameters current outputs 1 4 values 0 4 mA 10 mA 20 mA on off testrelay L5 relays 1 2 on off test display Fig 29 Example chlorine measurement 40 TMO03 6738 4506 Notes to figures in fig 29 cal temp will only be displayed if temperature measurement or temperature compensation has been switched on in the setup menu 1 cal pH will only be displayed if pH 2 measurement or pH compensation has been switched on in the setup menu controller will only be displayed if a controller has been selected and configured in the setup menu and in the main menu water sensor will only be displayed if 4 measuring cell AQC D2 has been selected in the setup menu CalData
305. signment of current outputs to measuring ranges Calling up program version Calibration function C calibration rights Calibration of selected parameters chlorine chlorine dioxide ozone peroxide pH Manual operation C calibration rights e Running the configured controllers manually 13 4 Main menu 1 Switch to main menu by pressing OK or if necessary by pressing Esc several times Options in main menu main menu controller alarm service setup controller In this submenu a controller can be parameterised This option will only be displayed if a type of controller has been selected in the setup menu e alarm In this submenu the measured value is compared with the permitted value and an alarm is triggered if necessary Service Diagnosis submenu The measured values and the last 10 alterations of calibration data can be viewed In this mode values cannot be altered If measuring cell AQC D2 is selected the data of the water sensor can be viewed setup In this submenu the settings for language parameters measuring ranges controllers etc can be adjusted Selecting the functions calibration and manual operation See the buttons Cal and Man to the right of the display Calibration Press Cal to switch to the calibration menu the yellow LED illuminates Manual operation Press Man to switch to manual operation the yellow LED ill
306. sing The installation site must be under cover Ensure that the enclosure class of motor and pump is not affected by the atmospheric conditions Pumps with electronics are only suitable for indoor use Do not install outdoors 5 2 3 Mounting surface The pump must be mounted on a flat surface 20 5 3 Mounting Caution Carefully tighten the screws otherwise the plastic housing may be damaged 5 3 1 Horizontal mounting 105 TMO03 6222 4506 Fig 10 Drilling scheme Use four M6 screws to mount the pump on the tank or on a console so that the suction valve is at the bottom and the discharge valve is at the top dosing always flows upwards 5 3 2 Vertical mounting Pumps with Plus system must not be mounted vertically T Mount the pump on a vertical surface e g a wall using four M6 screws Unscrew the dosing head four inner dosing head screws 1q 2q Turn the intermediate ring 4q so that the discharge hole points downwards Turn the dosing head 90 so that the suction valve is at the bottom and the discharge valve is at the top dosing always flows upwards Cross tighten the screws using a torque wrench Maximum torque DDI 0 4 DDI 5 5 2 1 Nm DDI 13 8 DDI 20 2 5 Nm TMO03 6223 4506 Fig 11 Vertical mounting 5 3 3 Diaphragm leakage detection With diaphragm leakage detection Screw the sensor from the bottom into the opening in the do
307. sing a thin wire nail or paper clip in the flow direction see arrow on the valve body Dismantle the inner parts seat 4r O ring 1r balls 3r ball cages 2r TMO03 6265 4506 Fig 69 Standard DN 4 DN 8 valve e Spring loaded DN 4 DN 8 valve Unscrew the valve cover Dismantle the inner parts as shown in fig 70 OMe Ooo GO TMO03 6267 4506 DN 4 DN 8 Fig 70 Spring loaded DN 4 valve spring loaded DN 8 valve 3 Clean all parts If faulty parts are detected proceed as follows Replace the valve for stainless steel valves inner valve parts For contents and product numbers of the spare parts kits contact Grundfos Alldos 4 Re assemble and refit the valve 5 Remove the deaeration cartridge 1p 2p 3p under the discharge valve from the dosing head using a pair of tweezers Dismantle the cartridge Clean the cartridge If faulty parts are detected proceed as follows Replace the deaeration cartridge For contents and product numbers of the spare parts kits contact Grundfos Alldos Re assemble the cartridge 6 Refit all parts TMO3 6268 4506 Fig 71 Standard DN 4 DN 8 valve The O rings must be correctly placed in the specified groove Observe the flow direction indicated by an arrow Only tighten the valve by hand 10 4 Replacing the diaphragm Warning Risk of chemical burns Wear protective clothing gloves and goggles whe
308. sing control function during start up operation 60 error strokes are permitted during the start up operation before an error signal is emitted After a further 7 error strokes a dosing error is signalled Default values see also section 9 7 1 Modifying the switch assignment The start up operation is triggered as follows e By switching on the power voltage Deaeration operation continuously pressing the Start Stop button The start up operation is completed e after 60 strokes after the first valid stroke signalled by the dosing controller after short switching on and off the pump by pressing the Start Stop button The number of permissible error strokes can be increased or decreased since depending on pump type for example 60 strokes may take a considerable time during the start up operation Dosing error after start up operation If after seven successive strokes or after the number of strokes which have been defined by the user the dosing controller does not emit a signal this is recognised as an error The error signal relay switches on but the pump is not switched off The LED flashes red e flow and ERROR flash in the display Manual 1 210 ERROR flow TMO03 6576 4506 Fig 58 Display Dosing error Once the error has been corrected and seven valid strokes have been measured or the Start Stop button has been pressed the error signal relay switches off
309. sing head flange 5 4 Installation examples Components Electric agitator Dosing pump Pressure loading valve v V d 7i Hl Og xX Ga E p St 10i Y GI Lg SEI 8 Fig 12 Installation example of pump with manual deaeration Pos qi 2i 3i 5i 6i fi 9i 10i 15i Dosing tank Extraction device Relief valve Calibration tube Injection unit Filter For pumps with Plus system No flooded suction Minimum injection pressure on the discharge side The pressure at the discharge valve must be at least 1 bar higher than the pressure at the suction valve 5i Co y M E N lt o S ke 10 ei J lt gt 10mm stem Co S oO T N 13i vy Approx p 15i 5 10 mm S He Fig 13 Installation example of pump with Plus system 21 5 5 Installation tips For non degassing media with a viscosity similar to water the pump can be mounted on the tank observe the permissible suction lift Flooded suction preferred not possible with Plus system For media with a tendency to sedimentation install the suction line with filter 15i so that the suction valve remains a few millimetres above the possible level of sedimentation lt 1 5m Al Approx A 5 10 mm TMO03 6227 4506 Fig 14 Tank installation With open outflow of the dosing medium or low counter pressure A p
310. t DIS D Dosing Instrumentation Standard for Clo CIO2 O3 Assembly A Preassembled Cell type D1 Pressure proof with cleaning motor D2 Pressure proof with hydromechanical cleaning D3 Pressureless with hydromechanical cleaning D4 Pressureless with cleaning motor for total chlorine D5 Pressureless with cleaning motor for free chlorine P R pH or redox only F Fluoride only PA HP Peracetic acid or hydrogen peroxide only Pressure loading valve P With pressure loading valve A Without pressure loading valve Electrodes for disinfection AU Gold PT Platinum X No disinfection measurement Other electrodes PCB pH ceramic diaphragm with buffer solution PCX pH ceramic diaphragm without buffer solution PTB pH PTFE diaphragm with buffer solution PTX pH PTFE diaphragm without buffer solution PKB pH KCI filling with buffer solution PKX pH KCI filling without buffer solution PGB pH gel filling with buffer solution PGX pH gel filling without buffer solution RCB Redox ceramic diaphragm with buffer solution RCX Redox ceramic diaphragm without buffer solution RTB Redox PTFE diaphragm with buffer solution RTX Redox PTFE diaphragm without buffer solution RRB Redox without reference system with buffer solution RRX Redox without reference system without buffer solution F Fluoride PA Peracetic acid HP Hydrogen peroxide X No electrode Flow sensor QS Flow sensor integrated X No f
311. t dosing flow and can be weighted independently of the selected operating mode See section 9 6 4 Weighting of current input output Socket 2 Cable Pin Assignment Wire colour 1 5V Brown 3 Pressure sensor input Blue 4 Current output Black 5 GND Green yellow Pressure sensor Flow Monitor If socket 2 is also used for current output the plug set product number 96645265 has to be applied as described in section 6 1 6 Accessories cable and plug for DDI 209 6 1 3 Stroke pulse signal pre empty signal error signal Socket 3 Electrically isolated output for stroke pulse signal or pre empty signal and error signal Socket 3 Cable Pin Assignment Wire colour 1 Error signal contact Brown 2 Stroke pulse signal or White pre empty signal contact 3 Stroke pulse signal or Blue pre empty signal contact 4 Error signal contact Black 26 Used for oe Flow Monitor output Brown Blue Grey Used for Stroke pulse signal pre Error signal empty signal X X X D 6 1 4 Remote on off contact input current input Socket 4 For the remote on off input and contact input or current input If the remote on off and contact inputs are to be used at the same time wire 1 is assigned twice For the connection of one cable use a plug adapter with simple cable entry for the connection of two cables use a plug adapter with double cable entry otherwise the protection will be lost Socket 4 Cable Used for R
312. t pressed The pump switches to continuous operation 3 Leave the pump running until the medium flowing from the deaeration line J is free of air bubbles 4 Carefully close the deaeration valve 8 5 Changing the tank with Plus system For pumps with Plus system the tank can also be changed during operation by using the supply of dosing medium in the priming chamber Warning The dosing medium is constantly supplied from the overflow line while the pump is running Take suitable steps to ensure that the dosing medium is safely collected Warning Risk of chemical burns Wear protective clothing gloves and goggles when working on the dosing head connections or lines Do not let the calibration tube E run Caution empty Changing the tank 1 Remove the suction line overflow line and deaeration line from the empty tank The dosing medium is then supplied from the tank F 2 Insert the suction line overflow line and deaeration line into the new tank 3 Do not immerse the overflow line and deaeration line in the dosing medium Route the lines downwards and without loops There is only a limited amount of time available to change the tank depending on the pump type and dosing flow e g 30 seconds at a dosing flow of 6 I h If air has been sucked in briefly increase the stroke setting to 100 and switch the pump to continuous operation 9 How to use the control unit First see
313. t the control direction as one of the following downward control switches with upward violation of setpoint upward control switches with downward violation of setpoint and confirm using OK 5 Use the Up and Down buttons to select the control response as one of the following P proportional controller PI proportional plus integral controller PID proportional plus integral plus derivative controller and confirm using OK 13 6 2 Setting the controller parameters 1 Select a controller in the setup menu and configure it See section 13 5 5 Controller parameters 1 2 2 Select the line controller in main menu using the Up and Down buttons and press OK to switch to the controller menu See section 13 4 Main menu The controller option in main menu is only available if a controller has been selected in the setup menu The options available in the controller submenu main menu correspond to the configuration made in the setup menu 1 Use the Up and Down buttons to change internal setpoints within the selected measuring range See section 10 4 Measuring ranges 2 Select the displayed controller parameters using the Up and Down buttons press OK to switch to the desired submenu and use the Up and Down buttons to adjust the setpoints as needed within the permitted ranges See section 70 3 Electronic data and functions controller
314. t the value Yoyt using OK test current testing the functioning of the current outputs 1 Select the current output to be tested using the Up and Down buttons and press OK to switch to the corresponding menu Depending on the configuration of the current outputs the current outputs can be switched on with the following current values and the current value can be output to the system test currents of 0 10 20 mA with selected standard range 0 20 mA test currents of 4 12 20 mA with selected standard range 4 20 mA or with freely adjusted current outputs 2 Select the current values using the Up and Down buttons When a line is selected the state of the current output with the corresponding value is automatically set to on As soon as another line is selected the previous current value is automatically switched off and the new current value is set to on test relay testing the functioning of the relays 1 Select the relay to be tested using the Up and Down buttons and press OK to switch it on or off If either of the lines relay 1 relay 2 or alarm has been selected the relay that was the last one activated before entering the test menu is switched off Considering the current alarm values and controller values the relay is switched on again when the test menu is left test display testing the functioning of the display fthe display turns completely d
315. t value last setting Default values for parameter group 1 Clo CIO2 03 H202 Measuring range mg l 0 00 2 00 0 00 1 00 0 100 Measuring cell AQC D1 AQC D1 AQC D1 Temperature measurement off off off Water sensor off off off Default values for parameter group 2 pH Measuring range 0 00 14 00 Temperature measurement off Water sensor off 32 13 5 13 Current outputs In the current output menu the operator can assign the selected values to the current outputs and then assign the current outputs to the selected measuring ranges In the current output menu the selected parameters are listed in the following order current output chlorine pH temperature e Output 1 parameter group 1 chlorine chlorine dioxide ozone hydrogen and peroxide e Output 2 parameter group 2 pH Output 3 temperature or continuous controller for parameters from group 2 Output 4 continuous controller for parameters from group 1 Assignment of the current outputs to the measuring range example chlorine measurement There are two standard ranges 0 20 mA and 4 20 mA which can be assigned to the current outputs They are assigned to the measuring range linearly The start of scale and full scale values can be freely defined within O to 20 mA in an optional setting for the current outputs 1 and 2 as well as for current output 3 with temperature measurements chlorine Inthe corresponding submenu for exam
316. te Make sure that seat is fully seated and wipe clean 3 Slide the seal plate onto the shaft being careful not to damage the ceramic seat 4 Lightly soap the internal rubber ring of the rotary spring seal assembly and slip in onto the motor shaft with the shiny side of the ring towards the ceramic seat 5 Reassemble the impeller onto the shaft Tighten hand tight only 6 Place a new gasket onto the seal plate 7 Place the casing into position and attach the motor us ing new spring washers and existing bolts Use thread locking sealing compound on casing to prevent leaks Do not over tighten the bolts 8 Check that the impeller is not rubbing with the pump casing by rotating the motor shaft by hand 9 Replace motor s end cover if required 10 Reconnect piping and wiring 11 Reprime pump system SEDATE ANTEC ES EY TERNAL SERED SEARS PEE LARTER RAGA EEN ENEE NALS RRR AV IN RIE ANN a EE SEELEN Fe BEANE TREAD ERIN REAM EEG ER PN A EA PT SHS SIR SKS SEN oi REQUESTS RSA e TELAT SEN TNL ERAN aE ER NEN RELEASES PRISE OT NS FANE OI MEE NS NLP BE NESE PEND ESI EN RODENT KA NEPOS t a a PRECAUTIONS a Whenever reassembly of pump is involved check to see that b Never remove the water flinger from the motor shaft unless the impeller rotates freely within the casing replacing a damaged flinger Be sure the motor has a flinger installed at all times TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE a Pump fails to deliver water
317. th DIP pH single rod electrode 10 2 1 AquaCell AQC D1 potentiostatic measuring cell Cables cable for reference electrode pH or redox single rod electrode 3 m with free cable end cable for measuring electrode 3 m with free cable end Options 10 water sensor with cable 3 m pressure loading valve 10 2 2 Preassembled systems e Cables cable for reference electrode pH or redox single rod electrode 1 m preconnected cable for measuring electrode 1 m preconnected Options water sensor with cable 1 m pressure loading valve Product numbers of the spare parts and optional accessories see section 16 Spare parts and accessories 10 3 Measuring ranges 10 3 1 Measuring range for measuring parameters Cl CIO O3 pH Redox Preassembled system with Conex DIA Clo CIO 03 jose mg l mg l mg l ER LOME mV 1500 0 00 0 50 0 00 0 50 0 00 0 50 0 00 14 00 1500 0 00 1 00 0 00 1 00 0 00 1 00 2 00 12 00 0 1000 0 00 2 00 0 00 2 00 0 00 2 00 5 00 9 00 0 00 5 00 0 00 5 00 0 00 5 00 0 0 10 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 20 0 freely selectable between 1500 0 0 50 0 0 0 50 0 0 00 5 00 0 00 14 00 1500 Preassembled system with Conex DIS D Cl CIO O3 mg l mg l mg l 0 00 2 00 0 00 2 00 0 00 2 00 0 00 20 00 0 00 20 00 0 00 5 00 Preassembled system with DIP Clo CIO O idas mg mg l mgn ER E mV 1500 0 00 0 50 0 00 0 50 0 00 0 50 0 00 14 00 1500
318. that the code numbers for access right have been set some menus and submenus as well as the functions Cal and Man are protected against unauthorised access The protected menus are marked with C calibration rights or F full rights Main menus Controller 1 2 see section Controller 1 2 Alarm 1 2 see section Alarm 1 2 Service see section Service Setup see section Setup Function buttons Cal see section Calibration function e Man see section Manual operation Controller 1 2 F full rights Setting the parameters Relay 1 2 setpoint controller parameters Continuous controller setpoint controller parameters Alarm 1 2 F full rights Alarm settings alarm 1 2 values switching points effective direction hysteresis alarm delay Dosing time monitoring maximum dosing time at constant dosing flow level of 100 9 6 Service Calibration logbook 1 2 the last 10 calibrations Calling up the controller 1 2 settings Test of functioning of current outputs Test of functioning of relays Test of functioning of display Setup F full rights Selecting language Parameter 1 2 selecting measured values e Selecting measuring cell Selecting measuring range Configuration of controller 1 2 e Switching on off water sensor Time setting Code function Display contrast Calling up factory settings Current output as
319. the pump e g from a water meter with reed contact output the pump doses the set dosing capacity The dosing is continuously distributed between the incoming contacts via a controller The maximum dosing capacity must not be exceeded Input range for the dosing capacity per contact sn E aS Ss o St SS A o c So 9 8 E o 9 SD go E Pump type 9 g m z ER co o SE X er a SA Su ml ml ml DDI 0 4 10 0 07 0 001 0 28 DDI 2 2 16 0 22 0 004 0 86 DDI 2 5 10 0 22 0 004 0 88 DDI 5 5 10 0 55 0 011 2 20 DDI 13 8 4 1 24 0 025 4 96 DDI 20 3 1 92 0 039 7 86 Even if the pump receives more contact signals than it can process at the maximum flow rate it only runs in continuous operation with a maximum stroke frequency of 180 min 120 min in slow mode Contact ml 1 75 TMO03 6602 4506 Fig 40 Display contact signal control Use the Up and Down buttons in the first function level to set the dosing volume for each contact signal 1 When the pump is stopped LED lights up red press the Menu Info button The first function level is opened Use the Up and Down buttons in the contact signal control menu to set the dosing volume per contact signal Press the Start Stop button to confirm the settings and to exit the first function level The pump is running LED lights up green 9 4 4 Current signal control 0 20 mA 4 20 mA For current signal control see section
320. the first buffer solution i e do not return it to the storage bottle and rinse the electrode with water 10 Press OK to jump to the buffer value 2 menu automatically buffer value 2 It is only possible to choose between the two remaining buffer values 1 Fill buffer solution 2 from the respective storage bottle into a clean calibration cup 2 Dip the electrode into the second buffer solution 3 Press OK to start the automatic reading function and the calibration 4 After that dispose of the buffer solution and rinse the electrode with water CALDATA pH slope 60 17 mV pH asym pot 19 mV Immediately after the calibration its result is displayed automatically e sensor slope in mV pH asymmetry potential of the electrode in mV 43 Error messages during the reading in of the voltage signal of the pH electrode The calibration may be aborted in the following cases If the electrode is faulty or a wrong buffer has been used The message fault of electrode buffer is displayed If the electrode does not reach a stable measuring signal in 120 seconds The message calibration time exceeded is displayed e If the result of the plausibility testing of the pH calibration data is upward downward violation of the slope range of 50 to 62 mV pH The message slope error is displayed Downward upward violation of the precision exactness range from 60 to
321. the service entrance and a 30 motor starter should not exceed 25 of the total maximum length of assure reliable starter operation Single phase control boxes may be connected at any point of the total cable length 3 Cables 14 to 0000 are AWG sizes and 250 to 300 are MCM sizes Page 16 Technical Data Three Phase Motor Maximum Cable Length Motor to service entrance 2 vors HP i4 12 10 8 6 4 2 o 00 000 0000 250 300_ 112 1 1 7 O 0 j j 2 240 390 610 970 1520 3 X 180 290 470 740 1160 1810 5 i170 280 440 690 108016600 1 1 T 742 i 200 310 490 770 11801770 10 SC 230 370 570 880 1330 1640 15 ee a a TL 20 300 460 700 860 10501270 Le S spp ST HO Sr froo 8401090100 A e ENHEEREEEQHOO D 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2801450 700 1110 1740 3 210 340 540 860 13402000 5 200 320 510 800 12401900 1 J 712 230 360 570 890 13502080 10 270 420 6601010115204870 15 fP290 450 690 10401280 1540 20 350 530 810 990 12001450 25 280 430 650 800 970 1170 1340 20 18350 540 660 800 970 1110 1270 scum Wee ET s 34 t dE sp Ne dpud 2 X 3002070 J J J
322. to 8 5 chlorine dioxide CIO2 or ozone O3 By means of the suitable single rod electrodes it can also measure the pH value and redox potential in plants for treating swimming pool water and drinking water The preassembled systems measure and control the following depending on the measuring amplifier and controller installed Preassembled system with Conex DIA 1 measuring amplifier and controller Measurement free chlorine Cl2 as an option with pH compensation chlorine dioxide CIO2 ozone O3 pH temperature Control chlorine Cl2 chlorine dioxide CIO5 ozone Os Preassembled system with Conex DIA 2 measuring amplifier and controller Measurement free chlorine Cl2 as an option with pH compensation chlorine dioxide CIO2 ozone O3 pH temperature Control chlorine Clo chlorine dioxide CIO2 ozone O3 pH e Preassembled system with Conex DIA 2Q measuring amplifier and controller Measurement free chlorine Cl2 as an option with pH compensation chlorine dioxide CIO2 ozone O3 pH temperature Control chlorine Cl2 chlorine dioxide CIO5 ozone O3 pH redox potential Preassembled system with Conex DIS D measuring amplifier and controller Measurement chlorine Cl2 chlorine dioxide CIO5 ozone O3 Control chlorine Cl2 chlorine dioxide CIO2 ozone O3 e Preassembled system with DIP measuring amplifier and controller
323. to menu item FE 7 The display shows FE and the number of currently defined error strokes that are permissible during normal dosing operation 5 Use the Up and Down buttons to set the number of error strokes until the error message is triggered during normal dosing operation in the range between 3 and 99 6 Press the Start Stop button to confirm the new settings to exit the service level to open the first function level Service level Use the Up and Down buttons to set the number of permissible error strokes during the start up operation in the range between 1 and 99 Use the Up and Down buttons to set the number of error strokes until the error message is triggered during normal dosing operation in the range between 3 and 99 TMO03 6575 4506 9 10 7 Calibrating the sensor after the sensor has been replaced Once a sensor has been replaced the new sensor must be calibrated to the ambient pressure Prepare the pump for the calibration 1 Before screwing in the sensor check that no dosing liquid is left in the place where the pressure sensor will be screwed in 2 Screw in the new sensor with the correctly fitting O ring Screw the sensor plug into socket 2 4 Unscrew the suction valve o 57 Calibration of sensor Service level Calibration of pressure sensor Prepare the pump first Wait approximately 2 seconds Fig 64 Calibration of pressure sensor
324. to process the Hall sensor checks whether the drive is turning If the drive motor is blocked e g due to excess counter pressure in the dosing system this is detected and indicated by the integrated motor monitoring function The error signal relay switches on e 1 min bar and ERROR flash in the display TMO03 6360 4506 Fig 37 Display motor monitoring The pump is stopped Thered LED flashes For possible errors and their correction see section 11 Fault finding chart Once the error has been corrected press the Start Stop button to acknowledge the error 9 2 6 Remote on off The pump can be switched off remotely e g from a control room If switched off remotely the pump does not respond to any input signals or to operator input Exception The pump can still be stopped and deaerated manually e Stop lights up in the display The yellow LED lights up When switched on remotely the pump returns to the state it was in before it was switched off If for example the pump was previously in Stop mode it returns to this mode once it is switched on 9 2 7 Memory function Contact signals which cannot be processed immediately can be stored and subsequently made available to the pump for processing A maximum of 65 000 contact signals can be stored Without memory If the pump is running when a contact signal is received the signal is ignored The pump performs the curre
325. together insulated conductors molded side by side in one flat cable or insulated conductors with a round overall jacket The conductor insulation should be type RW RUW TW TWU or equivalent and must be suitable for use with submersible pumps An equivalent Canadian Standards Association certified wire may also be used See Table D for recommended sizes of cable lengths Page 2 Splicing the Motor Cable A good cable splice is critical to FIGURE 4 A proper operation of the submersible pump and must be done with extreme care If the splice is carefully made it will work as well as any other portion of the cable and will be completely watertight Grundfos recommends using a heat shrink splice kit The splice should be made in accordance with the kit manufacture s instructions Typically a heat shrink splice can be made as FIGURE 4 B follows 1 Examine the motor cable and the drop cable carefully for damage 2 Cut the motor leads off in a staggered manner Cut the ends of the drop cable so that the ends match up with the motor leads See Figure 4 A On single phase motors be sure to match the colors 3 Strip back and trim off 1 2 inch of insulation from each lead making sure to scrape the wire bare to obtain a good connection Be careful not to damage the copper conductor when stripping off the insulation FIGURE 4 C 4 Slide the heat shrink tubing on to each lead Insert a properly sized Sta kon
326. tor to controller or the 1761 CBL PM02 cable straight connector to the controller attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761 NET AIC isolator The mini DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable 6 O l 1T A 2 678 sE gt UE 3 O 5 12 DB 9 Right angle or Straight 8 pin Mini DIN Cable End Cable End Pin DB 9 End Mini DIN End 1 DCD DCD 2 RxD RxD TxD TxD 4 DIR DIR D Ground Ground 6 DSR DSR 7 RTS RTS 8 CTS CTS 9 NA NA 3 Connect the appropriate cable to the serial port Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 34 Communicate Over Networks Communicate with DF1 Devices You can configure the controller as a master or slave on a serial communication network Use serial communications when e the system contains three or more stations e communications occur regularly and require leased line radio or power line modems LI I O O m aa co ooo oo ES oo E EO EtherNet IP 2 Ries em Modem Modem Maden To configure the controller for DF1 communications perform this procedure 1
327. tor to terminal 22 wall mounted enclosure or terminal 1 12 control panel enclosure 21 12 6 Connection of measuring cells Jumper setting All measuring values except for peroxide All cell types position 1 standard Measuring value peroxide Cell type HP peroxide position 1 standard Measuring value peroxide Cell types AQC D1 AQC D3 position 2 move the wire strap of the jumper blue to the higher position c CH 2 Peroxide with AQC D1 AQC 3 Bes 11 Standard CH S ke Fig 11 Jumper setting 12 6 1 Connection of wall mounted enclosure Conex DIA 2 Ni 5 2 BM 7 10 U 8 9 S N N co Lo m CH ke Fig 12 Connection to measuring cells AQC D1 AQC D2 AQC D3 pus 11 1 Fig 13 Connection to measuring cells HP peroxide TMO03 6966 4506 22 FPFEE TMO03 6967 4506 Fig 14 Connection to single rod measuring chains for pH redox and fluoride 12 6 2 Connection of control panel enclosure Conex DIA 2 M B RG C L Pt 100 TMO03 5871 1106 Fig 15 Connection to measuring cells AQC D1 AQC D2 AQC D3 SEL IS EEE AG BR G C L TMO03 6968 4506 Fig 16 Connection to measuring cells HP peroxide Fig 17 Connection to sin
328. tortion that may destroy the unit TESTING PUMP OPERATION AA SERIES EFFLUENT PUMPS 1 These pumps are equipped with a float operated mechanical switch 2 When these pumps are installed in a basin with a sealed cover switch operation cannot be observed The sump cover usually will have a spare that is plugged with a rubber plug This plug can be removed and switch operation can be observed 3 Plug power cord into a grounded receptacle with voltage consistant with pump voltage as indicated on pump nameplate 4 Run water into pump until pump starts 5 Be sure gate valve in discharge line is open 6 Allow pump to operate through several on off cycles CIM SERIES EFFLUENT PUMPS 1 The pump cord for these pumps can be plugged directly into a properly grounded receptacle with voltage consistent with pump nameplate for continuous pump operation CAUTION This type of operation should be used only for emergency use or when a large volume of water is to be pumped Pump must not be allowed to run dry If pump is run dry it may damage pump and void the warranty SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS i AWARNINGA MAKE CERTAIN THE UNIT IS DISCONNECTED FROM THE POWER SOURCE BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO SERVICE OR REMOVE ANY COMPONENT 1 If pump does not operate properly consult the troubleshooting chart if trouble cannot be located with these Steps shown consult your pump dealer or take pump to a Little Giant authorized service center 2
329. toxic substances and one and below micron applications Note Pressure gauges are recommended to indicate when cartridge cleaning or replacement is necessary SM Wing nut E Outlet 3 7 10 Retainer Nut 3 7 16 3 7 16 Rim Gasket Top Plate Filter Cartridge D 1 Cartridge Sub assembly Prior to installing cartridge in filter place top plate on top of cartridge with clip upward Thread on retainer nut securely for proper seal Filter Housing Ports for optional pressure gauges Installation Install filter using 2 couplers for inlet and outlet with 1 coupler for drain pipe Shut off valves should be installed on inlet outlet and on drain pipe to be able to service the filter and isolate it when necessary Pressure gauges are also recommended before and after the filter to easily calculate the pressure differential and to know when cartridge should be cleaned or replaced Threaded flanged fittings for inlet and outlet are available by special order 1 4 FPT Lid Fitting One quarter inch FPT fittings are installed in Waterbetter Filter lids for a number of customer supplied options including petcock for pressure relief pressure gauge sensor thermocouple etc This fitting should be plugged at time of installation if one of these options is not installed Lid Fitting Harmsco Inc Industrial Filters Limited Warranty Harmsco Inc warrants its lin
330. tricity supply Observe the local safety regulations Protect the cable connections and plugs against corrosion and humidity Connect an earth leakage circuit breaker in front of the measuring amplifier and the cleaning motor For safety during service and maintenance the measuring amplifier and the measuring cell must be switched off at all poles To make the switching off easy we suggest installing an all pole mains switch in front of the measuring amplifier Preassembled systems The preassembled systems are prewired 1 Connect an earth leakage circuit breaker in front of the measuring amplifier and the cleaning motor 2 Connect the electricity supply to the measuring amplifier Observe the installation and operating instructions of the measuring amplifier AQC D1 measuring cell The cables are not preconnected See section 12 4 Preparing the electrode cable for connection to the measuring amplifier Observe the installation and operating instructions of the measuring amplifier 1 Connect electrodes to the corresponding terminals of the measuring amplifier 2 Connect measuring electrodes D to the corresponding terminals of the measuring amplifier Fit the screen according to the installation and operating instructions of the measuring instrument The temperature sensor cannot be used with Conex DIS D Place the cables of the temperature 3 sensor so that no short circuit can occur Connect the w
331. type connector on each lead making sure that lead colors are matched Using a Sta kon crimping pliers indent the lugs Figure 4 B Be sure to squeeze hard on the pliers particularly when using large cable FIGURE 4 D 5 Center the heat shrink tubing over the connector Using a propane torch lighter or electric heat gun uniformly heat the tubing starting first in the center working towards the ends Figure 4 C 6 Continue to apply the heat to the tubing using care not to let the flame directly contact the tubing When the tubing shrinks and the sealant flows from the ends of the tubing the splice is complete Figure 4 D Page 3 Installation The riser pipe or hose should be properly sized and selected based on estimated flow rates and friction loss factors If An Adapter Needs To Be Installed d Dep tre It is recommended to first install the drop pipe to the pipe adapter Then install the drop pipe with the adapter to the pump discharge A back up wrench should be used when the riser pipe is attached to the pump The pump should be gripped only by the flats on the top of the discharge chamber The body of the pump cable guard or motor should not be gripped under any circumstance If Steel Riser Pipe Is Used We recommend that steel riser pipes always be used with the larger submersibles An approved pipe thread compound should be used on all joints Make sure the joints are adequately tight
332. uai Hai Rd M Shanghai 200020 PRC Phone 86 512 67 61 11 80 Telefax 86 512 67 61 81 67 Croatia GRUNDFOS predstavni tvo Zagreb Cebini 37 Buzin HR 10010 Zagreb Phone 385 1 6595 400 Telefax 385 1 6595 499 Czech Republic GRUNDFOS s r o Capkovsk ho 21 779 00 Olomouc Phone 420 585 716 111 Telefax 420 585 716 299 Denmark GRUNDFOS DK A S Martin Bachs Vej 3 DK 8850 Bjerringbro TIf 45 87 50 50 50 Telefax 45 87 50 51 51 E mail info GDK grundfos com www grundfos com DK Estonia GRUNDFOS Pumps Eesti OU Peterburi tee 92G 11415 Tallinn Tel 372 606 1690 Fax 372 606 1691 Finland OY GRUNDFOS Pumput AB Mestarintie 11 FIN 01730 Vantaa Phone 4358 3066 5650 Telefax 358 3066 56550 France Grundfos Alldos Dosing amp Disinfection ALLDOS S A R L 7 rue Gutenberg F 67610 La Wantzenau T l 33 3 88 59 26 26 T l copie 33 3 88 59 26 00 E mail alldos fr alldos com France Pompes GRUNDFOS Distribution S A Parc d Activit s de Chesnes 57 rue de Malacombe F 38290 St Quentin Fallavier Lyon T l 33 4 74 82 15 15 T l copie 33 4 74 94 10 51 Germany Grundfos Alldos Dosing amp Disinfection ALLDOS Eichler GmbH Reetzstrake 85 D 76327 Pfinztal S llingen Tel 49 7240 61 0 Telefax 49 7240 61 177 E mail alldos de alldos com Germany GRUNDFOS GMBH Schl terstr 33 D 40699 Erkrath Tel 49 0 211 929 69 0 Telefax 49 0 211 929 69 379
333. uminates Switching to manual operation is only possible if a controller type has been selected in the setup menu The functions Cal and Man can only be accessed by persons with calibration rights or full rights 27 13 5 Setup All standard settings of the device can be defined in The setup menu can only be accessed by persons the setup menu During initial commissioning basic having full rights functions are configured which after that should only See section 13 5 8 Code function be altered rarely or even not at all Eater he EE 13 5 1 Selection of measured values for chlorine chlorine dioxide ozone peroxide and pH parameter 1 off chlorine temp meas temp comp chlorine dioxide on on orn off off peroxide parameter 2 pH comp chlorine on off temp meas temp meas on off Fig 20 Selection of measured value in menus parameter 1 and parameter 2 pH comp chlorine is only available if chlorine and pH have been selected as parameters 1 Select the line parameter 1 parameter 2 using the Up and Down buttons and press OK to switch to the corresponding menu 2 Use the Up and Down buttons to select the measured variable parameter Press OK to confirm 3 Use the Up and Down buttons to select further settings Press OK to confirm 28 TMO03 6733 4506 13 5 2 pH and temperature compensation pH compensation with chlorine measurement The dissociat
334. unicate with other devices in the system Connections are allocations of resources that provide more reliable communications between devices than unconnected messages All EtherNet IP connections are unscheduled An unscheduled connection is a message transfer between controllers that is triggered by the requested packet interval RPD or the program such as a MSG instruction Unscheduled messaging lets you send and receive data when needed Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 24 Communicate Over Networks Publication 1769 UM011F EN P January 2007 The 1769 L32E and 1769 L35E controllers support 100 connections However the built in EtherNet IP port only supports 32 CIP connections over an EtherNet IP network With these controllers the number of end node connections they effectively support depends on a connection s RPI Requested Packet Interval Max EtherNet IP Port Communication Connections 2 ms 2 4 ms D 0 ms 10 16 ms 18 32 ms 25 You can use all 32 communication connections on the built in EtherNet IP port However we recommend that you leave some connections available for tasks such as going online and non I O purposes Additional Resources For more information consult these publications e EtherNet IP Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication ENET UMOOT1 e EtherNet IP Web Server Module User Manual publication ENET UM527 e EtherNet IP Performance Application Guide pub
335. ut also all the specific safety instructions given in other sections 2 1 Identification of safety instructions in this manual If the safety instructions or other advice in this manual are not observed it may result in personal injury or malfunction and damage to the pump The safety instructions and other advice are identified by the following symbols Warning If these safety instructions are not observed it may result in personal injury If these safety instructions are not observed it may result in malfunction or damage to the equipment Notes or instructions that make the job easier and ensure safe operation Information provided directly on the pump e g labelling of fluid connections must be observed and must be maintained in a readable condition at all times 2 2 Marking at the pump The pumps with Plus system are provided with the following danger notice Beware of caustic liquids Risk of causticisation by the dosing medium If the pump is filled keep the cover ZA closed and do not touch inside the priming chamber Before dismantling and transporting the pump empty the priming chamber completely and clean it if necessary 2 3 Qualification and training of personnel The personnel responsible for the operation maintenance inspection and installation must be appropriately qualified for these tasks Areas of responsibility levels of authority and the supervision of the personnel must
336. vate Limited 118 Old Mahabalipuram Road Thoraipakkam Chennai 600 096 Phone 91 44 2496 6800 Indonesia PT GRUNDFOS Pompa Jl Rawa Sumur III Blok III CC 1 Kawasan Industri Pulogadung Jakarta 13930 Phone 62 21 460 6909 Telefax 62 21 460 6910 460 6901 Ireland GRUNDFOS Ireland Ltd Unit A Merrywell Business Park Ballymount Road Lower Dublin 12 Phone 353 1 4089 800 Telefax 353 1 4089 830 Italy GRUNDFOS Pompe Italia S r l Via Gran Sasso 4 20060 Truccazzano Milano Tel 39 02 95838112 Telefax 39 02 95309290 95838461 Japan GRUNDFOS Pumps K K Gotanda Metalion Bldg 5F 5 21 15 Higashi gotanda Shiagawa ku Tokyo 141 0022 Japan Phone 81 35 448 1391 Telefax 81 35 448 9619 Korea GRUNDFOS Pumps Korea Ltd 6th Floor Aju Building 679 5 Yeoksam dong Kangnam ku 135 916 Seoul Korea Phone 82 2 5317 600 Telefax 82 2 5633 725 Latvia SIA GRUNDFOS Pumps Latvia Deglava biznesa centrs Augusta Deglava iela 60 LV 1035 Riga Talr 371 714 9640 7 149 641 Fakss 371 914 9646 Lithuania GRUNDFOS Pumps UAB Smolensko g 6 LT 03201 Vilnius Tel 370 52 395 430 Fax 370 52 395 431 Malaysia GRUNDFOS Pumps Sdn Bhd 7 Jalan Peguam U1 25 Glenmarie Industrial Park 40150 Shah Alam Selangor Phone 60 3 5569 2922 Telefax 60 3 5569 2866 M xico Bombas GRUNDFOS de M xico S A de C V Boulevard TLC No 15 Parque Industrial Stiva Aeropuerto Apodaca N L
337. w is not constant as for example in the case of contact or analog control even small volume flows should not fall below the minimum pressure or minimum pressure difference of 2 bar Set cut off pressure Fig 56 Set cut off pressure 54 9 10 2 Setting the Flow Monitor In order for the pressure sensor if installed to function as a dosing controller the dosing controller must be switched on To allow the pump to switch off in the event of overpressure and to set the cut off pressure of the pump the pressure control function must be switched on and set If no pressure sensor is connected the pump determines the pressure from the motor current For applications with high requirements in terms of precision the pressure control function must be used with a pressure sensor Switching on dosing controller Menu item flow is open e flow OFF appears in the display 1 Press the Up button flow ON appears in the display The dosing controller is activated Switching on pressure control function This menu item only appears if the pressure sensor has already been detected once 1 Press the Menu Info button Menu item P is open P OFF appears in the display 2 Press the Up button P ON appears in the display The pressure control function is activated TMO03 6680 4506 P ON in the display 1 Press the Start Stop button The currently def
338. wide range of micron ratings and may be cleaned and re used in most applications and most micron ratings Mications NS _ SPECIFICATION HUR 40 HP HUR 90 HP nni Flow rate GPM Up to 50 Up to 100 Up to a Ee Filter area pleated AO sq ft 90 sq ft 170 sq ft WS Pipe sizes inlet amp outlet 2 NPT 2 NPT 2 NPT RECTIONS Pipe size drain 1 NPT T NET 1 NPT E NOTED con Filter height a 31 41 euch Filter diameter 13 13 13 REVISE amp F KE see space required eg og 15x15 15 x15 TA ex Service height clearance 31 51 Ta Shipping weight approx 40 Ibs 51 Ibs 64 Ibs Temperature rating Varies based on pressure and time under load Features Product features include 304 stainless steel filter housings e Electro polished for superior finish e Resistant coatings available Fail safe lids with individual studs for security e Brass wing nuts for convenience e 90 elbow and 45 sweep on outlet for in line vertical installation e CPVC standpipe for up flow design e Choice of cartridges available HUR 40 HP 140 60 C 140 60 C 140 60 C S HUR 90 HP HUR 170 HP TTT ET EERSTEN tn ENEE SUT PSE SEEMS SOOO CONNER TERE Kin MASS n YER VAN ASPEN SAO TAN HN EUREN NOT CASES VT eO a T ION Io res ccr za TN EREECHEN AE TYEE ES AU YUAN So AOS SB NE PANERA Yen A eA ERN EEN EERE etr RNAS ER A PSG ETE CET ANT TA EETAS ESTES TAS S bte INSTALLATION amp OPERAT
339. witched on for 3 seconds and the software version number is then displayed for 2 seconds 8 2 Switching on off Before switching on the pump check that it is installed correctly See sections 5 Installation and 7 1 Initial start up subsequent start up To start the pump switch on the power supply e To stop the pump switch off the power supply 8 3 Checking the dosing flow with Plus system For pumps with Plus system the current dosing flow can be checked during operation AN Close the isolating valve D at the calibration tube E The supply from the priming chamber F is shut off and the calibration tube E is slowly emptied 3 Using a stop watch measure the time t in seconds it takes to dose 3 or 10 ml of dosing medium depending on pump type 4 Re open the isolating valve D at the calibration tube E 5 Calculate the dosing flow _ 10 871 y 10m _ 36 1 ll Yea 7 tn Warning Do not let the calibration tube E run empty Re open the isolating valve D in due time N D TMO3 6262 4506 Fig 31 Calculation of the dosing flow 8 4 Deaeration TMO03 6263 4506 Fig 32 Manual deaeration of the dosing head while the pump is running 1 Open the deaeration valve V of the dosing head by approximately 1 turn 2 turns with Plus system 2 Press the Start Stop button and keep i
340. with hydro mechanical cleaning D3 Pressureless with hydro mechanical cleaning D4 For total chlorine measurement D5 For free chlorine measurement with buffer dosing P R pH or redox ORP only P With pressure retention valve X Without pressure retention valve Disinfection electrodes AU Gold PT Platinum X No disinfection measuring Other electrodes PCB pH ceramic diaphragm incl buffer solution PTB pH PTFE diaphragm incl buffer solution PKB pH KCI filling incl buffer solution PGB pH gel filling incl buffer solution PCX pH ceramic diaphragm excl buffer solution PTX pH PTFE diaphragm excl buffer solution PKX pH KCL filling excl buffer solution PGX pH gel filling excl buffer solution X No electrode Flow sensor QS Flow sensor integrated X No flow sensor Temperature sensor T With Pt100 X No temperature sensor Mounting W Wall mounted P Panel mounted Voltage G 1 x 230 V 50 60 Hz H 1 x 120 V 50 60 Hz 24 VDC 11 10 Technical data 10 1 Design enclosure class Wall mounted enclosure distance from sensors up to three metres Control panel enclosure including separate potentiostat 10 2 General data Input power Permissible ambient temperature Permissible storage temperature Maximum relative humidity Weight Enclosure Power supply versions 12 IP65 IP54 front IP65 sensor interface distance from sensor interface up to
341. ws back into the tank via the overflow line H The dosing medium flows from the calibration tube E to the discharge valve 3b via the small dosing diaphragm The isolating valve D must be open during operation Fig 4 Functional principle of the Plus system 4 3 4 DDI 209 with diaphragm leakage detection Fig 5 DDI 209 with diaphragm leakage detection Pos 3a 3b VIO lt QM Ga Components Suction valve Discharge valve Dosing head with flange for diaphragm leakage detection Connection for deaeration line Deaeration screw for manual deaeration Opto sensor M12 plug for socket 1 TMO03 6214 4506 TMO03 6591 4506 15 4 3 5 Functional principle of diaphragm leakage detection Pumps with diaphragm leakage detection MLS have a special dosing head flange for an optoelectronic sensor The pump is supplied with the diaphragm leakage sensor MLS already installed The optoelectronic sensor contains e infrared transmitter e infrared receiver TMO03 6216 4506 Fig 6 Diaphragm leakage sensor MLS If the diaphragm leaks the liquid enters the dosing head flange e the light refraction changes the sensor emits a signal The electronics operates two contacts which can be used for example to trigger an alarm signal or to switch off the pump
342. xceeded Pressure exceeded Pump running WO En Pump waiting E ee 8 eo 2 sec 10 min 10 min g He Fig 61 Pump restart attempts Error correction 9 10 5 Error message broken cable or faulty Press the Start Stop button to stop the pump sensor and prevent it from restarting If the dosing controller and or the pressure control Check the discharge valve and the installation on function are is switched on the missing signal is the discharge side and correct any errors recognised and emitted as an error if necessary A faulty pressure sensor broken cable is displayed For maintenance work see section as follows 10 Maintenance The error signal relay switches on Check and correct the pressure setting The pump is not stopped il necessary The LED flashes red Once the error has been corrected ERROR flashes in the display press the Start Stop button to restart the pump The pump returns to the state it was in before S the error occurred M Displaying the pressure that has been measured 8 The pressure that has been measured during the pump operation can be displayed at any time Press the Menu Info button twice oa Fig 62 Display Broken cable If only pressed once the dosed quantity is g KS displayed Correct error The pressure is displayed for approximately Press the Start Stop button twice to confirm the 10 seconds error and to stop the pump Repair the
343. y 2 Press the Start Stop button 3 Use the Up and Down buttons to enter the desired dosing flow The selected dosing flow appears in the display 4 Press the Start Stop button 5 Use the Up and Down buttons to enter the desired batch quantity The selected batch quantity appears in the display 6 Press the Start Stop button t1 appears in the display 7 Use the Up and Down buttons to enter start time t4 8 Press the Start Stop button t2 appears in the display 9 Use the Up and Down buttons to enter repetition time t e Press the Menu Info button confirm the setting and move on to the next menu item or press the Start Stop button confirm the setting close the second function level and enable timer mode in the first function level Selecting Manual or Contact timer mode When the pump is running LED lights up green press the Start Stop button Stop and the preset start time t4 appear in the display The LED lights up red Manual or Contact appears in the display Manual is default setting TMO03 6617 4506 In the first function level only the timer function is displayed with the Timer manual and Timer contact menu items Use the Menu Info button to select Timer manual or Timer contact Enabling timer mode Timer manual Batch dosing with the preset pause tim
344. y With the dense particles removed liquid and light solids rise up over and into an inner chamber where the rotational flow is continued Models amp Specifications Three Hurricane Filter SPECIFICATION HUR 40 HP HUR 90 HP HUR 170 HP models are available for a Flow rate GPM Up to 50 Up to 100 Up to 150 oce a bn ite qaia Filter area pleated 40 sq ft 90 sq ft 170 sq ft are as follows Pipe sizes inlet amp outlet 2 NPT 2 NPT 2 NPT Pipe size drain 1 NPT 1 NPT 1 NPT Filter height 21 Se 41 Filter diameter is on 13 Floor space required 15x15 15 x157 1S X15 Service height clearance 3s Su 72 Shipping weight approx 40 Ibs 51 Ibs 64 Ibs Temperature rating 140 60 C 140 60 C 140 60 C Varies based on pressure and time under load Features Product features include e 304 stainless steel filter housings e Electro polished for superior finish e Resistant coatings available e Fail safe lids with individual studs for security e Brass wing nuts for convenience e 90 elbow and 45 sweep on outlet for in line vertical installation e CPVC standpipe for up flow design e Choice of cartridges available HUR 40 HP HUR 90 HP HUR 170 HP Harmsco Hurricane Replacement Cartridges Temperature Pressure Flow Rate Ratings Up to 50 GPM Up to 100 GPM Hurricane Filters Up to 150 GPM are rated for pressures to 150 psi Up to 300 GPM and temperatures Up to 450 GPM
345. y guaranteed with the front panel of the terminals enclosure closed and with appropriate cable glands or dummy caps Warning Switch off the power supply before connecting the power supply cable and relay contacts For safety reasons the protective conductor must be connected correctly Observe the local safety regulations Protect the cable connections and plugs from corrosion and moisture Before connecting the power supply cable check that the supply voltage specified on the nameplate corresponds to the local conditions An incorrect supply voltage may destroy the device To guarantee electromagnetic compatibility EMC the input and current output cables must be screened Connect the screening to the screen ground on one side Refer to the wiring diagram Route the input current output and power supply cables in separate cable channels Enclosure class IP65 is only guaranteed if the terminal cover is correctly sealed Do not damage the gasket on the terminal cover The gasket on the terminal cover must be positioned precisely Do not damage the gasket Unused terminals must remain open 1 Remove the terminal cover on the front of the device 2 Use the appropriate cable feedthroughs and tighten the screws carefully 3 Connect the cables used to the terminals according to the Conex DIA 2 terminal assignment 4 Close the terminal cover again with correctly positioned gasket 17 8L

Application – Appendix K – Water Treatment OM Plan – Part 7

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Application &ndash; Appendix K &ndash; Water Treatment OM Plan &ndash; Part 7

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Application – Appendix K – Water Treatment OM Plan – Part 7